Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
1
Manual Revisions
If you contact us in reference to this manual, remember to include the revision number.
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
Conventions Used
DL05 Micro PLC Components
Programming Methods
I/O Selection Quick Chart
Quick Start for PLC Checkout and Programming
Steps to Designing a Successful System
Questions and Answers about DL05 Micro PLCs
12
Getting Started
Introduction
Getting Started
The Purpose of Thank you for purchasing a DL05 Micro PLC. This manual shows you how to install,
this Manual program, and maintain all the Micro PLCs in the DL05 family. It also helps you
understand how to interface them to other devices in a control system.This manual
contains important information for personnel who will install DL05 PLCs, and for the
PLC programmer. If you understand PLC systems our manuals will provide all the
information you need to get and keep your system up and running.
Where to Begin If you already understand the DL05 Micro PLC please read Chapter 2, Installation,
Wiring, and Specifications, and proceed on to other chapters as needed. Be sure to
keep this manual handy for reference when you run into questions. If you are a new
DL05 customer, we suggest you read this manual completely so you can understand
the wide variety of features in the DL05 family of products. We believe you will be
pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products
Supplemental The D0OPTIONSM manual will be most helpful to select and use any of the
Manuals optional modules that are available for the DL05 PLC which includes the analog I/O
modules. If you have purchased operator interfaces or DirectSOFT, you will need
to supplement this manual with the manuals that are written for these products.
Technical Support We realize that even though we strive to be the best, we may have arranged our
information in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for. First, check these
resources for help in locating the information:
S Table of Contents chapter and section listing of contents, in the front
of this manual
S Appendices reference material for key topics, near the end of this
manual
You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information:
S Internet the address of our website is:
In Brazil: http://www.soliton.com.br
If you still need assistance, please call us at 7708444200. Our technical support
team will be available to work with you in answering your questions. They are
available Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Standard
Time. If you have a comment or question about any of our products, services, or
manuals, please fill out and return the Suggestions card that was shipped with this
manual.
13
Getting Started
Conventions Used
Getting Started
When you see the light bulb icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will give you a special tip.
The word TIP: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
When you see the notepad icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will be a special note.
The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to
its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of
property, or even death (in extreme cases).
The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
Key Topics for The beginning of each chapter will list the
Each Chapter key topics that can be found in that 1
chapter.
14
Getting Started
Programming Methods
Two programming methods are available: RLL (Relay Ladder Logic) and RLL PLUS.
RLL PLUS combines the added feature of flow chart programming (Staget) to the
standard RLL language. Both the DirectSOFT programming package and the
handheld programmer support RLL PLUS as well as standard RLL instructions.
DirectSOFT The DL05 Micro PLC can be programmed with one of the most advanced
Programming for programming packages in the industry DirectSOFT, a Windows-based software
Windows package that supports familiar features such as cut-and-paste between
applications, point-and-click editing, viewing and editing multiple application
programs at the same time, etc.
15
Getting Started
DirectSOFT universally supports the DirectLOGIC CPU families. This means you
can use the full version of DirectSOFT to program DL05, DL105, DL205, DL305,
Getting Started
DL405 or any new CPUs we may add to our product line. (Upgrade software may be
required for new CPUs as they become available.). A separate manual discusses
DirectSOFT programming software. DirectSOFT version 2.4 or later is needed to
program the DL05.
Handheld All DL05 Micro PLCs have built-in programming ports for use with the handheld
Programmer programmer (D2HPP), the same programmer used with the DL105 and DL205
families. The handheld programmer can be used to create, modify and debug your
application program. A separate manual discusses the Handheld Programmer. Only
D2HPPs with firmware version 1.09 or later will program the DL05.
If you have experience with PLCs, or if you just want to setup a quick example, this
example is for you! This example is not intended to tell you everything you need to
start-up your system, warnings and helpful tips are in the rest of the manual. It is only
intended to give you a general picture of what you will need to do to get your system
powered-up.
Getting Started
To finish this quick-start exercise or study other examples in this manual, youll need
to connect some input switches as shown below. If you have DC inputs you will need
to use the FA24PS (24VDC) or another external 12-24VDC power supply. Be sure
to follow the instructions in the accompanying WARNING note.
D005DR, D005DD, D005DA
D005DRD, D005DDD
(DC input versions, 1224VDC)
1224VDC
Power Supply Toggle Switches, UL Listed
Connect the power input wiring for the DL05. Observe all precautions stated earlier
in this manual. For more details on wiring, see Chapter 2 on Installation, Wiring, and
Specifications. When the wiring is complete, close the connector covers. Do not
apply power at this time.
LG N +G
95 240 VAC 12 24 VDC
For replacement
cable, use part #
DV1000CBL
19
Getting Started
Getting Started
Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the DL05 is on. If not,
remove power from the system and check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting
section in Chapter 9 for assistance.
OUT
$ A Move to the first
NEXT ENT
STR 0 address and enter
X0 contact
END
GX A Enter output Y0
ENT
OUT 0
After entering the simple example program put the PLC in Run mode by using the
Mode key on the Handheld Programmer.
The RUN indicator on the PLC will illuminate indicating the CPU has entered the Run
mode. If not, repeat this step, ensuring the program is entered properly or refer to the
troubleshooting guide in chapter 8.
After the CPU enters the run mode, the output status indicator for Y0 should follow
the switch status on input channel X0. When the switch is on, the output will be on.
110
Getting Started
Step 6: The DL05 PLC instruction set provides for three main approaches to solving the
Review the application program, depicted in the figure below.
Getting Started
Programming
Concepts S RLL diagram-style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic
and general CPU register/accumulator manipulation. It includes dozens
of instructions, which will also be needed to augment drums and stages.
S The Timer/Event Drum Sequencer features up to 16 steps and offers
both time and/or event-based step transitions. The DRUM instruction is
best for a repetitive process based on a single series of steps.
S Stage programming (also called RLL Plus) is based on state-transition
diagrams. Stages divide the ladder program into sections which
correspond to the states in a flow chart you draw for your process.
PushUP RAISE
X0
LDD
V1076
DOWN LIGHT UP
CMPD
K309482
SP62 Y0
LOWER Push
OUT DOWN
After reviewing the programming concepts above, youll be equipped with a variety
of tools to write your application program.
Q. Do I have to buy the full DirectSOFT programming package to program the DL05?
A. No. We offer a DL05-specific version of DirectSOFT thats very affordable.
Q. Does the DL05 Micro PLC comply with European Union (EU) Directives?
A. The Micro PLC has met the requirements of the European Union Directives (CE).
113
Getting Started
Getting Started
K-sequence protocol. The DL05 can also connect to MODBUS and DirectNET
networks as a slave device through port 1. The port communicates with the following
devices:
S DV-1000 Data Access Unit or Optimation Operator interface panels
S DirectSOFT (running on a personal computer)
S D2-HPP handheld programmer
S Other devices which communicate via K-sequence protocol should work
with the DL05 Micro PLC. Contact the vendor for details.
A. Port 2: The port is RS-232C, with selective baud rates (300-38,400bps), address
and parity.It also supports the proprietary K-sequence protocol as well as DirectNet
and Modbus and non-sequence/print protocols.
In This Chapter. . . .
Safety Guidelines
Orientation to DL05 Front Panel
Mounting Guidelines
Wiring Guidelines
System Wiring Strategies
Glossary of Specification Terms
Wiring Diagrams and Specifications
D0-10ND3 DC Input
D0-16ND3 DC Input
D0-10TD1 DC Output
D0-16TD1 DC Output
D0-10TD2 DC Output
D0-16TD2 DC Output
D0-07CDR DC Input and Output
D0-08TR Relay Output
D0-08CDD1 DC Input and Output
22
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Safety Guidelines
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere
to relevant standards as specified by CE directives provided they are used
according to their intended purpose and that the instructions in this manual are
adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual.
your responsibility and should be your primary goal during system planning and
installation. Automation systems can fail and may result in situations that can cause
serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not rely on the automation
system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of
the PLC application to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause
personal injury or damage.
Every automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for
your particular application. Make sure you follow all national, state, and local
government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment.
Plan for Safety The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and
equipment safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of
the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you
are not familiar with PLC system installation practices, or your company does not
have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional information
from the following sources.
S NEMA The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in
Washington, D.C., publishes many different documents that discuss
standards for industrial control systems. You can order these
publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
S NEC The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning
the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment. Copies
of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical
equipment distributor or your local library.
S Local and State Agencies many local governments and state
governments have additional requirements above and beyond those
described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local Electrical
Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.
Three Levels of The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system
Protection safety. At a minimum, you should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the
following techniques, which provide three levels of system control.
S Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program
S Mechanical disconnect for output module power
S Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power
23
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
problems that may result in a risk of
personal injury or equipment damage. RST
Retract
Arm
System Power You should also use electromechanical devices, such as master control relays
Disconnect and/or limit switches, to prevent accidental equipment startup at an unexpected
time. These devices should be installed in such a manner to prevent any machine
operations from occurring.
For example, if the machine has a jammed part the PLC control program can turn off
the saw blade and retract the arbor. However, since the operator must open the
guard to remove the part, you should also include a bypass switch that disconnects
all system power any time the guard is opened.
Emergency Stop The machinery must provide a quick manual method of disconnecting all system
power. The disconnect device or switch must be clearly labeled Emergency Stop.
After an Emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be
requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For
example, there may be specific register values that must be established (or
maintained from the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In
this case, you may want to use retentive memory locations, or include constants in
the control program to ensure a known starting point.
24
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Mode Switch
Mounting tab
Communication Ports
Status
Indicators
Mounting tab
External Power Discrete Input Discrete Output Output Circuit Power Input
Inputs Terminals Terminals (for DC output versions only)
The upper section of the connector accepts external power connections on the two
left-most terminals. From left to right, the next five terminals are one of the input
commons (C0) and input connections X1, X3, X4, and X6. The remaining four
connections are an output common (C2) and output terminals Y1, Y3, and Y5.
The lower section of the connector has the chassis ground (G) and the logic ground
(LG) on the two left-most terminals. The next two terminals are for the inputs X0 and
X2. Next is the other input common (C1) followed by inputs X5 and X7. The last four
terminals are for outputs Y0, Y2, Y4, and the second output common (C3). On DC
output units, the end terminal on the right accepts power for the output stage.
WARNING: For some applications, field device power may still be present on the
terminal block even though the Micro PLC is turned off. To minimize the risk of
electrical shock, check all field device power before you expose or remove either
connector
25
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Connector All of the terminals for the DL05 are contained on one connector block. In some
Removal instances, it may be desireable to remove the connector block for easy wiring. The
connector is designed for easy removal with just a small screwdriver. The drawing
below shows the procedure for removal at one end.
Connector Removal
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
2. From the center of the connector block, pry upward with the screwdriver
until the connector is loose.
The terminal block connector on DL05 PLCs have regular screw terminals, which
will accept either standard or #1 Philips screwdriver tips. You can insert one 16 AWG
wire under a terminal, or two 18 AWG wires (one on each side of the screw). Be
careful not to overtighten; maximum torque is 6 inch/ounces.
Spare terminal block connectors and connector covers may be ordered by individual
part numbers:
Mounting Guidelines
In addition to the panel layout guidelines, other specifications can affect the
definition and installation of a PLC system. Always consider the following:
S Environmental Specifications
S Power Requirements
S Agency Approvals
S Enclosure Selection and Component Dimensions
Unit Dimensions The following diagram shows the outside dimensions and mounting hole locations
for all versions of the DL05. Make sure you follow the installation guidelines to allow
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
3.8
95mm
3.4
85mm
Enclosures Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper
operation of your DL05 system. Applications of DL05 systems vary and may require
additional features. The minimum considerations for enclosures include:
S Conformance to electrical standards
S Protection from the elements in an industrial environment
S Common ground reference
S Maintenance of specified ambient temperature
S Access to equipment
S Security or restricted access
S Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of equipment
27
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Panel Layout & There are many things to consider when designing the panel layout. The following items
Clearances correspond to the diagram shown. Note: there may be additional requirements,
depending on your application and use of other components in the cabinet.
1. Mount the PLCs horizontally as shown below to provide proper ventilation.
You cannot mount the DL05 units vertically, upside down, or on a flat
horizontal surface. If you place more than one unit in a cabinet, there must
be a minimum of 7.2 (183mm) between the units.
OK
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Airflow
2. Provide a minimum clearance of 2 (50mm) between the unit and all sides of
the cabinet. Note, remember to allow for any operator panels or other items
mounted in the door.
3. There should also be at least 3 (78mm) of clearance between the unit and
any wiring ducts that run parallel to the terminals.
Temperature
Probe
2"
DL05 50mm
min.
Micro PLC
2"
Power 50mm
Source min.
2"
50mm
BUS Bar min.
4. The ground terminal on the DL05 base must be connected to a single point
ground. Use copper stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. Copper
eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the ends of the stranded wire to
ensure good surface contact.
5. There must be a single point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in
the panel requiring an earth ground return. The single point of ground must
be connected to the panel ground termination. The panel ground
termination must be connected to earth ground. Minimum wire sizes, color
coding, and general safety practices should comply with appropriate
electrical codes and standards for your area.
28
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
NOTE: If you are using other components in your system, make sure you refer to the
appropriate manual to determine how those units can affect mounting dimensions.
Using Mounting DL05 Micro PLCs can be secured to a panel by using mounting rails. We
Rails recommend rails that conform to DIN EN standard 50 022. They are approximately
35mm high, with a depth of 7mm. If you mount the Micro PLC on a rail, do consider
using end brackets on each side of the PLC. The end bracket helps keep the PLC
from sliding horizontally along the rail, reducing the possibility of accidentally pulling
the wiring loose.
On the bottom of the PLC is a small retaining clip. To secure the PLC to a DIN rail,
place it onto the rail and gently push up on the clip to lock it onto the rail.
To remove the PLC, pull down on the retaining clip, lift up on the PLC slightly, then
pulling it away from the rail.
29
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
7mm
35 mm
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Retaining Clip
NOTE: Refer to our catalog for a complete listing of DINnector connection systems.
Environmental The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to
Specifications DL05 Micro PLCs. The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are noted at
the bottom of this chart. Certain output circuit types may have derating curves,
depending on the ambient temperature and the number of outputs ON. Please refer
to the appropriate section in this chapter pertaining to your particular DL05 PLC.
Specification Rating
Storage temperature 4 F to 158 F (20 C to 70 C)
Ambient operating temperature* 32 F to 131 F (0 C to 55 C)
Ambient humidity** 5% 95% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration resistance MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2
Shock resistance MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2
Noise immunity NEMA (ICS3304)
Atmosphere No corrosive gases
Agency approvals UL, CE, FCC class A
* Operating temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV1000 is 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C)
Storage temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV1000 is 4 to 158 F (20 to70 C).
**Equipment will operate down to 5% relative humidity. However, static electricity problems occur much
more frequently at low humidity levels (below 30%). Make sure you take adequate precautions when
you touch the equipment. Consider using ground straps, anti-static floor coverings, etc. if you use the
equipment in low-humidity environments.
Agency Approvals Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The DL05
Micro PLC agency approvals are listed below:
S UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
S CUL (Canadian Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
S CE (European Economic Union)
210
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Wiring Guidelines
Connect the power input wiring for the DL05. Observe all precautions stated earlier
in this manual. For more details on wiring, see Chapter 2 on Installation, Wiring, and
Specifications. When the wiring is complete, close the connector covers. Do not
apply power at this time.
LG N +G
95 240 VAC 12 24 VDC
WARNING: Once the power wiring is connected, secure the terminal block cover in
the closed position. When the cover is open there is a risk of electrical shock if you
accidentally touch the connection terminals or power wiring.
Fuse Protection There are no internal fuses for the input power circuits, so external circuit protection
for Input Power is needed to ensure the safety of service personnel and the safe operation of the
equipment itself. To meet UL/CUL specifications, the input power must be fused.
Depending on the type of input power being used, follow these fuse protection
recommendations:
External The power source must be capable of suppling voltage and current complying with
Power Source individual Micro PLC specifications, according to the following specifications:
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Item DL05 VAC Powered Units DL05 VDC Powered Units
Input Voltage Range 110/220 VAC (95240 VAC) 1224 VDC (10.826.4 VDC)
Maximum Inrush Current 13 A, 1ms (95240 VAC) 10A
15 A, 1ms (240264 VAC)
Maximum Power 30 VA 20 W
Voltage Withstand (dielectric) 1 minute @ 1500 VAC between primary, secondary, field
ground
Insulation Resistance > 10 M at 500 VDC
Planning the The following guidelines provide general information on how to wire the I/O
Wiring Routes connections to DL05 Micro PLCs. For specific information on wiring a particular PLC
refer to the corresponding specification sheet further in this chapter.
1. Each terminal connection of the DL05 PLC can accept one 16 AWG wire or
two 18 AWG size wires. Do not exceed this recommended capacity.
2. Always use a continuous length of wire. Do not splice wires to attain a
needed length.
3. Use the shortest possible wire length.
4. Use wire trays for routing where possible.
5. Avoid running wires near high energy wiring.
6. Avoid running input wiring close to output wiring where possible.
7. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance , consider
using multiple wires for the return line.
8. Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible.
9. Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires.
10. Install the recommended powerline filter to reduce power surges and
EMI/RFI noise.
212
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Fuse Protection Input and Output circuits on DL05 Micro PLCs do not have internal fuses. In order to
for Input and protect your Micro PLC, we suggest you add external fuses to your I/O wiring. A
Output Circuits fast-blow fuse, with a lower current rating than the I/O banks common current rating
can be wired to each common. Or, a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the
maximum current per output point can be added to each output. Refer to the Micro
PLC specification sheets further in this chapter to find the maximum current per
output point or per output common. Adding the external fuse does not guarantee the
prevention of Micro PLC damage, but it will provide added protection.
External Fuses
(shown with DIN Rail, Fuse Blocks)
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
I/O Point All DL05 Micro PLCs have a fixed I/O configuration. It follows the same octal
Numbering numbering system used on other DirectLogic family PLCs, starting at X0 and Y0. The
letter X is always used to indicate inputs and the letter Y is always used for outputs.
The I/O numbering always starts at zero and does not include the digits 8 or 9. The
addresses are typically assigned in groups of 8 or 16, depending on the number of
points in an I/O group. For the DL05 the eight inputs use reference numbers X0 X7.
The six output points use references Y0 Y5.
213
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
provide optical isolation in Input and Output circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from
the field side, where factory machinery connects. Note that the discrete inputs are
isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the logic side.
Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power
input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important to avoid
making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.
Power PLC
Input Discrete Inputs
Input
Main Circuit
Filter Power CPU
Supply Output
Discrete Outputs
Circuit
The next figure shows the internal layout of DL05 PLCs, as viewed from the front
panel.
To Programming Device
or Operator Interface
DL05
PLC
2 Comm.
CPU Ports
Main
Power
Supply
Connecting Operator interfaces require data and power connections. Operator interfaces with a
Operator Interface large CRT usually require separate AC power. However, small operator interface
Devices devices like the popular DV-1000 Data Access Unit and the Optimation panels may
be powered directly from the DL05 Micro PLC.
Connect the DV-1000 to either communication port on the DL05 Micro PLC using the
cable shown below. A single cable contains transmit/receive data wires and +5V
power.
DL05 Micro PLC DV-1000
RJ12 RJ12
phone style phone style
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Connecting DL05 Micro PLCs can be programmed with either a handheld programmer or with
Programming DirectSOFT on a PC. Connect the DL05 to a PC using the cable shown below.
Devices
DL05 Micro PLC RJ12 9-pin D-shell
phone style female
Sinking / Sourcing Before going further in our study of wiring strategies, we must have a solid
Concepts understanding of sinking and sourcing concepts. Use of these terms occurs
frequently in input or output circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make
these concepts easy to understand, further ensuring your success in installation.
First we give the following short definitions, followed by practical applications.
Sinking = Path to supply ground ()
Sourcing = Path to supply source (+)
First you will notice that these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC,
because of the reference to (+) and () polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing
terminology only applies to DC input and output circuits. Input and output points that
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
are either sinking or sourcing can conduct current in only one direction. This means it
is possible to connect the external supply and field device to the I/O point with current
trying to flow in the wrong direction, and the circuit will not operate. However, we can
successfully connect the supply and field device every time by understanding
sourcing and sinking.
For example, the figure to the right depicts
a sinking input. To properly connect the PLC
Input
external supply, we just have to connect it
(sinking)
so the the input provides a path to ground
(). So, we start at the PLC input terminal, +
Input
follow through the input sensing circuit, Sensing
exit at the common terminal, and connect
Common
the supply () to the common terminal. By
adding the switch, between the supply (+)
and the input, we have completed the
circuit. Current flows in the direction of the
arrow when the switch is closed.
+ Input Output +
Sensing Switch
Input Output
Load
216
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Input
have two dedicated terminals just as the Sensing
figure above shows. However, providing Input 1
this level of flexibility is not practical or
Input 2
even necessary for most applications. So,
most Input or Output point groups on
Input 3
PLCs share the return path among two or
more I/O points. The figure to the right Input 4
shows a group (or bank) of 4 input points
which share a common return path. In this +
way, the four inputs require only five
terminals instead of eight.
Common
Note: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is 4 times any channels
input current when all inputs are energized. This is especially important in output
circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes necessary on commons.
Most DL05 input and output circuits are
grouped into banks that share a common
return path. The best indication of I/O
common grouping is on the wiring label.
The I/O common grouping bar, labeled at
the right, occurs in the section of wiring
label below it. It indicates X0, X1, X2, and
X3 share the common terminal located to
the left of X1.
The following complete label shows two banks of four inputs and two banks of three
outputs. One common is provided for each bank.
The following label is for DC output versions. One common is provided for all of the
outputs and the terminal on the bottom right accepts power for the output stage.
217
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Connecting DC I/O In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts, we explained that DC I/O
to Solid State circuits sometimes will only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of
Field Devices the field devices which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field
devices can also be sourcing or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series
DC circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and the other as sinking.
Solid State The DL05s DC inputs are flexible in that they detect current flow in either direction,
Input Sensors so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field
device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PLC
input point, which sources current. The power supply can be the FA-24PS +24 VDC
power supply or another supply (+12 VDC or +24VDC), as long as the input
specifications are met.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Field Device PLC DC Input
Output Input
(sinking) (sourcing)
Supply
Ground + Common
In the next circuit, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. It
sources current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since
the field device is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required.
Field Device
+V PLC DC Input
Input
(sinking)
Output (sourcing)
Ground Common
Solid State Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state
Output Loads input on a device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level signal,
not to send DC power to an actuator.
The DL05s DC outputs are sinking-only. This means that each DC output provides a
path to ground when it is energized. Also, remember that all six outputs have the
same electrical common, even though there are two common terminal screws.
Finally, recall that the DC output circuit requires power (20 28 VDC) from an
external power source.
In the following circuit, the PLC output point sinks current to the output common
when energized. It is connected to a sourcing input of a field device input.
In the next example we connect a PLC DC output point to the sinking input of a field
device. This is a bit tricky, because both the PLC output and field device input are
sinking type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we
add sourcing capability to the PLC output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit
below, we connect Rpull-up from the output to the DC output circuit power input.
PLC DC Output
Power
+DC pwr
Field Device
R pull-up
(sourcing)
(sinking) Output Input R input
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
+ (sinking)
Supply
Common Ground
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25 mA) with this pull-up method.
NOTE 2: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of
inverting the output point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized
when the PLC output is OFF, from a ladder logic point-of-view. Your ladder program
must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you may choose to
cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.
It is important to choose the correct value of R pull-up. In order to do so, we need to
know the nominal input current to the field device (I input) when the input is energized.
If this value is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15 mA).
Then use I input and the voltage of the external supply to compute R pull-up. Then
calculate the power Ppull-up (in watts), in order to size R pull-up properly.
V input (turnon)
I input =
R input
2
V supply 0.7 V supply
R pull-up = R input P pull-up =
I input R pullup
The drawing below shows the actual wiring of the DL05 Micro PLC to the supply and
pull-up resistor.
Common
Output
Supply +
219
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Relay Output The D005AR and the D005DR models feature relay outputs. Relays are best for
Wiring Methods the following applications:
S Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state DL05 outputs can
deliver
S Cost-sensitive applications
S Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when
some loads require AC while others require DC)
Some applications in which NOT to use relays:
S Loads that require currents under 10 mA
S Loads which must be switched at high speed and duty cycle
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Assuming relays are right for your application, were now ready to explore various
ways to wire relay outputs to the loads. Note that there are six normally-open SPST
relays available. They are organized with three relays per common. The figure below
shows the relays and the internal wiring of the PLC. Note that each group is isolated
from the other group of outputs.
Y0 Com Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Com Y5
In the circuit below, all loads use the same AC power supply which powers the DL05
PLC. In this example, all commons are connected together.
Line
Fuse or Ground
Circuit
Breaker Neutral
In the circuit on the following page, loads for Y0 Y2 use the same AC power supply
which powers the DL05 PLC. Loads for Y3 Y5 use a separate DC supply. In this
example, the commons are separated according to which supply powers the
associated load.
220
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Fuse or Line
+
Circuit Ground
Breaker Neutral
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Surge Suppresion Inductive load devices (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages when
For Inductive de-energized with a relay contact. When a relay contact is closed it bounces, which
Loads energizes and de-energizes the coil until the bouncing stops. The transient
voltages generated are much larger in amplitude than the supply voltage, especially
with a DC supply voltage.
When switching a DC-supplied inductive load the full supply voltage is always
present when the relay contact opens (or bounces). When switching an
AC-supplied inductive load there is one chance in 60 (60 Hz) or 50 (50 Hz) that the
relay contact will open (or bounce) when the AC sine wave is zero crossing. If the
voltage is not zero when the relay contact opens there is energy stored in the
inductor that is released when the voltage to the inductor is suddenly removed. This
release of energy is the cause of the transient voltages.
When inductive load devices (motors, motor starters, interposing relays, solenoids,
valves, etc.) are controlled with relay contacts, it is recommended that a surge
suppression device be connected directly across the coil of the field device. If the
inductive device has plug-type connectors, the suppression device can be installed
on the terminal block of the relay output.
Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS or transorb) provide the best surge and
transient suppression of AC and DC powered coils, providing the fastest response
with the smallest overshoot.
Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) provide the next best surge and transient
suppression of AC and DC powered coils.
For example, the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when
opening a contact switching a 24 VDC solenoid. Notice the large voltage spike.
+24 VDC
324 VDC
221
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
This figure shows the same circuit with a transorb (TVS) across the coil. Notice that
the voltage spike is significantly reduced.
+24 VDC
Use the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor for your application
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
based on the inductive load voltage.
hhVendor / Catalog Type (TVS, MOV, Diode) Inductive Load Voltage Part Number
General Instrument TVS 110/120 VAC P6KE180CAGICTND
Transient Voltage TVS 220/240 VAC P6KE350CA
Suppressors, LiteOn
Diodes; from DigiKey TVS 12/24 VDC or VAC P6K30CAGICTND
Catalog; Phone: Diode 12/24 VDC or VAC 1N4004CTND
1-800-344-4539
Harris Metal Oxide MOV 110/120 VAC V150LA20C
Varistors; from Newark MOV 220/240 VAC V250LA20C
Catalog; Phone:
1-800-463-9275
Prolonging Relay Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark
Contact Life created at the time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants.
There are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts, such as
switching the relay on or off only when it is necessary, and if possible, switching the
load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current. Also, take measures to
suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive DC loads such as contactors and
solenoids.
For inductive loads in DC circuits we recommend using a suppression diode as
shown in the following diagram (DO NOT use this circuit with an AC power supply).
When the load is energized the diode is reverse-biased (high impedance). When the
load is turned off, energy stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative-going
voltage spike. At this moment the diode is forward-biased (low impedance) and
shunts the energy to ground. This protects the relay contacts from the high voltage
arc that would occur just as the contacts are opening.
Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible. Use a diode with a
peak inverse voltage rating (PIV) at least 100 PIV, 3A forward current or larger. Use a
fast-recovery type (such as Schottky type). DO NOT use a small-signal diode such
as 1N914, 1N941, etc. Be sure the diode is in the circuit correctly before operation. If
installed backwards, it short-circuits the supply when the relay energizes.
PLC Relay Output Inductive Field Device
Output Input
Supply
Common + Common
222
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
DC Input Wiring DL05 Micro PLCs with DC inputs are particularly PLC DC Input
Methods flexible because they can be either sinking or Input
sourcing. The dual diodes (shown to the right) allow
current to flow in either direction. The inputs accept
10.8 26.4 VDC. The target applications are +12 Common
VDC and +24 VDC. You can actually wire half of the
inputs as DC sinking and the other half as DC
sourcing. Inputs grouped by a common must be all
sinking or all sourcing.
In the first and simplest example below, all commons are connected together and all
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
+24 VDC
+
In the next example, the first four inputs are sinking, and the last four are sourcing.
+
+24 VDC +12 VDC
+
223
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
DC Output DL05 DC output circuits are high-performance transistor switches with low
Wiring Methods on-resistance and fast switching times. Please note the following characteristics
which are unique to the DC output type:
S There is only one electrical common for all six outputs. All six outputs
belong to one bank.
S The output switches are current-sinking only. However, you can still use
different DC voltages from one load to another.
S The output circuit inside the PLC requires external power. The supply
() must be connected to a common terminal, and the supply (+)
connects the the right-most terminal on the upper connector.
In the example below, all six outputs share a common supply.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
+24 VDC
+
Output Point Wiring
In the next example below, the outputs have split supplies. The first three outputs
are using a +12 VDC supply, and the last three are using a +24 VDC supply.
However, you can split the outputs among any number of supplies, as long as:
S all supply voltages are within the specified range
S all output points are wired as sinking
S all source () terminals are connected together
+12 VDC +24 VDC
+ +
Output Point Wiring
224
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
High-Speed I/O DL05 versions with DC type input or output points contain a dedicated High-Speed
Wiring Methods I/O circuit (HSIO). The circuit configuration is programmable, and it processes select
I/O points independently from the CPU scan. Chapter 3 discusses the programming
options for HSIO. While the HSIO circuit has six modes, we show wiring diagrams for
two of the most popular modes in this chapter. The high-speed input interfaces to
points X0 X2. Properly configured, the DL05 can count quadrature pulses at up to
5 kHz from an incremental encoder as shown below.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Signal Common
Phase B
+
12 24 VDC
Phase A
DL05 versions with DC type output points can use the High Speed I/O Pulse Output
feature. It can generate high-speed pulses for specialized control such as stepper
motor / intelligent drive systems. Output Y0 and Y1 can generate pulse and direction
signals, or it can generate CCW and CW pulse signals respectively. See Chapter 3
on high-speed input and pulse output options.
+
Signal Common +24 VDC
Motor Amplifier
Pulse
Direction
Discrete Input One of eight input connections to the PLC which converts an electrical
signal from a field device to a binary status (off or on), which is read by the
internal CPU each PLC scan.
Discrete Output One of six output connections from the PLC which converts an internal
ladder program result (0 or 1) to turn On or Off an output switching device.
This enables the program to turn on and off large field loads.
Installation, Wiring,
I/O Common A connection in the input or output terminals which is shared by multiple
and Specifications
I/O circuits. It usually is in the return path to the power supply of the I/O
circuit.
Input Voltage Range The operating voltage range of the input circuit.
ON Voltage Level The minimum voltage level at which the input point will turn ON.
OFF Voltage Level The maximum voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF
Input Impedance Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular
operating voltage.
Minimum ON Current The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON
state.
Maximum OFF Current The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF
state.
OFF to ON Response The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition.
ON to OFF Response The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition.
Status Indicators The LEDs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input or output point. All
LEDs on DL05 Micro PLCs are electrically located on the logic side of the
input or output circuit.
226
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D005AR The D005AR Micro PLC features eight AC inputs and six relay contact outputs. The
I/O Wiring Diagram following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power
connection uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
Input Wiring AC AC or DC
Supply Supply
Equivalent Input Circuit Derating Chart for Relay Outputs Equivalent Output Circuit
+V +V Points
Internal module circuitry
Input
Optical 6 2A OUTPUT
Isolator
Y0 Y5 L
+V
To LED 4
2
Common
0 COM
To LED
To other circuits in bank 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C Line
32 50 68 86 104 122 131F 627 VDC
Ambient Temperature (C/F) 6240 VAC
The eight AC input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are
organized into two banks of four. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring
example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and
common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one channel of a
typical bank.
227
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
The six relay output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector.
Outputs are organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each
bank has a common terminal. The wiring example on the last page shows all
commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be
used. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay
contacts can switch AC or DC voltages.
D005AR External Power Requirements 95 240 VAC, 30 VA maximum,
General Communication Port 1 KSequence (Slave)
Specifications 9600 baud (Fixed), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, DirectNET (Slave)
odd parity MODBUS (Slave)
Communication Port 2 KSequence (Slave)
9600 baud (default), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, DirectNET (Master/Slave)
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
odd parity MODBUS (Master/Slave)
Non-sequence / print
Programming cable type D2DSCBL
Operating Temperature 32 to 131 F (0 to 55_ C)
Storage Temperature 4 to 158 F (20 to 70_ C)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
AC Input Input Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) 80 132 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
Specifications Operating Voltage Range 90 120 VAC, 47 -63 Hz
X0 X7 Input Current 8 mA @ 100 VAC at 50 Hz
10 mA @ 100 VAC at 60 Hz
Max. Input Current 12 mA @ 132 VAC at 50 Hz
15 mA @ 132 VAC at 60 Hz
Input Impedance 14K @50 Hz, 12K @60 Hz
ON Current/Voltage >6 mA @ 75 VAC
OFF Current/Voltage <2 mA @ 20 VAC
OFF to ON Response < 40 mS
ON to OFF Response < 40 mS
Status Indicators Logic Side
Commons 4 channels / common x 2 banks
Relay Output Output Voltage Range (Min. Max.) 5 264 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 5 30 VDC
Specifications Operating Voltage Range 6 240 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 6 27 VDC
Y0 Y5 Output Current 2A / point, 6A / common
Max. leakage current 0.1 mA @264VAC
Smallest Recommended Load 5 mA @5 VDC
OFF to ON Response < 15 mS
ON to OFF Response < 10 mS
Status Indicators Logic Side
Commons 3 channels / common x 2 banks
Fuses None (external recommended)
228
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D005DR These micro PLCs feature eight DC inputs and six relay contact outputs. The
I/O Wiring Diagram following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power
connection uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
DC AC or DC
Input Wiring Supply Supply
Equivalent Circuit, Derating Chart for Relay Outputs Equivalent Output Circuit
Standard Inputs (X3 X7) Points
Internal module circuitry
+V +V
6 2A OUTPUT
Input Y0 Y5 L
+V
Optical
Isolator 4
To LED
+
2
0 COM
Common To LED
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C Line
32 50 68 86 104 122 131F 627 VDC
Ambient Temperature (C/F) 6240 VAC
The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are
organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each bank has a
common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected
together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent
output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay contacts can switch AC
or DC voltages.
229
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
Relay Output Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) 5 -264 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 5 - 30 VDC
Specifications Operating Voltage 6 -240 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 6 - 27 VDC
Output Current 2A / point
6A / common
Maximum Voltage 264 VAC, 30 VDC
Max leakage current 0.1 mA @264 VAC
Smallest Recommended Load 5 mA
OFF to ON Response < 15 mS
ON to OFF Response < 10 mS
Status Indicators Logic Side
Commons 3 channels / common x 2 banks
Fuses None (external recommended)
230
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D005AD The D005AD Micro PLC features eight AC inputs and six DC outputs. The following
I/O Wiring Diagram diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power connection
uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
Input Wiring AC or DC +24 VDC
Supply
+
Input Point Wiring Output Point Wiring
Equivalent Input Circuit Derating Chart for DC Outputs Equivalent Output Circuit
+V +V Points
+V Internal module circuitry +V
Input
Optical 6 1A +
Isolator
Y0 Y5
24VDC Optical
Isolator
To LED 4 OUTPUT
L
2 + 627
Common VDC
To LED
0
COM
To other circuits in bank 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
The eight AC input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are
organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal. The
wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate
supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one
channel of a typical bank.
The six current sinking DC output channels use terminals on the right side of the
connector. All outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the
requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent
output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six.
231
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
D005DD These micro PLCs feature eight DC inputs and six DC outputs. The following
I/O Wiring Diagram diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power connection
uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
Input Wiring
DC +24 VDC
Supply
+
Input Point Wiring Output Point Wiring
Equivalent Circuit, High- The eight DC input channels use terminals in the middle of
Speed Inputs (X0 X2)
the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four.
Input
+V Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be
Optical
Isolator wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring
+ example above shows all commons connected together,
To LED
but separate supplies and common circuits may be used.
Common The equivalent circuit for standard inputs is shown above,
and the high-speed input circuit is shown to the left.
To all other output circuits
The six current sinking DC output channels use terminals on the right side of the
connector. All outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the
requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent
output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six.
233
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
DC Input Parameter HighSpeed Inputs, X0 X2 Standard DC Inputs X3 X7
Specifications Min. - Max. Voltage Range 10.8 26.4 VDC 10.8 26.4 VDC
Operating Voltage Range 12 24 VDC 12 24 VDC
Peak Voltage 30 VDC (5 kHz maximum frequency) 30 VDC
Minimum Pulse Width 100 s N/A
ON Voltage Level > 9.0 VDC > 9.0 VDC
OFF Voltage Level < 2.0 VDC < 2.0 VDC
Max. Input Current 6mA @12VDC, 13mA @24VDC 4mA @12VDC, 8.5mA @24VDC
Input Impedance 1.8 k @ 12 24 VDC 2.8 k @ 12 24 VDC
Minimum ON Current >5 mA >4 mA
Maximum OFF Current < 0.5 mA <0.5 mA
OFF to ON Response <100 S 2 8 mS, 4 mS typical
ON to OFF Response < 100 S 2 8 mS, 4 mS typical
Status Indicators Logic side Logic side
Commons 4 channels / common x 2 banks
DC Output Parameter Pulse Outputs, Y0 Y1 Standard Outputs, Y3 Y5
Specifications Min. - Max. Voltage Range 5 30 VDC 5 30 VDC
Operating Voltage 6 27 VDC 6 27 VDC
Peak Voltage < 50 VDC (7 kHz max. frequency) < 50 VDC
On Voltage Drop 0.3 VDC @ 1 A 0.3 VDC @ 1 A
Max Current (resistive) 0.5 A / pt., 1A / pt. as standard pt. 1.0 A / point
Max leakage current 15 A @ 30 VDC 15 A @ 30 VDC
Max inrush current 2 A for 100 mS 2 A for 100 mS
External DC power required 20 - 28 VDC Max 150mA 20 - 28 VDC Max 150mA
OFF to ON Response < 10 s < 10 s
ON to OFF Response < 30 s < 60 s
Status Indicators Logic Side Logic Side
Commons 6 channels / common x 1 banks
Fuses None (external recommended)
234
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D005AA The D005AA Micro PLC features eight AC inputs and six AC outputs. The following
I/O Wiring Diagram diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power connection
uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
Input Wiring AC AC
Supply Supply
Equivalent Input Circuit Derating Chart for AC Outputs Equivalent Output Circuit
+V +V Points
Internal module circuitry
Input +V
Optical 6 0.5 A
Isolator
Y0 Y5 OUTPUT Optical
L Isolator
To LED 4
2
Common COM
0 Line
17240
To other circuits in bank 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C VAC COM To LED
32 50 68 86 104 122 131F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
The eight AC input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are
organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal. The
wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate
supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one
channel of a typical bank.
The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are
organized into two banks of three triac switches. Each bank has a common terminal.
The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate
supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one
channel of a typical bank.
235
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
D005DA The D005DA Micro PLC features eight DC inputs and six AC outputs. The following
I/O Wiring Diagram diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The AC external power connection
uses four terminals at the left as shown.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
Line
or
C.B.
Neutral
Ground
Power
Input Wiring DC AC
Supply Supply
Equivalent Circuit, High- The eight DC input channels use terminals in the middle
Speed Inputs (X0 X2)
of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of
Input Optical
+V
four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and
Isolator may be wired as sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring
+
To LED
example above shows all commons connected together,
but separate supplies and common circuits may be used.
Common
The equivalent circuit for standard inputs is shown
To all other output circuits
above, and the high-speed input circuit is shown to the
left.
The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are
organized into two banks of three triac switches. Each bank has a common terminal.
The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate
supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one
channel of a typical bank.
237
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
D005DRD These micro PLCs feature eight DC inputs and six relay contact outputs. The
I/O Wiring Diagram following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The DC external power
connection uses three terminals at the left as shown.
1224 V
20 W max.
+
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
+
1224 VDC
Ground
Power
DC AC or DC
Input Wiring Supply Supply
Equivalent Circuit, Derating Chart for Relay Outputs Equivalent Output Circuit
Standard Inputs (X3 X7) Points
Internal module circuitry
+V +V
6 2A OUTPUT
Input Y0 Y5 L
+V
Optical
Isolator 4
To LED
+
2
0 COM
Common To LED
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C Line
32 50 68 86 104 122 131F 627 VDC
Ambient Temperature (C/F) 6240 VAC
The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are
organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each bank has a
common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected
together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent
output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay contacts can switch AC
or DC voltages.
239
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
Relay Output Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) 5 -264 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 5 - 30 VDC
Specifications Operating Voltage 6 -240 VAC (47 -63 Hz), 6 - 27 VDC
Output Current 2A / point
6A / common
Maximum Voltage 264 VAC, 30 VDC
Max leakage current 0.1 mA @264 VAC
Smallest Recommended Load 5 mA
OFF to ON Response < 15 mS
ON to OFF Response < 10 mS
Status Indicators Logic Side
Commons 3 channels / common x 2 banks
Fuses None (external recommended)
240
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D005DDD These micro PLCs feature eight DC inputs and six DC outputs. The following
I/O Wiring Diagram diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The DC external power connection
uses four terminals at the left as shown.
1224 V
20 W max.
+
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Fuse
+
1224 VDC
Ground
Power
Input Wiring
DC +24 VDC
Supply
+
Input Point Wiring Output Point Wiring
Equivalent Circuit, High- The eight DC input channels use terminals in the middle of
Speed Inputs (X0 X2)
the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four.
Input
+V Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be
Optical
Isolator wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring
+ example above shows all commons connected together,
To LED
but separate supplies and common circuits may be used.
Common The equivalent circuit for standard inputs is shown above,
and the high-speed input circuit is shown to the left.
To all other output circuits
The six current sinking DC output channels use terminals on the right side of the
connector. All outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the
requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent
output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six.
241
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3304
Terminal Type Removable
Wire Gauge One AWG16 or two AWG18, AWG24 minimum
DC Input Parameter HighSpeed Inputs, X0 X2 Standard DC Inputs X3 X7
Specifications Min. - Max. Voltage Range 10.8 26.4 VDC 10.8 26.4 VDC
Operating Voltage Range 12 24 VDC 12 24 VDC
Peak Voltage 30 VDC (5 kHz maximum frequency) 30 VDC
Minimum Pulse Width 100 s N/A
ON Voltage Level > 9.0 VDC > 9.0 VDC
OFF Voltage Level < 2.0 VDC < 2.0 VDC
Max. Input Current 6mA @12VDC, 13mA @24VDC 4mA @12VDC, 8.5mA @24VDC
Input Impedance 1.8 k @ 12 24 VDC 2.8 k @ 12 24 VDC
Minimum ON Current >5 mA >4 mA
Maximum OFF Current < 0.5 mA <0.5 mA
OFF to ON Response <100 S 2 8 mS, 4 mS typical
ON to OFF Response < 100 S 2 8 mS, 4 mS typical
Status Indicators Logic side Logic side
Commons 4 channels / common x 2 banks
DC Output Parameter Pulse Outputs, Y0 Y1 Standard Outputs, Y3 Y5
Specifications Min. - Max. Voltage Range 5 30 VDC 5 30 VDC
Operating Voltage 6 27 VDC 6 27 VDC
Peak Voltage < 50 VDC (7 kHz max. frequency) < 50 VDC
On Voltage Drop 0.3 VDC @ 1 A 0.3 VDC @ 1 A
Max Current (resistive) 0.5 A / pt., 1A / pt. as standard pt. 1.0 A / point
Max leakage current 15 A @ 30 VDC 15 A @ 30 VDC
Max inrush current 2 A for 100 mS 2 A for 100 mS
External DC power required 20 - 28 VDC Max 150mA 20 - 28 VDC Max 150mA
OFF to ON Response < 10 s < 10 s
ON to OFF Response < 30 s < 60 s
Status Indicators Logic Side Logic Side
Commons 6 channels / common x 1 banks
Fuses None (external recommended)
242
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D010ND3 DC Input
Inputs per module 10 (sink/source)
Input voltage range 10.826.4 VDC
Operating voltage range 1224 VDC
Peak voltage 30.0 VDC
Input current Typical:
4.0 mA @ 12 VDC
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
Maximum input current 11 mA @ 26.4 VDC
Input impedance 2.8k @ 1224 VDC
ON voltage level > 10.0 VDC
Installation, Wiring
and Specifications
Derating Chart
Safety Guidelines
Installation and
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Equivalent circuit
INPUT
To LED
Optical
COM Isolator
+
1224VDC
COM
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
243
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D016ND3 DC Input
Inputs per module 16 (sink/source)
Input voltage range 2028 VDC
Operating voltage range 24 VDC
Peak voltage 30.0 VDC
Input current Typical:
4.0 mA @ 24 VDC
Maximum input current 6 mA @ 28 VDC
Input impedance 4.7k @ 24 VDC
ON voltage level > 19.0 VDC
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
OFF voltage level < 7.0 VDC
Minimum ON current 3.5 mA
Maximum OFF current 1.5 mA
OFF to ON response 28 ms, typical 4 ms
ON to OFF response 28 ms, typical 4 ms
Status indicators Module activity:
one green LED
Commons per module 4 nonisolated
Fuse N/A
Base power required Typical 35 mA (all pts. ON)
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F Configuration shown is
Ambient Temperature (C/F) for current sinking
Safety Guidelines
Installation and
Equivalent input circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 Use Ziplink ZLCBL056 cable and ZLCM056 connector
module or build your own cables using 24pin Molex Micro
(or later) for this module to function properly. Fit 3.0 receptacle, part number 43025, or compatible.
244
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D010TD1 DC Output
Outputs per module 10 (sinking)
Operating voltage range 627 VDC
Output voltage range 530 VDC
Peak voltage 50.0 VDC
Maximum output current 0.3 A/point, 1.5 A/common
Minimum output current 0.5 mA
Maximum leakage current 15 A @ 30.0 VDC
ON voltage drop 0.5 VDC @ 0.3 A
Maximum inrush current 1 A for 10 ms
Installation, Wiring
and Specifications
Derating Chart
Safety Guidelines
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
Installation and
Equivalent circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
245
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D016TD1 DC Output
Outputs per module 16 (sinking)
Operating voltage range 627 VDC
Output voltage range 530 VDC
Peak Voltage 50.0 VDC
Maximum output current 0.1 A/point, 0.8 A/common
Minimum output current 0.5 mA
Maximum leakage current 15 A @ 30.0 VDC
On voltage drop 0.5 VDC @ 0.1 A
Maximum inrush current 1 A for 10 ms
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
OFF to ON response < 0.5 ms
ON to OFF response < 0.5 ms
Status indicators Module activity:
one green LED
Commons per module 2 isolated (8 points/common)
Fuse N/A
External DC power required 2028 VDC max. 70 mA
(all pts. on)
Base power required (5V) Max. 200 mA (all pts. ON)
24 VDC
627
627 VDC VDC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F
Safety Guidelines
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Installation and
Equivalent input circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 Use Ziplink ZLCBL056 cable and ZLCM056 connector
module or build your own cables using 24pin Molex Micro
(or later) for this module to function properly. Fit 3.0 receptacle, part number 43025, or compatible.
246
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D010TD2 DC Output
Outputs per module 10 (sourcing)
Operating voltage range 1224 VDC
Output voltage range 10.826.4 VDC
Peak voltage 50.0 VDC
Maximum output current 0.3 A/point, 1.5 A/common
Minimum output current 0.5 mA
Maximum leakage current 1.5 A @ 30.0 VDC
ON voltage drop 1.0 VDC @ 0.3 A
Maximum inrush current 1 A for 10 ms
Installation, Wiring
and Specifications
Derating Chart
Safety Guidelines
Installation and
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Equivalent circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
247
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
D016TD2 DC Output
Outputs per module 16 (sourcing)
Operating voltage range 1224 VDC
Output voltage range 10.826.4 VDC
Peak Voltage 50.0 VDC
Maximum output current 0.1 A/point, 0.8 A/common
Minimum output current 0.5 mA
Maximum leakage current 1.5 A @ 26.4 VDC
ON voltage drop 1.0 VDC @ 0.3 A
Maximum inrush current 1 A for 10 ms
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
OFF to ON response < 0.5 ms
ON to OFF response < 0.5 ms
Status indicators Module activity:
one green LED
Commons per module 2 nonisolated
(8 points/common)
Fuse N/A
Base power required (5V) Max. 200 mA (all pts. ON)
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F
Safety Guidelines
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Installation and
Equivalent input circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 Use Ziplink ZLCBL056 cable and ZLCM056 connector
(or later) for this module to function properly. module or build your own cables using 24pin Molex Micro
Fit 3.0 receptacle, part number 43025, or compatible.
248
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
Safety Guidelines
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
249
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
Installation, Wiring,
Maximum inrush current Output: 3 A for 10 ms
and Specifications
Common: 10 A for 10 ms
OFF to ON response < 15 ms
ON to OFF response < 10 ms
Status indicators Module activity:
one green LED
Commons per module 2 isolated
(4 points/common)
Fuse N/A
Base power required (5 V) Maximum 280 mA (all pts. ON)
Derating Chart
Safety Guidelines
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
Installation and
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Equivalent circuit
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
250
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C
Safety Guidelines
Note: The DL05 must have firmware version V4.10 (or later) for this module to function properly.
251
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications
I/O Addressing
Module I/O Points Each option module has a set number of I/O points. This holds true for both the
and Addressing discrete modules and the analog modules. The following chart shows the number of
I/O points per module when used in the DL05 PLC.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
D010TD1 10 Output Y100 Y107 and Y110 Y111
D016TD1 16 Output Y100 Y107 and Y110 Y117
D010TD2 10 Output Y100 Y107 and Y110 Y111
D016TD2 16 Output Y100 Y107 and Y110 Y117
Safety Guidelines
Installation and
13
High-Speed Input and
Pulse Output Features
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
Choosing the HSIO Operating Mode
Mode 10: HighSpeed Counter
Mode 20: Quadrature Counter
Mode 30: Pulse Output
Mode 40: HighSpeed Interrupt
Mode 50: Pulse Catch Input
Mode 60: Filtered Inputs
32
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Introduction
S Pulse catch feature to monitor one input point, having a pulse width as
small as 100mS (0.1ms)
S Programmable discrete filtering (both on and off delay up to 99ms) to
ensure input signal integrity (this is the default mode for inputs X0X2)
The available pulse output features are:
S Single-axis programmable pulse output (7 kHz max.) with three profile
types, including trapezoidal moves, registration, and velocity control
Availability of IMPORTANT: Please note the following restrictions on availability of features:
HSIO Features S High-speed input options are available only on DL05s with DC inputs.
S Pulse output options are available only on DL05s with DC outputs.
S Only one HSIO feature may be in use at one time. You cannot use a
highspeed input feature and the pulse output at the same time.
Dedicated High- The internal CPUs main task is to execute the ladder program and read/write all I/O
Speed I/O Circuit points during each scan. In order to service high-speed I/O events, the DL05
includes a special circuit which is dedicated to a portion of the I/O points. Refer to the
DL05 block diagram in the figure below.
6 Discrete Outputs
DL05
PLC Output Circuit
Y0, Y1 Y2 - Y5
High-Speed CPU
I/O Circuit
X0 - X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
8 Discrete Inputs
Wiring Diagrams After choosing the appropriate HSIO mode for your application, youll need to refer to
for Each HSIO the section in this chapter for that specific mode. Each section includes wiring
Mode diagram(s) to help you connect the High-Speed I/O points correctly to field devices.
An example of the quadrature counter mode diagram is shown below.
Signal Common
Phase B
+
12 24 VDC
Phase A
Default Mode Mode 60 (Filtered Inputs) is the default mode. The DL05 is initialized to this mode at
the factory, and any time you reset V-memory scratchpad. In the default condition,
X0X2 are filtered inputs (10 mS delay) and Y0Y1 are standard outputs.
35
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Configuring the If you have chosen a mode suited to the high-speed I/O needs of your application,
HSIO Mode were ready to proceed to configure the PLC to operate accordingly. In the block
diagram below, notice the V-memory detail in the expanded CPU block. V-memory
location V7633 determines the functional mode of the high-speed I/O circuit. This is
the most important V-memory configuration value for HSIO functions!
CPU
HighSpeed I/O data
Vmemory
I/O Circuit Mode Select
V7633 xxxx
X0 - X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
0 0 5 0
Bits 0 7 define the mode number 00, 10.. 60 previously referenced in this chapter.
The example data 2050 shown selects Mode 50 Pulse Catch (BCD = 50). The
DL05 PLC ignores bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Configuring In addition to configuring V7633 for the
Inputs X0 X2 HSIO mode, youll need to program the Vmemory
next three locations in certain modes Mode V7633 xxxx
according to the desired function of input
points X0 X2. Other memory locations X0 V7634 xxxx
may require configuring, depending on the X1 V7635 xxxx
HSIO mode (see the corresponding X2 V7636 xxxx
section for particular HSIO modes).
36
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
CPU
Pulse Output Features
HSIO
High-Speed Input and
I/O data
COUNTER Vmemory
FILTER Mode Select
CLK Reset V7633 0010
X0 X2 X1 X3- X7
Input Circuit
COUNTER Vmemory
Mode Select
CLK Reset FILTER V7633 0010
X0 X1, X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
Next, we will discuss how to program the high-speed counter and its presets.
37
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Wiring Diagram A general wiring diagram for counters/encoders to the DL05 in HSIO Mode 10 is
shown below. Many types of pulse-generating devices may be used, such as
proximity switches, single-channel encoders, magnetic or optical sensors, etc.
Devices with sinking outputs (NPN open collector) are probably the best choice for
interfacing. If the counter sources to the inputs, it must output 12 to 24 VDC. Note
that devices with 5V sourcing outputs will not work with DL05 inputs.
Signal
Counter Input Wiring
+ Signal Common
In the next circuit, an encoder has open-emitter PNP transistor outputs. It sources
current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the
encoder sources current, no additional power supply is required. However, note that
the encoder output must be 12 to 24 volts (5V encoder outputs will not work).
Counter Output
Ground Common
38
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 10 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 10 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor or Data View
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Preset Data V7630 is a pointer location which points to Preset Table Pointer
Starting Location the beginning of the Preset Data Table. V7630 2000
The default starting location for the Preset
Data Table is V2320 (default after
initializing scratchpad V-memory). Preset Data
However, you may change this by V2000 0000 1000
programming a different value in V7630. V2002 0000 2000
Use the LDA and OUT instructions as
shown: V2004 0000 2500
Load the octal address, V2006 0000 3175
LDA convert to hex, leave
O2000 result in accumulator.
Output this address to
OUT V7630, the location of the
V7630 pointer to the Preset data. V2076 0000 0000
Using Fewer than When using fewer than 24 preset Preset Data
24 Presets registers, the HSIO looks for 0000 FFFF
V2320 0000 1000
(use LDD Kffff) in the next preset location
to indicate the last preset has been V2322 0000 2000
reached. The example to the right uses V2324 0000 2500
four presets. The 0000 FFFF in V2326 0000 3175
V2331-V2330 indicates the previous V2330 0000 FFFF
NOTE: Each successive preset must be greater than the previous preset value. If a
preset value is less than a lower-numbered preset value, the CPU cannot compare
for that value, since the counter can only count upwards.
Equal Relay The following table lists all 24 preset register default locations. Each occupies two
Numbers 16-bit V-memory registers. The corresponding special relay contact number is in the
next column. We might also call these equal relay contacts, because they are true
(closed) when the present high-speed counter value is equal to the preset value.
Each contact remains closed until the counter value equals the next preset value.
Calculating Your The preset values occupy two data words each. They can range in value from 0000
Preset Values 0000 to 9999 9999, just like the high-speed counter value. All 24 values are absolute
values, meaning that each one is an offset from the counter zero value.
The preset values must be individually derived for each application. In the industrial
lathe diagram below, the PLC monitors the position of the lead screw by counting
pulses. At points A, B, and C along the linear travel, the cutter head pushes into the
work material and cuts a groove.
PLC
Industrial Lathe
A B C
Counter
Device Motor
X0, counter clock
Start
The timing diagram below shows the duration of each equal relay contact closure.
Each contact remains on until the next one closes. All go off when the counter resets.
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Equal Relays A B C
SP540
SP541
SP542
NOTE: Each successive preset must be two numbers greater than the previous
preset value. In the industrial lathe example, B>A+1 and C>B+1.
X Input The configurable discrete input options for High-Speed Counter Mode are listed in
Configuration the table below. Input X0 is dedicated for the counter clock input. Input X1 can be a
normal or filtered input. The section on Mode 60 operation at the end of this chapter
describes programming the filter time constants. Input X2 can be configured as the
counter reset, with or without the interrupt option. The interrupt option allows the
reset input (X2) to cause an interrupt like presets do, but there is no SP relay contact
closure (instead, X2 will be on during the interrupt routine, for 1 scan). Or finally, X2
may be left simply as a filtered input.
311
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
The next figure shows how the HSIO counter will appear in a ladder program. Note
that the Enable Interrupt (ENI) command must execute before the counter value
reaches the first preset value. We do this at powerup by using the first scan relay.
When using the counter but not the presets and interrupt, we can omit the ENI.
DirectSOFT
SP1
ENI Required
XX
Enable Input UDC CT76
XX
Dummy Input Kxxxxxxxx
XX Preset Range:
Reset Input 1-99999999
When the enable input is energized, the high-speed counter will respond to pulses
on X0 and increment the counter at CT76 CT77. The reset input contact behaves in
a logical OR fashion with the physical reset input X2 (when selected). So,the high
speed counter can receive a reset form either the contact(s) on the reset rung in the
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Program DirectSOFT
Example Contd First Scan Only
SP0 Load constant K10 into the accumulator. This
LD selects Mode 10 as the HSIO mode.
K10
SP1
UDC CT76 CT76 is the HSIO counter. The first rungs SP1
always enables the counter. The dummy input in
SP1 the middle is always off. The third rungs Reset
Kxxxxxxxx input is always off, because we will use the
external reset.
SP1
The compare double instruction above uses the current count of the HSIO counter to
turn on Y0. This technique can make more than 24 comparisons, but it is scan-time
dependent. However, use the 24 built-in presets with the interrupt routine if your
application needs a very fast response time, as shown in the next example.
314
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Counter With The following example shows how to program the HSIO circuit to trigger on three
Presets preset values. You may recall the industrial lathe example from the beginning of this
Program Example chapter. This example program shows how to control the lathe cutter head to make
three grooves in the work-piece at precise positions. When the lead screw turns, the
counter device generates pulses which the DL05 can count. The three preset
variables A, B, and C represent the positions (number of pulses) corresponding to
each of the three grooves.
DirectSOFT
SP0 Enable Interrupts before reaching a preset
ENI generates an interrupt. Special Relay SP0 is on
during the first CPU scan.
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
SP1
UDC CT76 CT76 is the HSIO counter. The first rungs SP1
always enables the counter. The dummy input in
SP1 the middle is off (unused in this example).
Kxxxxxxxx
SP1
X3 Y1
SP540 Preset 1 Y0
RSTI Inside the interrupt service routine, we turn OFF the
lead screw motor immediately.
SP541
Y1 These special equal relays turn on individually as
Preset 2 the corresponding preset is reached. In this
SETI application, each results in the cutting of a groove
SP542 (Y1), so they are logically ORed together.
Preset 3
X2 C10
SETI Input X2 will be energized inside the interrupt
routine if X2 external interrupt was the source.
IRT Return from the interrupt service routine.
Some applications will require a different type of action at each preset. It is possible
for the interrupt routine to distinguish one preset event from another, by turning on a
unique output for each equal relay contact SPxxx. We can determine the source of
the interrupt by examining the equal relay contacts individually, as well as X2. The X2
contact will be on (inside the interrupt routine only) if the interrupt was caused by the
external reset, X2 input.
316
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Counter With The following example shows how you can preload the current count with another
Preload value. When the preload command input (X4 in this example) is energized, we
Program Example disable the counter from counting with C0. Then we write the value K3000 to the
count register (V1076-V1077). We preload the current count of the counter with
K3000. When the preload command (X4) is turned off, the counter resumes counting
any pulses, but now starting from K3000.
DirectSOFT
SP0 Load constant K10 into the accumulator. This
LD selects Mode 10 as the HSIO mode.
K10
C0
SET Set C0 on at powerup to enable counting.
C0
UDC CT76 CT76 is the HSIO counter. The first rungs C0
contact enables the counter. The dummy input is in
C1 the middle.
K99999999
C2
The third rungs Reset input is normally off,
because we will use the external reset. You can
SP0 optionally reset the counter value on each powerup
using the SP0 contact.
C1
Generate a preload counter input pulse, which
PD causes the counter to preload from V1076-V1077.
C0 C1 C0
Enable the counter by setting C0, when the
SET preolad pulse on C1 has occurred (C1 is off).
Troubleshooting If youre having trouble with Mode 10 operation, please study the following
Guide for Mode 10 symptoms and possible causes. The most common problems are listed below.
HSIO CPU
I/O data
COUNTER Vmemory
Mode Select
Phase Phase V7633 0020
A B Reset
X0 X1 X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
Quadrature Quadrature encoder signals contain position and direction information, while their
Encoder Signals frequency represents speed of motion. Phase A and B signals shown below are
phase-shifted 90 degrees, thus the quadrature name. When the rising edge of
Phase A precedes Phase Bs leading edge (indicates clockwise motion by
convention), the HSIO counter counts UP. If Phase Bs rising edge precedes Phase
As rising edge (indicates counter-clockwise motion), the counter counts DOWN.
Clockwise sequence
Phase A
Phase B
Counterclockwise sequence
Phase A
Phase B
Wiring Diagram A general wiring diagram for encoders to the DL05 in HSIO Mode 20 is shown below.
Encoders with sinking outputs (NPN open collector) are probably the best choice for
interfacing. If the encoder sources to the inputs, it must output 12 to 24 VDC. Note
that encoders with 5V sourcing outputs will not work with DL05 inputs.
Signal Common
Phase B
+
12 24 VDC
Phase A
In the next circuit, an encoder has open-emitter PNP transistor outputs. It sources
current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the
encoder sources current, no additional power supply is required. However, note that
the encoder output must be 12 to 24 volts (5V encoder outputs will not work).
Encoder Output,
(one phase)
+12 to 24VDC Phase A or B Input
Input
(sinking)
Output (sourcing)
Ground Common
320
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 20 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 20 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 2 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
X Input The configurable discrete input options for High-Speed Counter Mode are listed in
Configuration the table below. Input X0 is dedicated for Phase A, and input X1 is for Phase B. Input
X2 is the reset input to the quadrature counter, but it does not cause an interrupt. The
section on Mode 60 operation at the end of this chapter describes programming the
filter time constants.
Writing Your You may recall that the Up-Down counter instruction is standard in the DL05
Control Program instruction set. Refer to the figure below. The mnemonic for the counter is UDC
(up-down counter).The DL05 can have up to 128 counters, labeled CT0 through
CT177. The quadrature counter in the HSIO circuit is accessed in ladder logic by
using UDC CT76. It uses counter registers CT76 and CT77 exclusively when the
HSIO mode 20 is active (otherwise, CT76 and CT77 are available for standard
counter use). The HSIO counter needs two registers because it is a double-word
counter. It also has three inputs as shown, but they are redefined. The first input is
the enable signal, the middle is a preload (write), and the bottom is the reset. The
enable input must be on before the counter will count. The enable input must be off
during a preload.
Standard Counter Function HSIO Counter Function
The next figure shows the how the HSIO quadrature counter will appear in a ladder
program.
When the enable input is energized, the counter will respond to quadrature pulses
on X0 and X1, incrementing or decrementing the counter at CT76 CT77. The reset
input contact behaves in a logical OR fashion with the physical reset input X2. This
means the quadrature counter can receive a reset from either the contact(s) on the
reset rung in the ladder, OR the external reset X2.
Quadrature Since presets are not available in quadrature counting, this mode is best suited for
Counter w/Preload simple counting and measuring. The example program on the following page shows
Program Example how to configure the quadrature counter. The program configures the HSIO circuit
for Mode 20 operation, so X0 is Phase A and X1 is Phase B clock inputs.
322
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Program DirectSOFT
Example Contd SP0 Load constant K20 into the accumulator. This selects
LD Mode 20 as the HSIO mode.
K20
Select Mode 20 OUT Output this address to V7633, the location of the HSIO
V7633 Mode select register.
C0
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
C0
UDC CT76 CT76 is the HSIO quadrature counter. The first rungs SP1
always enables the counter. The dummy input is used by
C1 the built-in compiler.
Kxxxxxxxx
C2
The third rungs Reset input is normally off,
SP0 because we will use the external reset. You can
optionally reset the counter value on each powerup
using the SP0 contact.
SP1 Load the current value of the counter into the accumulator
LDD on each scan.
V1076
Select Mode 20 Compare the value in the accumulator with the constant
CMPD K44292. If they are equal, the SP61 contact will be
K44292 turned on.
SP61 Y0 Set Y0 to ON when the counter reaches or exceeds
SET * our comparison value while COUNTING UP.
SP62
SP61 Y1
* Set Y1 to ON when the counter reaches or goes below
SET our comparison value while COUNTING DOWN.
SP60
* Note: You can reset Y0 later in the program by using the RST insturuction.
To preload the counter, just add the following example rungs to the program above.
323
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Counter Preload X4 C0 When the preload request is made, the user turns
on X4. First we disable counting by resetting C0,
Program Example RST the counters enable input.
C1
Generate a preload counter input pulse, which
PD causes the counter to preload from V1076-V1077.
C0 C1 C0
Enable the counter by setting C0, when the
SET preload pulse on C1 has occurred (C1 is off).
Troubleshooting If youre having trouble with Mode 20 operation, please study the following
Guide for Mode 20 symptoms and possible causes. The most common problems are listed below.
Symptom: The counter does not count.
Possible causes:
1. Field sensor and wiring Verify that the encoder or other field device
inputs actually turn on and illuminates the status LEDs for X0 and X1. A
standard incremental encoder will visibly, alternately turn on the LEDs for
figure below shows the DL05 generating pulse and direction signals to the drive
amplifier of a stepper positioning system. The pulses accomplish the profile
independently and without interruption to ladder program execution in the CPU.
Stepper
Motor
Drive
Amplifier
Direction
NOTE: The pulse output is designed for open loop stepper motor systems. This, plus
its minimum velocity of 40 pps make it unsuitable for servo motor control.
325
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Functional Block The diagram below shows HSIO functionality in Mode 30. When the lower byte of
Diagram HSIO Mode register V7633 contains a BCD 30, the pulse output capability in the
HSIO circuit is enabled. The pulse outputs use Y0 and Y1 terminals on the output
connector. Remember that the outputs can only be DC type to operate.
HSIO
SP 104 Profile Complete
CPU
PULSE GEN. Y0 Start Profile
Y1 Preload Position Value
X1 Filtered Input
Interrupt FILTER Vmemory
Mode Select
V7633 xx30
X2 during
Registration
X0, X1, X2 X3- X7
Profile only
Notice the I/O point assignment and usage in the above diagram:
S X0 and X1 can only be filtered inputs in Pulse Output Mode, and they
are available as an input contacts to the ladder program.
S X2 behaves as an external interrupt to the pulse generator for
registration profiles. In other profile modes, it can be used as a filtered
input just like X1 (registration mode configuration shown above).
S References Y0 and Y1 are used in two different ways. At the discrete
output connector, Y0 and Y1 terminals deliver the pulses to the motion
system. The ladder program uses logical references Y0 and Y1 to
initiate Start Profile and Load Position Value HSIO functions in Mode
30.
Hopefully, the above discussion will explain why some I/O reference names have
dual meanings in Pulse Output Mode. Please read the remainder of this section
with care, to avoid confusion about which actual I/O function is being discussed.
326
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Wiring Diagram The generalized wiring diagram below shows pulse outputs Y0 and Y1 connected to
the drive amplifier inputs of a motion control system.
+
Signal Common +24 VDC
Motor Amplifier
Pulse
Direction
Interfacing to The pulse signals from Y0 and Y1 outputs will typically go to drive input circuits as
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Drive Inputs shown above. Remember that the DL05s DC outputs are sinking-only. It will be
helpful to locate equivalent circuit schematics of the drive amplifier. The following
diagram shows how to interface to a sourcing drive input circuit.
Y0, Y1 Pulse Output Drive Input
Power
+DC pwr +V
Output Input
(sinking) + (sourcing)
Common Ground
The following circuit shows how to interface to a sinking drive input using a pullup
resistor. Please refer to Chapter 2 to learn how to calculate and install Rpullup.
Y0, Y1 Pulse Output
Power
+DC pwr
Motion Profile The motion control profiles generated in Pulse Output Mode have the following
Specifications specifications:
Parameter Specification
Profiles Trapezoidal Accel Slope / Target Velocity / Decel Slope
Registration Velocity to Position Control on Interrupt
Velocity Control Speed and Direction only
Position Range 88388608 to 88388607
Positioning Absolute / relative command
Velocity Range 40 Hz to 7 kHz
V-memory registers V2320 to V2325 (Profile Parameter Table)
Current Position CT76 and CT77 (V1076 and V1077)
Physical I/O The configurable discrete I/O options for Pulse Output Mode are listed in the table
Configuration below. The CPU uses SP 104 contact to sense profile complete. V7637 is used to
select pulse/direction or CCW/CW modes for the pulse outputs. Input X2 is
dedicated as the external interrupt for use in registration mode.
Logical Function
I/O
SP 104 Profile Complete the HSIO turns on SP104 to the CPU when the
profile completes. Goes back off when Start Profile (Y0) turns on.
Y0 Start Profile the ladder program turns on Y0 to start motion. If
turned off before the move completes, motion stops. Turning it on
again will start another profile, unless the current position equals
the target position.
Y1 Preload Position Value if motion is stopped and Start Profile is off,
you can load a new value in CT76/CT77, and turn on Y1. At that
transition, the value in CT76/CT77 becomes the current position.
328
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 30 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 30 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 3 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Profile / Velocity The first location in the Profile Parameter Table stores two key pieces of information.
Select Register The upper four bits (1215) select the type of profile required. The lower 12 bits
(011) select the Target Velocity.
Memory Location V2320 (default)
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 7 0 0
The ladder program must program this location before initiating any of the three
profiles. The LD and OUT instruction will write all 16 bits, so be sure to fully specify
the full four-digit BCD value for the Position / Velocity Select Register each time.
The absolute and relative selection determines how the HSIO circuit will interpret
your specified target position. Absolute position targets are referenced to zero.
Relative position targets are referenced to the current position (previous target
position). You may choose whichever reference method that is most convenient for
your application.
329
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Choosing the Pulse Output Mode generates three types of motion profiles. Most applications use
Profile Type one type for most moves. However, each move can be different if required.
S Trapezoidal Accel Slope to Target Velocity to Decel Slope
S Registration Velocity to Position Control on Interrupt
S Velocity Control Speed and Direction only
Trapezoidal The trapezoidal profile is the most Trapezoidal Profile
Profile Defined common positioning profile. It moves the Velocity
load to a pre-defined target position by Fixed Velocity
creating a move profile. The acceleration
slope is applied at the starting position. Accel Decel
The deceleration slope is applied
backwards from the target position. The
remainder of the move in the middle is Time
spent traveling at a defined velocity. Start position Target position
Trapezoidal profiles are best for simple point-to-point moves, when the distance
between the starting and ending positions of the move is known in advance.
Registration and Registration profiles solve a class of
Home Search motion control problems. In some
Profiles Defined applications, product material in work
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Velocity Profile The velocity profile controls only the Velocity Profile
Defined direction and speed of motion. There is no Velocity
target position specified, so the move can
be of indefinite length. Only the first
velocity value needs to be defined. The
remaining velocity values can be created
while motion is in progress. Arrows in the
profile shown indicate velocity changes. Time
331
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Target Velocity
Accel Decel
Starting
Velocity
Time
Start position Target position
Start Y0
The time line of signal traces below the profile indicates the order of events.
The HSIO uses logical output Y0 as the Start input to the HSIO, which starts the
profile. Immediately the HSIO turns off the Profile Complete signal (SP104), so the
ladder program can monitor the progress of the move. Typically a ladder program
will monitor this bit so it knows when to initiate the next profile move.
If you are familiar with motion control, youll notice that we do not have to specify the
direction of the move. The HSIO function examines the target position relative to the
current position, and automatically outputs the correct direction information to the
motor drive.
Notice that the motion accelerates immediately to the starting velocity. This segment
is useful in stepper systems so we can jump past low speed areas when low-torque
problems or a resonant point in the motor might cause a stall. (When a stepper motor
stalls, we have lost the position of the load in open-loop positioning systems).
However, is is preferable not to make the starting velocity too large, because the
stepper motor will also slip some pulses due to the inertia of the system.
When you need to change the current position value, use logical Y1 output coil to
load a new value into the HSIO counter. If the ladder program loads a new value in
CT76/CT77 (V1076/V1077), then energizing Y1 will copy that value into the HSIO
circuit counter. This must occur before the profile begins, because the HSIO ignores
Y1 during motion.
332
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Trapezoidal Profile The trapezoidal profile we want to perform is drawn and labeled in the following
Program Example figure. It consists of a non-zero starting velocity, and moderate target velocity.
Trapezoidal Profile
Velocity
Target Velocity = 1 kHz
Starting
Velocity = 40
Time
Start position Target position = 5000
The following program will realize the profile drawn above, when executed. The
beginning of the program contains all the necessary setup parameters for Pulse
Output Mode 30. We only have to do this once in the program, so we use first-scan
contact SP0 to trigger the setup.
DirectSOFT
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Program
Example Contd SP0 Load the constant K100 which is required to select
LD Trapzoidal Profile, absolute positioning, and a target
K100 velocity of 1 kHz.
Profile / Target Output this constant to V2320, the location of the Profile
OUT Select / Starting Velocity setup register.
Velocity V2320
Load the constant K5000 which selects a target
Target Position LDD position of 5000 pulses. Dont forget to use double
K5000 word size (8-digit BCD position value).
Output this constant to V2321 and V2322, the location of
OUTD the Target Position double-word register.
V2321
Preload At any time you can write (preload) a new position into the current position value.
Position Value This often done after a home search (see the registration example programs).
3. The home search move allows a motion system to calibrate its position on
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
startup. In this case, the positioning system makes an indefinite move and waits for
the load to pass by a home limit switch. This creates an interrupt at the moment when
the load is in a known position. We then stop motion and preload the position value
with a number which equates to the physical home position.
The registration profile begins with only velocity control. When an interrupt pulse
occurs on physical input X2, the starting position is declared to be the present count
(current load position). The velocity control switches to position control, moving the
load to the target position. Note that the minimum starting velocity is 40 pps. This
instantaneous velocity accommodates stepper motors that can stall at low speeds.
Velocity
Registration Profile
Target Velocity
Accel Decel
Starting
Velocity
External Interrupt X2
The time line of signal traces below the profile indicates the order of events. The
CPU uses logical output Y0 to start the profile. Immediately the HSIO turns off the
Profile Complete signal (SP104), so the ladder program can monitor the moves
completion by sensing the signals on state.
335
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Registration Profile The registration profile we want to perform is drawn and labeled in the following
Program Example figure. It consists of a non-zero starting velocity, and moderate target velocity.
Registration Profile
Velocity
Target Velocity = 1 kHz
Starting
Velocity = 40
Time
Start position Target position = 5000
The following program will realize the profile drawn above, when executed. The first
program rung contains all the necessary setup parameters. We only have to do this
once in the program, so we use first-scan contact SP0 to trigger the setup.
DirectSOFT
SP0 Load constant K30 into the accumulator. This selects
LD Mode 30 as the HSIO mode.
K30
Program
Example Contd
SP0 Load the constant K9100 which is required to select
LD Registration Profile, relative positioning, and a target
K9100 velocity of 1 kHz (9xxx times 10 pps).
Profile / Target Output this constant to V2320, the location of the Profile
OUT Select / Starting Velocity setup register.
Velocity V2320
Load the constant K5000 which selects a target
Target Position LDD position of 5000 pulses. Dont forget to use double
K5000 word size (8-digit BCD position value).
Output this constant to V2321 and V2322, the location of
OUTD the Target Position double-word register.
V2321
OUT
High-Speed Input and
Start Profile
X3 Y0
SET We use an input to allow the operator to start the
profile. X3 is a momentary Start switch. When the
operator turns X3 ON, logical output Y0 starts the
Profile Complete profile.
SP104 Y2
OUT SP104 is the logical output of the HSIO to indicate
the move is complete. We use Y2 to energize an
annunciator that the profile has finished. This wont
C0
occur until after the interrupt from X2 has occurred
PD and the profile is complete.
C0 Y0
RST
The profile will begin when the start input (X3) is given. Then the motion begins an
indefinite move, which lasts until an external interrupt on X2 occurs. Then the motion
continues on for 5000 more pulses before stopping.
337
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Home Search One of the more challenging aspects of motion control is the establishment of actual
Program Example position at powerup. This is especially true for open-loop systems which do not have
a position feedback device. However, a simple limit switch located at an exact
location on the positioning mechanism can provide position feedback at one point.
For most stepper control systems, this method is a good and economical solution.
Load
Limit Switches CCW limit (X1) Home limit (X2) CW limit (X3)
Motion
Numbering System -3000 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 3000
In the drawing above, the load moves left or right depending on the CCW/CW
direction of motor rotation. The PLC ladder program senses the CCW and CW limit
switches to stop the motor, before the load moves out-of-bounds and damages the
machine. The home limit switch is used at powerup to establish the actual position.
SET
when X7 turns on.
C4
Go CW back to
Search in CW direction SET home.
C10 C0 The constant K50 selects C4 Add a timer to
LDD a target position of 50 TMR
K50 create a slight
pulses (CW direction). T1 delay before
K5 reversing motor.
Target Position OUTD
V2321 T1 C5
Turn on Start Profile, SET CW delay done.
Y0 searching for either the
home limit or the CW limit
SET (depends on our starting Y0
position). SET Start profile again.
C0
SET Set C0 to indicate the CW
home search has begun. Home Limit found, CW search direction
CW Limit found C0 C1 C3 X2 Y0
C0 C1 X3 Y0 RST Turn off Start Profile.
RST Turn off Start Profile.
C5 Load the constant
LDD
The constant K200 K0 K0 for our initialized
LDD selects a target position.
K80000200 position of 200
pulses, which is in OUTD Output this constant
the CCW direction. V1076 to C1076/V1077.
OUTD
V2321
C1
The CW limit has
SET been reached.
The home search profile will execute specific parts of the program, based on the
order of detection of the limit switches. Ladder logic sets C0 to initiate a home search
in the CW direction. If the CW limit is encountered, the program searches for home in
the CCW direction, passes it slightly, and does the final CW search for home. After
reaching home, the last ladder rung preloads the current position to 0.
339
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Velocity
Time
Start Y0
Profile
Complete SP104
Velocity Profile The velocity profile we want to perform is drawn and labeled in the following figure.
Program Example Each velocity segment is of indefinite length. The velocity only changes when ladder
logic (or other device writing to V-memory) updates the velocity parameter.
Velocity Profile
Velocity
Time
The following program uses dedicated discrete inputs to load in new velocity values.
This is a fun program to try, because you can create an infinite variety of profiles with
just two or three input switches. The intent is to turn on only one of X1, X2, or X3 at a
time. The beginning of the program contains all the necessary setup parameters for
Pulse Output Mode 30. We only have to do this once in the program, so we use
first-scan contact SP0 to trigger the setup.
DirectSOFT
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
Program
Example Contd
SP0 Load the constant K2000 which is required to select
LD Velocity Profile. This data word contains no velocity
K2000 information in the case of velocity mode.
Profile / Target Output this constant to V2320, the location of the Profile
OUT Select setup register.
Velocity V2320
Load the constant K80000000 which selects CCW
Select Direction LDD direction for Velocity Profiles. Dont forget to use double
K80000000 word size (8-digit BCD position value).
Output this constant to V2321 and V2322, the location of
OUTD the Target Position double-word register.
V2321
Start Profile
X1 Y0
OUT We use a spare filtered input to allow the operator
Pulse Output Error The Profile Parameter Table starting at V2320 (default location) defines the profile.
Codes Certain numbers will result in a error when the HSIO attempts to use the parameters
to execute a move profile. When an error occurs, the HSIO writes an error code in
V2326.
Most errors can be corrected by rechecking the Profile Parameter Table values. The
error is automatically cleared at powerup and at Program-to-Run Mode transitions.
Troubleshooting If youre having trouble with Mode 30 operation, please study the following
Guide for Mode 30 symptoms and possible causes. The most common problems are listed below:
4. Wiring Verify the wiring to the stepper motor is correct. Remember the
signal ground connection from the PLC to the motion system is required.
5. Motion system Verify that the drive is powered and enabled. To verify the
motion system is working, you can use Mode 60 operation (normal PLC
inputs/outputs) as shown in the test program below. With it, you can
manually control Y0 and Y1 with X0 and X1, respectively. Using an input
simulator is ideal for this type of manual debugging. With the switches you
can single-step the motor in either direction. If the motor will not move with
this simple control, Mode 30 operation will not be possible until the problem
with the motor drive system or wiring is corrected.
DirectSOFT
SP0 Load constant K60 into the accumulator. This
LD selects Mode 60 as the HSIO mode.
K60
X0 Y0
OUT Use a switch on X0 input to manually control output Y0.
X1 Y1
OUT Use a switch on X1 input to manually control output Y1.
Interrupt Interrupt
High-Speed Input and
Vmemory
Mode Select
FILTER V7633 0040
X0 X1, X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
Alternately, you may configure the HSIO circuit to generate interrupts based on a
timer, as shown below. In this configuration, inputs X0 through X2 are filtered inputs.
Input Circuit
345
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 40 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 40 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 4 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
The resulting interrupt uses label INT 0 in the ladder program. Be sure to include the
Enable Interrupt (ENI) instruction at the beginning of your program. Otherwise, the
interrupt routine will not be executed.
CPU Scan
Input
Update
Ladder INT
X0, External Interrupt Program
Execution Interrupt
Routine
Program
TIMER current
instruction
Interrupt source / IRT
Time select Input
Update
V7634 xxx4
346
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
External Interrupt Signal pulses at X0 must meet certain timing criteria to guarantee an interrupt will
Timing Parameters result. Refer to the timing diagram below. The input characteristics of X0 are fixed (it
is not a programmable filtered input). The minimum pulse width is 0.1 mS. There
must be some delay before the next interrupt pulse arrives, such that the interrupt
period cannot be smaller than 0.5 mS.
0.5 mS minimum
0.1 mS minimum
External
Interrupt X0
Time
Timed Interrupt When the timed interrupt is selected, the HSIO generates the interrupt to ladder
Parameters logic. There is no interrupt pulse width in this case, but the interrupt period can be
adjusted from 5 to 999 mS.
5 mS to 999 mS
Timed
Interrupt
Time
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
X Input / Timed The configurable discrete input options for High-Speed Interrupt Mode are listed in
INT Configuration the table below. Input X0 is the external interrupt when 0004 is in V7634. If you
need a timed interrupt instead, then V7634 contains the interrupt time period, and
input X0 becomes a filtered input (uses X1s filter time constant by default). Inputs
X1, and X2, can only be filtered inputs, having individual configuration registers and
filter time constants. However, X0 will have the same filter time constant as X1 when
the timed interrupt is selected.
Input Configuration Function Hex Code
Register Required
X0 V7634 External Interrupt 0004 (default)
Uses X1s time Filtered Input (when xxx4, xxx = INT timebase
setting in V7635 timed interrupt is in use) 5 - 999 ms (BCD)
X1 V7635 Filtered Input xx06 (xx = filter time)
0 - 99 ms (BCD)
X2 V7636 Filtered Input xx06 (xx = filter time)
0 - 99 ms (BCD)
Independent Timed Interrupt O1 is also available as an interrupt. This interrupt is independent of the
Interrupt HSIO features. Interrupt O1 uses an internal timer that is configured in V memory
location V7647. The interrupt period can be adjusted from 5 to 9999 mS. Once the
interrupt period is set and the interrupt is enabled in the program, the CPU will
continuously call the interrupt routine based on the time setting in V7647.
External Interrupt The following program selects Mode 40, then selects the external interrupt option.
Program Example Inputs X1 and X2 are configured as filtered inputs with a 10 mS time constant. The
program is otherwise generic, and may be adapted to your application.
DirectSOFT
Y5
RST Reset output Y0.
Main Program Insert Main Program rungs here for your application.
Interrupt Routine Insert interrupt service routine rungs here for your
application.
SP1 Y5
SETI Use the pulse catch input to set output Y0 on.
Timed Interrupt The following program selects Mode 40, then selects the timed interrupt option, with
Program Example an interrupt period of 100 mS.
100 mS
Timed
Interrupt
Time
Inputs X0, X1, and X2, are configured as filtered inputs with a 10 mS time constant.
Note that X0 uses the time constant from X1. The program is otherwise generic, and
may be adapted to your application.
DirectSOFT
Input Circuit
Pulse Catch Signal pulses at X0 must meet certain timing criteria to guarantee a pulse capture
Timing Parameters will result. Refer to the timing diagram below. The input characteristics of X0 are
fixed (it is not a programmable filtered input). The minimum pulse width is 0.1 mS.
There must be some delay before the next pulse arrives, such that the pulse period
cannot be smaller than 0.5 mS. If the pulse period is smaller than 0.5 mS, the next
pulse will be considered part of the current pulse.
0.5 mS minimum
0.1 mS minimum
Pulse
Input X0
Time
Note that the pulse catch and filtered input functions are opposite in nature. The
pulse catch feature on X0 seeks to capture narrow pulses, while the filter input
feature on X1 and X2 seeks to reject narrow pulses.
350
High-speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 50 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 50 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 5 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
Pulse Output Features
High-Speed Input and
X Input The configurable discrete input options for Pulse Catch Mode are listed in the table
Configuration below. Input X0 is the pulse input, and must have 0005 loaded into it configuration
register V7634. Inputs X1 and X2 can only be filtered inputs. Each input has its own
configuration register and filter time constant.
Pulse Catch The following program selects Mode 50, then programs the pulse catch code for X0.
Program Example Inputs X1 and X2 are configured as filtered inputs with 10 and 30 mS time constants
respectively. The program is otherwise generic, and may be adapted to your
application.
DirectSOFT
Main Program
X0 Y0
SET Use the pulse catch input to set output Y0 on. This will
work even for a very short pulse on X0.
FILTERS X0-X2
Vmemory
Mode Select
V7633 0060
X0 X1 X2 X3- X7
Input Circuit
Input Filter Signal pulses at inputs X0 X2 are filtered by using a delay time. In the figure below,
Timing Parameters the input pulse on the top line is longer than the filter time. The resultant logical input
to ladder is phase-shifted (delayed) by the filter time on both rising and falling edges.
In the bottom waveforms, the physical input pulse width is smaller than the filter time.
In this case, the logical input to the ladder program remains in the OFF state (input
pulse was filtered out).
Physical Input X0
Logical Input X0
Time
Physical Input X0
Logical Input X0
353
High-Speed Input and Pulse Output Features
Setup for Mode 60 Recall that V7633 is the HSIO Mode Select register. Refer to the diagram below. Use
BCD 60 in the lower byte of V7633 to select the High-Speed Counter Mode. The
DL05 does not use bits 8 - 15 in V7633.
Memory Location V7633
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 6 0
Choose the most convenient method of programming V7633 from the following:
S Include load and out instructions in your ladder program
S DirectSOFTs memory editor
S Use the Handheld Programmer D2HPP
We recommend using the first method above so that the HSIO setup becomes an
integral part of your application program. An example program later in this section
X Input The configurable discrete input options for Discrete Filtered Inputs Mode are listed
Configuration in the table below. The filter time constant (delay) is programmable from 0 to 99 mS
(the input acts as a normal discrete input when the time constant is set to 0). The
code for this selection occupies the upper byte of the configuration register in BCD.
We combine this number with the required 06 in the lower byte to get xx06, where
xx = 0 to 99. Input X0, X1, and X2 can only be filtered inputs. Each input has its own
configuration register and filter time constant.
Filtered Inputs The following program selects Mode 60, then programs the filter delay time
Program Example constants for inputs X0, X1, and X2. Each filter time constant is different, for
illustration purposes. The program is otherwise generic, and may be adapted to your
application.
DirectSOFT
V7635
High-Speed Input and
Main Program Insert Main Program rungs here for your application.
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
CPU Specifications
CPU Hardware Setup
CPU Operation
Program Mode Operation
Run Mode Operation
I/O Response Time
CPU Scan Time Considerations
PLC Numbering Systems
Memory Map
DL05 System V-Memory
X Input Bit Map
Y Output Bit Map
Staget Control / Status Bit Map
Control Relay Bit Map
Timer Status Bit Map
Counter Status Bit Map
Network Configuration
Network Slave Operation
Network Master Operation
42
CPU Specifications and Operation
Introduction
The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is the heart of the Micro PLC. Almost all PLC
operations are controlled by the CPU, so it is important that it is set up correctly. This
chapter provides the information needed to understand:
S Steps required to set up the CPU
S Operation of ladder programs
S Organization of Variable Memory
To Programming Device
or Operator Interface
DL05
PLC
2 Comm.
CPU Ports
Main
Power
Supply
Power
Input 8 Discrete Inputs Commons 6 Discrete Outputs Commons
NOTE: The High-Speed I/O function (HSIO) consists of dedicated but configurable
hardware in the DL05. It is not considered part of the CPU, because it does not
execute the ladder program. For more on HSIO operation, see Chapter 3.
CPU Specifications
and Operation
DL05 The DL05 Micro PLC which has 6K words of memory comprised of 2.0K of ladder
CPU Features memory and 4K words of V-memory (data registers). Program storage is in the
FLASH memory which is a part of the CPU board in the PLC. In addition, there is
RAM with the CPU which will store system parameters, V-memory, and other data
which is not in the application program. The RAM is backed up by a
super-capacitor, storing the data for several hours in the event of a power outage.
The capacitor automatically charges during powered operation of the PLC.
The DL05 supports fixed I/O which includes eight discrete input points and six output
points. No provision for expansion beyond these fourteen I/O points is available in
the DL05 model PLCs.
Over 120 different instructions are available for program development as well as
extensive internal diagnostics that can be monitored from the application program or
from an operator interface. Chapters 5, 6, and 7 provide detailed descriptions of the
instructions.
The DL05 provides two built-in RS232C communication ports, so you can easily
connect a handheld programmer, operator interface, or a personal computer without
needing any additional hardware.
43
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Specifications
Feature DL05
Total Program memory (words) 6K
Ladder memory (words) 2048
Total V-memory (words) 4096
User V-memory (words) 3968
Non-volatile V Memory (words) 128
Contact execution (boolean) 2.0uS
Typical scan (boolean) 2.73.2mS
RLL Ladder style Programming Yes
RLL and RLL PLUS Programming Yes
Run Time Edits Yes
Scan Variable / fixed
Handheld programmer Yes
DirectSOFT programming for Windows Yes
Built-in communication ports (RS232C) Yes
FLASH Memory Standard on CPU
Local Discrete I/O points available 14
Local Analog input / output channels maximum None
High-Speed I/O (quad., pulse out, interrupt, pulse catch, etc.) Yes, 2
I/O Point Density 8 inputs, 6 outputs
Number of instructions available (see Chapter 5 for details) 129
Control relays 512
Special relays (system defined) 512
Stages in RLL PLUS 256
CPU Specifications
Timers 128
and Operation
Counters 128
Immediate I/O Yes
Interrupt input (external / timed) Yes
Subroutines Yes
For/Next Loops Yes
Math Integer
Drum Sequencer Instruction Yes
Time of Day Clock/Calendar No
Internal diagnostics Yes
Password security Yes
System error log No
User error log No
Battery backup No (builtin supercap)
Yes, with mem cartridge
44
CPU Specifications and Operation
Communication Cables are available that allow you to quickly and easily connect a Handheld
Port Pinout Programmer or a personal computer to the DL05 PLCs. However, if you need to
Diagrams build your own cables, use the pinout diagrams shown. The DL05 PLCs require an
RJ-12 phone plug to fit the built-in jacks.
The Micro PLC has two built-in RS232C communication ports. Port 1 is generally
used for connecting to a D2-HPP, DirectSOFT, operator interface, MODBUS
slave, or a DirectNET slave. . The baud rate is fixed at 9600 baud for port 1. Port 2
can be used to connect to a D2-HPP, DirectSOFT, operator interface, MODBUS
master/slave, or a DirectNET master/slave. Port 2 has a range of speeds from
300 baud to 38.4K baud.
1 1
Top View
CPU Specifications
and Operation
Connecting the If youre using a Personal Computer with the DirectSOFT programming package,
Programming you can connect the computer to either of the DL05s programming ports. For an
Devices engineering office environment (typical during program development), this is the
preferred method of programming.
For replacement
cable, use part no.
DV1000CBL
CPU Specifications
CPU Setup Even if you have years of experience using PLCs, there are a few things you need to
and Operation
Information do before you can start entering programs. This section includes some basic things,
such as changing the CPU mode, but it also includes some things that you may
never have to use. Heres a brief list of the items that are discussed.
S Selecting and Changing the CPU Modes
S Using Auxiliary Functions
S Clearing the program (and other memory areas)
S How to initialize system memory
S Setting retentive memory ranges
The following paragraphs provide the setup information necessary to get the CPU
ready for programming. They include setup instructions for either type of
programming device you are using. The D2HPP Handheld Programmer Manual
provides the Handheld keystrokes required to perform all of these operations. The
DirectSOFT Manual provides a description of the menus and keystrokes required
to perform the setup procedures via DirectSOFT.
46
CPU Specifications and Operation
Mode Switch
Status Indicators
Status Indicators The status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions which can
help in programming and troubleshooting.
Mode Switch The mode switch on the DL05 PLC provides positions for enabling and disabling
Functions program changes in the CPU. Unless the mode switch is in the TERM position, RUN
and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device, (handheld
programmer, DirectSOFT programing package or operator interface). Programs
may be viewed or monitored but no changes may be made. If the switch is in the
TERM position and no program password is in effect, all operating modes as well as
program access will be allowed through the connected programming or monitoring
device.
47
CPU Specifications and Operation
Changing Modes in There are two ways to change the CPU mode. You can use the CPU mode switch to
the DL05 PLC select the operating mode, or you can place the mode switch in the TERM position
and use a programming device to change operating modes. With the switch in this
position, the CPU can be changed between Run and Program modes. You can use
either DirectSOFT or the Handheld Programmer to change the CPU mode of
operation. With DirectSOFT you use a menu option in the PLC menu. With the
Handheld Programmer, you use the MODE key.
MODE
Menu Options Key
Mode of Operation The DL05 CPU will normally power-up in the mode that it was in just prior to the
at Power-up power interruption. For example, if the CPU was in Program Mode when the power
was disconnected, the CPU will power-up in Program Mode (see warning note
CPU Specifications
below).
and Operation
WARNING: Once the super capacitor has discharged, the system memory
may not retain the previous mode of operation. When this occurs, the PLC can
power-up in either Run or Program Mode if the mode switch is in the term
position. There is no way to determine which mode will be entered as the
startup mode. Failure to adhere to this warning greatly increases the risk of
unexpected equipment startup.
48
CPU Specifications and Operation
Auxiliary Functions Many CPU setup tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX
Functions perform many different operations, ranging from clearing ladder memory,
displaying the scan time, copying programs to EEPROM in the handheld
programmer, etc. They are divided into categories that affect different system
parameters. Appendix A provides a description of the AUX functions.
You can access the AUX Functions from DirectSOFT or from the D2HPP
Handheld Programmer. The manuals for those products provide step-by-step
procedures for accessing the AUX Functions. Some of these AUX Functions are
designed specifically for the Handheld Programmer setup, so they will not be
needed (or available) with the DirectSOFT package. The following table shows a list
of the Auxiliary functions for the Handheld Programmer.
Clearing an Before you enter a new program, be sure to always clear ladder memory. You can
Existing Program use AUX Function 24 to clear the complete program.
You can also use other AUX functions to clear other memory areas.
S AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range
S AUX 24 Clear all Ladders
S AUX 31 Clear V Memory
Initializing System The DL05 Micro PLC maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred
Memory to as the scratchpad. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup
that will be stored in system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control
Relays (CRs) as retentive, these changes are stored in system memory.
AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values.
49
CPU Specifications and Operation
WARNING: You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any
setup information that is stored in system memory. Usually, youll only need to
initialize the system memory if you are changing programs and the old program
required a special system setup. You can usually load in new programs without ever
initializing system memory.
Remember, this AUX function will reset all system memory. If you have set special
parameters such as retentive ranges, etc. they will be erased when AUX 54 is used.
Make sure you that you have considered all ramifications of this operation before
you select it.
Setting Retentive The DL05 PLCs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default
Memory Ranges ranges are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your
application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. The
default settings are:
DL05
Memory Area
Default Range Available Range
Control Relays C400 C777 C0 C777
V Memory V1400 V7777 V0 V7777
Timers None by default T0 T177
Counters CT0 CT177 CT0 CT177
Stages None by default S0 S377
You can use AUX 57 to set the retentive ranges. You can also use DirectSOFT
menus to select the retentive ranges. Appendix A contains detailed information
about auxiliary
WARNING: The DL05 PLCs do not have battery back-up (unless the memory
cartridge, D001MC, is installed) The super capacitor will retain the values in the
CPU Specifications
event of a power loss, but only for a short period of time, depending on conditions.
and Operation
410
CPU Specifications and Operation
Using a Password The DL05 PLCs allow you to use a password to help minimize the risk of
unauthorized program and/or data changes. Once you enter a password you can
lock the PLC against access. Once the CPU is locked you must enter the password
before you can use a programming device to change any system parameters.
You can select an 8-digit numeric password. The Micro PLCs are shipped from the
factory with a password of 00000000. All zeros removes the password protection. If
a password has been entered into the CPU you cannot just enter all zeros to remove
it. Once you enter the correct password, you can change the password to all zeros to
remove the password protection.
WARNING: Make sure you remember your password. If you forget your password
you will not be able to access the CPU. The Micro PLC must be returned to the
factory to have the password removed.
DirectSOFT D2HPP
Select AUX 81
I B
PASSWORD
CLR CLR AUX ENT
8 1
00000000
PASSWORD
X X X ENT
XXXXXXXX
CPU Specifications
and Operation
There are three ways to lock the CPU once the password has been entered.
1. If the CPU power is disconnected, the CPU will be automatically locked
against access.
2. If you enter the password with DirectSOFT, the CPU will be automatically
locked against access when you exit DirectSOFT.
3. Use AUX 83 to lock the CPU.
When you use DirectSOFT, you will be prompted for a password if the CPU has
been locked. If you use the Handheld Programmer, you have to use AUX 82 to
unlock the CPU. Once you enter AUX 82, you will be prompted to enter the
password.
411
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Operation
Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good
understanding of how DL05 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. There are
four main areas to understand before you create your application program:
S CPU Operating System the CPU manages all aspects of system
control. A quick overview of all the steps is provided in the next section.
S CPU Operating Modes The two primary modes of operation are
Program Mode and Run Mode.
S CPU Timing The two important areas we discuss are the I/O
response time and the CPU scan time.
S CPU Memory Map DL05 CPUs offer a wide variety of resources,
such as timers, counters, inputs, etc. The memory map section shows
the organization and availability of these data types.
CPU Operating At powerup, the CPU initializes the
Power up
System internal electronic hardware. Memory
initialization starts with examining the
Initialize hardware
retentive memory settings. In general, the
contents of retentive memory is Initialize various memory
preserved, and non-retentive memory is based on retentive
initialized to zero (unless otherwise configuration
specified).
After the one-time powerup tasks, the Update input
CPU begins the cyclical scan activity. The
flowchart to the right shows how the tasks Service peripheral
differ, based on the CPU mode and the
existence of any errors. The scan time is Update Special Relays
defined as the average time around the
task loop. Note that the CPU is always PGM
reading the inputs, even during program Mode?
CPU Specifications
mode. This allows programming tools to RUN
and Operation
monitor input status at any time.
Execute program
The outputs are only updated in Run
mode. In program mode, they are in the off Update output
state.
Error detection has two levels. Non-fatal
errors are reported, but the CPU remains Do diagnostics
in its current mode. If a fatal error occurs,
the CPU is forced into program mode and OK
OK?
YES
the outputs go off.
NO
Report error, set flag
register, turn on LED
NO
Fatal error
YES
Force CPU into
PGM mode
412
CPU Specifications and Operation
You can also edit the program during Run Mode. The Run Mode Edits are not
bumpless to the outputs. Instead, the CPU maintains the outputs in their last state
while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the new program,
then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode. This feature is
discussed in more detail in Chapter 9.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode
become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any
changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
413
CPU Specifications and Operation
Read Inputs The CPU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input
image register locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location.
Image register data is used by the CPU when it solves the application program.
Of course, an input may change after the CPU has just read the inputs. Generally,
the CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If you have an application that
cannot wait until the next I/O update, you can use Immediate Instructions. These do
not use the status of the input image register to solve the application program. The
Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from the I/O
modules. However, this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the
I/O point status again. A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in
Chapter 5.
Service Peripherals After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any attached
and Force I/O peripheral devices. This is primarily a communications service for any attached
devices. For example, it would read a programming device to see if any input, output,
or other memory type status needs to be modified. There are two basic types of
forcing available with the DL05 CPUs.
S Forcing from a peripheral not a permanent force, good only for one
scan
S Bit Override holds the I/O point (or other bit) in the current state. Valid
bits are X, Y, C, T, CT, and S. (These memory types are discussed in
more detail later in this chapter).
Regular Forcing This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a
discrete bit. For example, you may want to force an input on, even though it is really
off. This allows you to change the point status that was stored in the image register.
This value will be valid until the image register location is written to during the next
scan. This is primarily useful during testing situations when you need to force a bit on
to trigger another event.
Bit Override Bit override can be enabled on a point-by-point basis by using AUX
CPU Specifications
59 from the Handheld Programmer or, by a menu option from within DirectSOFT.
and Operation
Bit override basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the CPU. For
example, if you enable bit override for X1, and X1 is off at the time, then the CPU will
not change the state of X1. This means that even if X1 comes on, the CPU will not
acknowledge the change. So, if you used X1 in the program, it would always be
evaluated as off in this case. Of course, if X1 was on when the bit override was
enabled, then X1 would always be evaluated as on.
There is an advantage available when you use the bit override feature. The regular
forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled. For example, if you
enabled the Bit Override for Y0 and it was off at the time, then the CPU would not
change the state of Y0. However, you can still use a programming device to change
the status. Now, if you use the programming device to force Y0 on, it will remain on
and the CPU will not change the state of Y0. If you then force Y0 off, the CPU will
maintain Y0 as off. The CPU will never update the point with the results from the
application program or from the I/O update until the bit override is removed.
The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override feature. Notice the
CPU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled.
414
CPU Specifications and Operation
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Make sure you thoroughly
consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage
to equipment.
Update Special There are certain V-memory locations that contain Special Relays and other
Relays and Special dedicated register information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these
Registers locations get updated on every scan. Also, there are several different Special
Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., that are also updated during this segment.
You may recall that you can force various types of points in the system. (This was
discussed earlier in this chapter.) If any I/O points or memory data have been forced,
the output image register also contains this information.
415
CPU Specifications and Operation
Write Outputs Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the
output image register, the CPU writes the contents of the output image register to the
corresponding output points. Remember, the CPU also made sure that any forcing
operation changes were stored in the output image register, so the forced points get
updated with the status specified earlier.
Diagnostics During this part of the scan, the CPU performs all system diagnostics and other tasks
such as calculating the scan time and resetting the watchdog timer. There are many
different error conditions that are automatically detected and reported by the DL05
PLCs. Appendix B contains a listing of the various error codes.
Probably one of the more important things that occurs during this segment is the
scan time calculation and watchdog timer control. The DL05 CPU has a watchdog
timer that stores the maximum time allowed for the CPU to complete the solve
application segment of the scan cycle. If this time is exceeded the CPU will enter the
Program Mode and turn off all outputs. The default value set from the factory is 200
ms. An error is automatically reported. For example, the Handheld Programmer
would display the following message E003 S/W TIMEOUT when the scan overrun
occurs.
You can use AUX 53 to view the minimum, maximum, and current scan time. Use
AUX 55 to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value.
CPU Specifications
S The point in the scan cycle when the field input changes states
and Operation
S Input Off to On delay time
S CPU scan time
S Output Off to On delay time
The next paragraphs show how these items interact to affect the response time.
Normal Minimum The I/O response time is shortest when the input changes just before the Read
I/O Response Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the input status is read, the
application program is solved, and the output point gets updated. The following
diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation.
416
CPU Specifications and Operation
Scan
Field Input
Output
Off/On Delay
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items:
Normal Maximum The I/O response time is longest when the input changes just after the Read Inputs
I/O Response portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status is not read until the
following scan. The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this
situation.
Scan
Read Write
Inputs Outputs
and Operation
Field Input
Output
Off/On Delay
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items:
Improving There are a few things you can do the help improve throughput.
Response Time S You can choose instructions with faster execution times
S You can use immediate I/O instructions (which update the I/O points
during the program execution)
S You can use the HSIO Mode 50 Pulse Catch features designed to
operate in high-speed environments. See the Chapter 3 for details on
using this feature.
Of these three things the Immediate I/O instructions are probably the most important
and most useful. The following example shows how an immediate input instruction
and immediate output instruction would affect the response time.
Scan
Field Input
Input
Off/On Delay
Output
Off/On Delay
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items.
CPU Specifications
Input Delay + Instruction Execution Time + Output Delay = Response Time
and Operation
The instruction execution time would be calculated by adding the time for the
immediate input instruction, the immediate output instruction, and any other
instructions in between the two.
NOTE: Even though the immediate instruction reads the most current status from
I/O, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new
status to update the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow
will still use the image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow will
access the I/O again to update the status.
418
CPU Specifications and Operation
S Program Execution
Update output
S Output Update
S Timed Interrupt Execution
Do diagnostics
The only one you really have the most
control over is the amount of time it takes
OK YES
to execute the application program. This is OK?
because different instructions take
NO
different amounts of time to execute. So, if
Report error, set flag
you think you need a faster scan, then you register, turn on LED
can try to choose faster instructions.
CPU Specifications
NO
Fatal error
devices can also affect the scan time.
However, these things are usually dictated YES
by the application. Force CPU into
PGM mode
The following paragraphs provide some
general information on how much time
some of the segments can require.
Reading Inputs The time required during each scan to read the input status is 40 mS. Dont confuse
this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier.
Writing Outputs The time required to write the output status is 629 mS. Dont confuse this with the I/O
response time that was discussed earlier.
419
CPU Specifications and Operation
Application The CPU processes the program from address 0 to the END instruction. The CPU
Program Execution executes the program left to right and top to bottom. As each rung is evaluated the
appropriate image register or memory location is updated. The time required to
solve the application program depends on the type and number of instructions used,
and the amount of execution overhead.
Just add the execution times for all the instructions in your program to determine to
total execution time. Appendix C provides a complete list of the instruction execution
times for the DL05 Micro PLC. For example, the execution time for running the
program shown below is calculated as follows:
Instruction Time
X0 X1 Y0
STR X0 2 ms OUT
OR C0 1.6 ms
ANDN X1 1.6 ms C0
OUT Y0 6.8 ms
STRN C100 2.3 ms
C100
LD K10 42.7 ms LD
STRN C101 2.3 ms K10
LD K50 42.7 ms
STRN C103 2.3 ms C102
LD
OUT V2006 16.6 ms K50
STR X5 2 ms
ANDN X10 1.6 ms C103
OUT V2006
OUT Y3 6.8 ms
END 24 ms
X5 X10 Y3
OUT
SUBTOTAL 174.2 ms
CPU Specifications
Maximum 2.5 ms
and Operation
TOTAL TIME = (Program execution time + Overhead) x 1.1
The program above takes only 174.2 ms to execute during each scan. The DL05
spends 0.1ms, on internal timed interrupt management, for every 1ms of instruction
time. The total scan time is calculated by adding the program execution time to the
overhead (shown above)and multiplying the result (ms) by 1.1. Overhead includes
all other housekeeping and diagnostic tasks. The scan time will vary slightly from
one scan to the next, because of fluctuation in overhead tasks.
Program Control Instructions the DL05 PLCs have an interrupt routine feature
that changes the way a program executes. Since this instruction interrupts normal
program flow, it will have an effect on the program execution time. For example, a
timed interrupt routine with a 10 mS period interrupts the main program execution
(before the END statement) every 10 mS, so the CPU can execute the interrupt
routine. Chapter 5 provides detailed information on interrupts.
420
CPU Specifications and Operation
In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. Counting in octal we have
and Operation
20 items, meaning 2 groups of eight, plus 0 individuals Dont say twenty, say
twozero octal. This makes a clear distinction between number systems.
Decimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Octal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20
After counting PLC resources, its time to access PLC resources (theres a
difference). The CPU instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal
addresses. Octal addresses are the same as octal quantities, except they start
counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a computer, so we dont skip it.
Our circles are in an array of square X= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
containers to the right. To access a
resource, our PLC instruction will address X
its location using the octal references 1X
shown. If these were counters, CT14
would access the black circle location. 2X
421
CPU Specifications and Operation
VMemory Variable memory (called V-memory) stores data for the ladder program and for
configuration settings. V-memory locations and V-memory addresses are the same
thing, and are numbered in octal. For example, V2073 is a valid location, while
V1983 is not valid (9 and 8 are not valid octal digits).
Each V-memory location is one data word wide, meaning 16 bits. For configuration
registers, our manuals will show each bit of a V-memory word. The least significant
bit (LSB) will be on the right, and the most significant bit (MSB) on the left. We use the
word significant, referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits.
V-memory address V-memory data
(octal) (binary)
MSB LSB
V2017 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
V-memory data is 16-bit binary, but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a
time. We use instructions or viewing tools that let us work with decimal, octal, and
hexadecimal numbers. All these are converted and stored as binary for us.
A frequently-asked question is How do I tell if a number is octal, BCD, or hex? The
answer is that we usually cannot tell just by looking at the data... but it does not really
matter. What matters is: the source or mechanism which writes data into a
V-memory location and the thing which later reads it must both use the same data
type (i.e., octal, hex, binary, or whatever). The V-memory location is just a storage
box... thats all. It does not convert or move the data on its own.
Binary-Coded Since humans naturally count in decimal (10 fingers, 10 toes), we prefer to enter and
Decimal Numbers view PLC data in decimal as well. However, computers are more efficient in using
pure binary numbers. A compromise solution between the two is Binary-Coded
Decimal (BCD) representation. A BCD digit ranges from 0 to 9, and is stored as four
binary bits (a nibble). This permits each V-memory location to store four BCD digits,
with a range of decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999.
BCD number 4 9 3 6
V-memory storage 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
CPU Specifications
and Operation
In a pure binary sense, a 16-bit word can represent numbers from 0 to 65535. In
storing BCD numbers, the range is reduced to only 0 to 9999. Many math
instructions use Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) data, and DirectSOFT and the
handheld programmer allow us to enter and view data in BCD.
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal numbers are similar to BCD numbers, except they utilize all possible
Numbers binary values in each 4-bit digit. They are base-16 numbers so we need 16 different
digits. To extend our decimal digits 0 through 9, we use A through F as shown.
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
A 4-digit hexadecimal number can represent all 65536 values in a V-memory word.
The range is from 0000 to FFFF (hex). PLCs often need this full range for sensor
data, etc. Hexadecimal is just a convenient way for humans to view full binary data.
Hexadecimal number A 7 F 4
V-memory storage 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
422
CPU Specifications and Operation
Memory Map
With any PLC system, you generally have many different types of information to
process. This includes input device status, output device status, various timing
elements, parts counts, etc. It is important to understand how the system represents
and stores the various types of data. For example, you need to know how the system
identifies input points, output points, data words, etc. The following paragraphs
discuss the various memory types used in DL05 Micro PLCs. A memory map
overview for the CPU follows the memory descriptions.
X10 X11
Discrete and Word As you examine the different memory Discrete On or Off, 1 bit
Locations types, youll notice two types of memory
X0
in the DL05, discrete and word memory.
Discrete memory is one bit that can be
either a 1 or a 0. Word memory is referred
to as V memory (variable) and is a 16-bit
location normally used to manipulate
data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc.
CPU Specifications
and Operation
V Memory The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays,
Locations for stages, timer status bits and counter status bits. However, you can also access the
Discrete Memory bit data types as a V-memory word. Each V-memory location contains 16
Areas consecutive discrete locations. For example, the following diagram shows how the X
input points are mapped into V-memory locations.
8 Discrete (X) Input Points
X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 V40400
These discrete memory areas and their corresponding V memory ranges are listed
in the memory area table for DL05 Micro PLCs on the following pages.
423
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Specifications
and Operation
Timers and Timer status bits reflect the relationship
Timer Status Bits between the current value and the preset X0
TMR T1
(T Data type) value of a specified timer. The timer K30
status bit will be on when the current
value is equal or greater than the preset
value of a corresponding timer. T1 Y12
When input X0 turns on, timer T1 will OUT
start. When the timer reaches the preset
of 3 seconds (K of 30) timer status
contact T1 turns on. When T1 turns on,
output Y12 turns on. Turning off X0
resets the timer.
424
CPU Specifications and Operation
Each time contact X0 transitions from off to on, the counter increments by one. (If X1
comes on, the counter is reset to zero.) When the counter reaches the preset of 10
counts (K of 10) counter status contact CT3 turns on. When CT3 turns on, output Y2
turns on.
etc.
and Operation
V1003 K1 Y2
The primary reason for this is OUT
programming flexibility. The example
shows how you can use relational V1003 K3 Y3
contacts to monitor the counter values. OUT
V1003 K5 V1003 K8 Y4
OUT
425
CPU Specifications and Operation
1 3 4 5
CPU Specifications
S400
Part
Locked S3
then the status bit is off. This status bit
and Operation
JMP
can also be turned on or off by other X2
60 Filtered
and Operation
discrete In.
Upper Byte Range:
Bits 812, 14, 15: Unused
Bit 13: Powerup in RUN,
only if Mode Switch is in
TERM position.
V7634 X0 Setup Register for High-Speed I/O functions Default: 1006
V7635 X1 Setup Register for High-Speed I/O functions Default: 1006
V7636 X2 Setup Register for High-Speed I/O functions Default: 1006
V7637V7646 Reserved N/A
V7647 Timed Interrupt Default: 0000
Range: 000303E7h
(39999ms)
V7650V7654 Reserved N/A
V7655 Port 2: Setup for the protocol, time-out, and the response delay time. Default: 00E0
V7656 Port 2: Setup for the station number, baud rate, STOP bit, and parity. Default: 8501
427
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Specifications
and Operation
V7777 Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last N/A
Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds).
428
CPU Specifications and Operation
V1000 K100
Current Values
Data Words None V1200 V7377 3968 None specific, used with many
instructions
Data Words None V7400 V7577 128 None specific, used with many
Nonvolatile instructions
Stages S0 S377 V41000 V41017 256 S0
SG
S 001
System None V7600 V7777 128 None specific, used for various
parameters purposes
1 The DL05 systems are limited to 8 discrete inputs and 6 discrete outputs with the present available hardware, but 256 point addresses exist.
429
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Specifications
and Operation
077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V41003
117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V41004
137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V41005
157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41006
177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41007
217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41010
237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41011
257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41012
277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41013
317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41014
337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41015
357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41016
377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41017
430
CPU Specifications and Operation
537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40625
557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40626
577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40627
617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40630
637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40631
657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40632
677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40633
717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40634
737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40635
757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40636
777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40637
431
CPU Specifications and Operation
CPU Specifications
157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41146
and Operation
177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41147
432
CPU Specifications and Operation
You will need to make sure the network connection is a 3-wire RS232 type.
Normally, the RS232 signals are used for for communications between two devices
with distances up to a maximum of 15 meters.
Networking Port 1 Pin Descriptions Port 2 Pin Descriptions
DL05 to DL05
CPU Specifications
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
DL05 DL05
PORT 2 PORT 1 or 2
1 0V 0V 1
3 RXD RXD 3
4 TXD TXD 4
433
CPU Specifications and Operation
Networking
PC to DL05s
1234 5 6
RS422
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
F2UNICON DL05
GND
1 or 6 0V 0V 1 or 6 PORT 2
GND
0V 0V 1
TXD+ RXD+ 3 RXD RXD 3
RXD RXD 3
TXD RXD 4 TXD TXD 4
TXD TXD 4 RXD TXD
2 CTS 5V 2
RTS RTS 5 RXD+ TXD+
5 5V RTS 5
FAISONET
CPU Specifications
and Operation
DL05 F2UNICON DL05
PORT 2 1 or 6 0V 0V 1 or 6 PORT 2
GND GND
1 or 6 0V 0V 1 or 6 3 RXD RXD 3
TXD+ RXD+
3 RXD RXD 3
TXD RXD 4 TXD TXD 4
4 TXD TXD 4 RXD TXD
2 CTS 5V 2
2 CTS RXD+ TXD+
5V 2
5 5V RTS 5
5 5V RTS 5
FAISONET
F2UNICON DL240
GND
1 0V 0V 1 PORT 2
RXD+ 3 RXD RXD 3
RXD 4 TXD TXD 4
TXD
2 CTS 5V 2
TXD+
5 5V RTS 5
434
CPU Specifications and Operation
MODBUS Port In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Secondary Comm Port.
Configuration S Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 2.
S Protocol: Click the check box to the left of MODBUS (use AUX 56 on
the HPP, andselect MBUS), and then youll see the dialog box below.
Setup Communication Ports
Station Number: 1
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
S Timeout: amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get
a response before logging an error.
S RTS ON / OFF Delay Time: The RTS ON Delay Time specifies the time
the DL05 waits to send the data after it has raised the RTS signal line.
The RTS OFF Delay Time specifies the time the DL05 waits to release
the RTS signal line after the data has been sent. When using the DL05 on
a multi-drop network, the RTS ON Delay time must be set to at least 5ms
CPU Specifications
and the RTS OFF Delay time must be set to at least 2ms. If you
and Operation
DirectNET Port In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Secondary Comm Port.
Configuration S Port: From the port number list box, choose Port 2 .
S Protocol: Click the check box to the left of DirectNET (use AUX 56 on
the HPP, then select DNET), and then youll see the dialog box below.
Setup Communication Ports
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Format: Hex
S Timeout: amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to
get a response before logging an error.
S RTS ON / OFF Delay Time: The RTS ON Delay Time specifies the time
the DL05 waits to send the data after it has raised the RTS signal line.
The RTS OFF Delay Time specifies the time the DL05 waits to release
the RTS signal line after the data has been sent. When using the DL05
on a multi-drop network, the RTS ON Delay time must be set to at least
CPU Specifications
5ms and the RTS OFF Delay time must be set to at least 2ms. If you
and Operation
encounter problems, the time can be increased.
S Station Number: For making the CPU port a DirectNET master,
choose 1. The allowable range for DIrectNET slaves is from 1 to 90
(each slave must have a unique number). At powerup, the port is
automatically a slave, unless and until the DL05 executes ladder logic
instructions which attempt to use the port as a master. Thereafter, the
port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again.
S Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially,
reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise
problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates
of all devices on the network to the same value.
S Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
S Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
S Format: Choose between hex or ASCII formats.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to
the CPU, and click Close.
436
CPU Specifications and Operation
Determining the There are typically two ways that most host software conventions allow you to
MODBUS Address specify a PLC memory location. These are:
S By specifying the MODBUS data type and address
S By specifying a MODBUS address only.
CPU Specifications
and Operation
437
CPU Specifications and Operation
If Your Host Software Many host software packages allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and the
Requires the Data MODBUS address that corresponds to the PLC memory location. This is the easiest
Type and Address... method, but not all packages allow you to do it this way.
The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data
you are using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose.
CPU Specifications
V Memory, user data (V) 3968 V1200 V7377 640 3839 Holding Register
and Operation
V Memory, non-volatile (V) 128 V7600 V7777 3968 4095 Holding Register
438
CPU Specifications and Operation
The following examples show how to generate the MODBUS address and data type
for hosts which require this format.
Example 1: V2100 Find the MODBUS address for User V PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type
location V2100.
V2100 = 1088 decimal
1. Find V memory in the table. 1088 + Hold. Reg. = Holding Reg. 1088
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).
3. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
V Memory, user data (V) 3200 V1200 V7377 640 3839 Holding Register
Example 2: Y20 Find the MODBUS address for output Y20. PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. + Data Type
1. Find Y outputs in the table. Y20 = 16 decimal
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16). 16 + 2048 + Coil = Coil 2064
3. Add the starting address for the range
(2048).
4. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
Example 3: T10 Current Find the MODBUS address to obtain the PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type
Value current value from Timer T10.
T10 = 8 decimal
1. Find Timer Current Values in the table. 8 + Input Reg. = Input Reg. 8
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
CPU Specifications
Example 4: C54 Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. +Data Type
C54.
C54 = 44 decimal
1. Find Control Relays in the table. 44 + 3072 + Coil = Coil 3116
2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).
3. Add the starting address for the range
(3072).
4. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
If Your MODBUS Some host software does not allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and
Host Software address. Instead, you specify an address only. This method requires another step to
Requires an determine the address, but its still fairly simple. Basically, MODBUS also separates
Address ONLY the data types by address ranges as well. So this means an address alone can
actually describe the type of data and location. This is often referred to as adding the
offset. One important thing to remember here is that two different addressing
modes may be available in your host software package. These are:
S 484 Mode
S 584/984 Mode
We recommend that you use the 584/984 addressing mode if your host
software allows you to choose. This is because the 584/984 mode allows access
to a higher number of memory locations within each data type. If your software only
supports 484 mode, then there may be some PLC memory locations that will be
unavailable. The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type
of PLC data you are using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for
this purpose.
S Discrete X, SP, Y, CR, S, T, C (contacts)
S Word V, Timer current value, Counter current value
In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the
appropriate MODBUS addresses (as required). The table below shows the exact
equation used for each group of data.
DL05 Memory Type QTY PLC Range MODBUS 484 Mode 584/984 MODBUS
(Dec.) (Octal) Address Range Address Mode Data Type
(Decimal) Address
For Discrete Data Types ... Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Start of Range + Appropriate Mode Address
Inputs (X) 256 X0 X377 2048 2303 1001 10001 Input
Special Relays (SP) 512 SP0 SP777 3072 3583 1001 10001 Input
Outputs (Y) 256 Y0 Y377 2048 2303 1 1 Coil
CPU Specifications
Control Relays (CR) 512 C0 C777 3072 3583 1 1 Coil
and Operation
Timer Contacts (T) 128 T0 T177 6144 6271 1 1 Coil
Counter Contacts (CT) 128 CT0 CT177 6400 6527 1 1 Coil
Stage Status Bits (S) 256 S0 S377 5120 5375 1 1 Coil
For Word Data Types .... Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Appropriate Mode Address
Timer Current Values (V) 128 V0 V377 0 127 3001 30001 Input Reg.
Counter Current Values (V) 128 V1000 V1177 512 639 3001 30001 Input Reg
V Memory, user data (V) 3200 V1400 V7377 768 3839 4001 40001 Hold Reg.
V Memory, non-volatile (V) 128 V7400 V7577 3840 3967 4001 40001 Hold Reg.
V Memory, system (V) 256 V7600 V7777 3968 4095 4001 40001 Hold Reg.
440
CPU Specifications and Operation
The following examples show how to generate the MODBUS addresses for hosts
which require this format.
Example 1: V2100 Find the MODBUS address for User V PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address
584/984 Mode location V2100.
V2100 = 1088 decimal
1. Find V memory in the table. 1088 + 40001 = 41089
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).
3. Add the MODBUS starting address for the
mode (40001).
V Memory, system (V) 128 V1200 V7377 3480 3735 4001 40001 Hold Reg.
Example 2: Y20 Find the MODBUS address for output Y20. PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. + Mode
584/984 Mode 1. Find Y outputs in the table. Y20 = 16 decimal
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16). 16 + 2048 + 1 = 2065
3. Add the starting address for the range
(2048).
4. Add the MODBUS address for the mode
(1).
Outputs (Y) 256 Y0 Y377 2048 2303 1 1 Coil
Example 3: T10 Current Find the MODBUS address to obtain the PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address
Value current value from Timer T10.
T10 = 8 decimal
484 Mode 1. Find Timer Current Values in the table. 8 + 3001 = 3009
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Add the MODBUS starting address for the
mode (3001).
Timer Current Values (V) 128 V0 V177 0 127 3001 30001 Input Reg.
CPU Specifications
Example 4: C54 Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Address + Mode
and Operation
Determining the Addressing the memory types for DirectNET slaves is very easy. Use the ordinary
DirectNET Address native address of the slave device itself. To access a slave PLCs memory address
V2000 via DirectNET, for example, the network master will request V2000 from the
slave.
441
CPU Specifications and Operation
Master
When using the DL05 PLC as the master station, simple RLL instructions are used
to initiate the requests. The WX instruction initiates network write operations, and
the RX instruction initiates network read operations. Before executing either the WX
or RX commands, we will need to load data related to the read or write operation
onto the CPUs accumulator stack. When the WX or RX instruction executes, it uses
the information on the stack combined with data in the instruction box to completely
define the task, which goes to the port.
CPU Specifications
and Operation
Network
WX (write)
RX (read)
Slave
Master
The following step-by-step procedure will provide you the information necessary to
set up your ladder program to receive data from a network slave.
442
CPU Specifications and Operation
The number of bytes specified also depends on the type of data you want to obtain.
For example, the DL05 Input points can be accessed by V-memory locations or as X
input locations. However, if you only want X0 X27, youll have to use the X input
data type because the V-memory locations can only be accessed in 2-byte
increments. The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of
DirectLOGIC products.
NOTE: Since V memory words are always 16 bits, you may not always use the whole
word. For example, if you only specify 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the
slave, you will only get 24 bits of data. In this case, only the 8 least significant bits of
the last word location will be modified. The remaining 8 bits are not affected.
CPU Specifications
RX
Y0
and Operation
S DirectNET slaves specify the same address in the WX and RX
instruction as the slaves native I/O address
S MODBUS DL405, DL205, or DL05 slaves specify the same address
in the WX and RX instruction as the slaves native I/O address
S MODBUS 305 slaves use the following table to convert DL305
addresses to MODBUS addresses
DL305 Series CPU Memory TypetoMODBUS Cross Reference (excluding 350 CPU)
PLC Memory type PLC base MODBUS PLC Memory Type PLC base MODBUS
address base addr. address base addr.
TMR/CNT Current Values R600 V0 TMR/CNT Status Bits CT600 GY600
I/O Points IO 000 GY0 Control Relays CR160 GY160
Data Registers R401, V100 Shift Registers SR400 GY400
R400
Stage Status Bits (D3330P only) S0 GY200
444
CPU Specifications and Operation
LDA
O40600
RX
Y0
Port 2, which can be a master, has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see
Appendix D for comm port special relays).One indicates Port busy(SP116), and
the other indicates Port Communication Error(SP117). The example above shows
the use of these contacts for a network master that only reads a device (RX). The
Port Busy bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave. When the bit is off
the program can initiate the next network request.
The Port Communication Error bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error.
Use of this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction
boxes since the error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed.
Multiple Read and If you are using multiple reads and writes Interlocking Relay
Write Interlocks in the RLL program, you have to interlock SP116 C100
the routines to make sure all the routines LD
KF201
are executed. If you dont use the
interlocks, then the CPU will only execute
LD
the first routine. This is because each port K0003
can only handle one transaction at a time.
In the example to the right, after the RX LDA
O40600
instruction is executed, C0 is set. When
CPU Specifications
RX
task, the second routine is executed and Y0
Interlocking
C0 is reset. Relay C100
If youre using RLL PLUS Stage
SET
Programing, you can put each routine in a
separate program stage to ensure proper SP116 C100
LD
execution and switch from stage to stage KF201
allowing only one of them to be active at a
time. LD
K0003
LDA
O40400
WX
Y0
C100
RST
15
Standard RLL
Instructions
In This Chapter. . . .
Boolean Instructions
Comparative Boolean
Immediate Instructions
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
Logical Instructions (Accumulator)
Math Instructions
Bit Operation Instructions (Accumulator)
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)
Table Instructions
CPU Control Instructions
Program Control Instructions
Interrupt Instructions
Message Instructions
52 Standard RLL Instructions
Introduction
DL05 Micro PLCs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types
of operations. This chapter shows you how to use each standard Relay Ladder Logic
(RLL) instruction. In addition to these instructions, you may also need to refer to the
Drum instruction in Chapter 6, or the Stage programming instructions in Chapter 7.
There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need.
S If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc.)
just use the title at the top of the page to find the pages that discuss the
instructions in that category.
S If you know the individual instruction name, use the following table to find
the page(s) that discusses the instruction.
Instruction Page Instruction Page Instruction Page
ACON 5107 ENCO 580 OR 510, 524,
557
ADDB 573 END 594
OR OUT 513
ADD 563 ENI 5103
ORE 521
ADDD 564 FAULT 5106
ORI 526
AND 511, 525, FOR 596
555 ORN 510, 524
GRAY 588
AND STR 512 ORND 516
GTS 598
ANDD 556 ORNE 521
HTA 586
ANDE 522 OR OUTI 528
INC 571
ANDI 527 OR STR 512
INCB 572
ORD 558
ANDN 511, 525 INT 5103
ORNI 526
ANDND 517 INV 584
OROUTI 528
ANDNE 522 IRT 5103
ORPD 516
ANDNI 527 IRTC 5103
OUT 513, 552
ANDPD 517 ISG 722
OUTD 552
ATH 585 JMP 722
OUTF 553
BCD 583 LD 548
OUTI 528
BIN 582 LDA 551 PAUSE 519
CMP 561 LDD 549 PD 514
CMPD 562 LDF 550 POP 553
CNT 536 LDLBL 592 PRINT 5109
CV 723 MLR 5101 RST 518
CVJMP 723 MLS 5101 RSTI 529
DEC 571 MOV 591 RSTWT 595
DECB 572 MOVMC 592 RT 598
RLL Instructions
RLL Instructions
Standard
54 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
X0 Y0
OUT
All programs must have
and END statement
END
Simple Rungs You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean
instruction that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is
represented by the Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to
enter a single contact and a single output coil.
X0 Y0 STR X0
OUT Y0
OUT END
END
Normally Closed Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the
Contact Store Not or, STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a
normally closed contact.
RLL Instructions
X0 Y0 STRN X0
OUT OUT Y0
END
END
Standard RLL Instructions 55
Boolean Instructions
Contacts in Series Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following
example shows two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used
would be STR X0, AND X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
END
END
Midline Outputs Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are
conditional on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the
AND instruction to continue a rung with more conditional outputs.
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
AND X2
X2 Y1 OUT Y1
AND X3
OUT OUT Y2
END
X3 Y2
OUT
END
Parallel Elements You also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this.
The following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The
instructions would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.
END
RLL Instructions
Standard
56 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
Joining Series Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The
Branches in Or Store (ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a
Parallel simple network consisting of series elements joined in parallel.
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT AND X1
STR X2
X2 X3 AND X3
ORSTR
OUT Y0
END END
Joining Parallel You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR)
Branches in Series instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network
with contact branches in series with parallel contacts.
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT STR X1
OR X2
X2 ANDSTR
OUT Y0
END
END
Combination You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any
Networks application problem. The following example shows a simple combination network.
X0 X2 X5 Y0
OUT
X1 X3 X4
X6
END
Comparative Some PLC manufacturers make it really difficult to do a simple comparison of two
Boolean numbers. Some of them require you to move the data all over the place before you
can actually perform the comparison. The DL05 Micro PLCs provide Comparative
RLL Instructions
Boolean instructions that allow you to quickly and easily solve this problem. The
Comparative Boolean provides evaluation of two 4-digit values using boolean
Standard
contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal to or greater than,
and less than.
In the following example when the value V1400 K1234 Y3
in V-memory location V1400 is equal to OUT
the constant value 1234, Y3 will
energize.
Standard RLL Instructions 57
Boolean Instructions
Boolean Stack There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the
DL05 PLCs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements. The
boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung. Each
time the program encounters a STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top of
the stack. Any other STR instructions already on the boolean stack are pushed down
a level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack
when they are encountered. An error will occur during program compilation if the
CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the boolean stack.
The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.
X0 X1 ORSTR AND X4 Y0
STR
STR OUT Output
X2 AND X3
STR ANDSTR
X5 OR
8 8 8
ANDSTR
1 X0 AND (NOT X5 OR X4) AND [X1 OR (X2 AND X3)]
2
3
RLL Instructions
Standard
S
S
8
58 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
Immediate Boolean The DL05 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of
milliseconds. However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few
milliseconds until the next I/O update occurs. The DL05 PLCs offer Immediate input
and outputs which are special boolean instructions that allow reading directly from
inputs and writing directly to outputs during the program execution portion of the
CPU cycle. You may recall that this is normally done during the input or output
update portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions take longer to execute
because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or writes the I/O
point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write outputs
portion of the CPU cycle.
NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status
from the input point, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not
use the new status to update the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions
that follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate instructions that
follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output
instruction will write the status to the I/O and update the image register.
CPU Scan
X11 ... X2 X1 X0
OFF ... ON OFF OFF OFF X0
Input Image Register
OFF X1
ON X0
OFF X1
Standard
Write Outputs
Diagnostics
Standard RLL Instructions 59
Boolean Instructions
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following Store example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 SP B ENT
OUT STRN 1
GX C ENT
OUT 2
RLL Instructions
Standard
510 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
Q C ENT
OR 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
R C ENT
ORN 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 511
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C ENT
AND 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will
energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
W C ENT
ANDN 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
RLL Instructions
Standard
512 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
In the following And Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4
have been anded with the branch consisting of contact X1.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 X2 X3 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X4
V D
ENT
AND 3
Q E
ENT
OR 4
L ENT
ANDST
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been
ored with the branch consisting of X3 and X4.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C
ENT
AND 2
X3 X4
$ D ENT
STR 3
V E ENT
AND 4
M ENT
ORST
GX F ENT
OUT 5
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 513
Boolean Instructions
Multiple Out instructions referencing the same discrete location should not be used
since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the physical output
point. Instead, use the next instruction, the Or Out.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
Y5
GX F ENT
OUT OUT 5
A aaa
Inputs X 0177
Outputs Y 0177
X1
Standard
Y2
$ B ENT
OR OUT STR 1
O D F ENT ENT C ENT
INST# 3 5 2
$ E ENT
STR 4
X4 Y2 O D F C
ENT ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 2
OR OUT
514 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not
instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
SHFT N O T ENT
TMR INST# MLR
GX C ENT
OUT 2
NOTE: DirectSOFT Release 1.1i and later supports the use of the NOT instruction.
The above example rung is merely intended to show the visual representation of the
NOT instruction. The rung cannot be created or displayed in DirectSOFT versions
earlier than 1.1i.
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
X1 C0 $ B ENT
STR 1
PD
SHFT P SHFT D A ENT
CV 3 0
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 515
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
X1 $ SHFT P D B ENT
Y4 STR CV 3 1
OUT GX E ENT
OUT 4
X1 $ SHFT N D B ENT
Y4
Standard
STR TMR 3 1
OUT GX E
ENT
OUT 4
516 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan
when X2 transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan
when X2 transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
RLL Instructions
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 517
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and
X2 transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 X2 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
GX F
ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and
X2 transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X2 $ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
RLL Instructions
GX F
ENT
OUT 5
Standard
518 Standard RLL Instructions
Boolean Instructions
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
X1 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
SET
X C F ENT
SET 2 5
X1 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
RST
S C F ENT
RST 2 5
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 519
Boolean Instructions
aaa
Outputs Y 0377
In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y3Y5 will be turned OFF. The execution of
the ladder program will not be affected.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y5 Y7
PAUSE
Since the D2HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a specific Pause key, you
can use the corresponding instruction number for entry (#960), or type each letter of
the command.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
STR 1
O J G A ENT ENT D F ENT
INST# 9 6 0 3 5
In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to
operate normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to over-ride the Pause instruction.
RLL Instructions
Standard
520 Standard RLL Instructions
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Comparative Boolean
B aaa bbb
Constant K 09999
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 4933 , Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 5060, Y3
will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Y3 SP SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K5060
STRN 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A G A ENT
5 0 6 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 521
Comparative Boolean Instructions
B aaa bbb
Constant K 09999
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 4500 or
V2002 = 2345 , Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K4500 Y3
STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
E F A A ENT
4 5 0 0
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 3916 or
V2002 050, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K3916 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT D J B G ENT
3 9 1 6
Constant K 09999
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 5000 and
V2002 = 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 2550 and
V2002 050, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
OUT 3
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 523
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Constant K 09999
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 1000, Y3
will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
RLL Instructions
Standard
524 Standard RLL Instructions
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Constant K 09999
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 6045 or
V2002 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K6045 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT G A E F ENT
6 0 4 5
In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 = 1000 or
V2002 < 050, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K1000 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT B A A A ENT
1 0 0 0
R SHFT V C A A C
V2002 K2500 ORN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 525
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Constant K 09999
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 5000, and
V2002 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 7000 and
V2002 < 050, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K7000 V2002 K2500 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT H A A A ENT
7 0 0 0
W SHFT V C A A C
ANDN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX SHFT Y D ENT
OUT AND 3
RLL Instructions
Standard
526 Standard RLL Instructions
Immediate Instructions
Immediate Instructions
aaa
Inputs X 0377
X1 Y2 $ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
updated.
Standard
Inputs X 0377
aaa
Inputs X 0377
GX F ENT
OUT 5
Standard
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
W SHFT I C ENT
ANDN 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
528 Standard RLL Instructions
Immediate Instructions
aaa
Outputs Y 0377
In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will
turn on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the
instruction number (#350) as shown, or type each letter of the command.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUTI
O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2
$ B ENT
X1 Y2
STR 1
OR OUTI O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
X4 Y2 2
OR OUTI $ E ENT
RLL Instructions
STR 4
O D F A ENT ENT
Standard
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2
Standard RLL Instructions 529
Immediate Instructions
aaa
Outputs Y 0377
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be set on in the image
register and on the corresponding output points.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y2 Y5 STR 1
SETI X I C F
SHFT ENT
SET 8 2 5
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the
image register and on the corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y2 Y5 STR 1
RSTI S I C F
SHFT ENT
RST 8 2 5
RLL Instructions
Standard
530 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Timer preset
T1
T1 Y0
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value 1/10 Seconds
There are those applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the
ability to time, stop, and then resume from where it previously stopped. The
accumulating timer works similarly to the regular timer, but two inputs are required.
The start/stop input starts and stops the timer. When the timer stops, the elapsed
time is maintained. When the timer starts again, the timing continues from the
elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed time is cleared and the
timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth
of a second timer available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and 999999.99
seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the
timer input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset.
Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X1
TMRA T0
K30
X1 Start/Stop
X2
X2
Reset Input
T0
Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value 1/10 Seconds
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 531
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Timers T 0177
12007377
Pointers (preset only) P
74007577
Constants
K 09999
(preset only)
NOTE: * With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are
accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references,
RLL Instructions
such as T2 for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and TA2 for the current value of
Standard
Timer T2.
You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the
discrete status bit. Or, use comparative contacts to perform functions at different
time intervals, based on one timer. The examples on the following page show these
two methods of programming timers.
532 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Timer Example In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The
Using Discrete timer discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The
Status Bits timer is reset when X1 turns off, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the
timer current value to 0.
DirectSOFT Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
TMR T2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K30
X1
T2 Y0
OUT
T2
Y0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
$ B ENT Value
STR 1 1/10 Seconds
N C D A ENT
TMR 2 3 0
$ SHFT T C ENT
STR MLR 2
GX A ENT
OUT 0
Timer Example In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds.
Using Comparative Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals
Contacts respectively. When X1 is turned off the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative
contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and Y5.
DirectSOFT Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
TMR T20
K45 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Y3 X1
TA20 K10
OUT
Y3
TA20 K20 Y4 Y4
OUT
Y5
TA20 K30 Y5
T2
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value
1/10 Seconds
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
STR 1
N C A E F ENT
TMR 2 0 4 5
$ SHFT T C A B A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 1 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
RLL Instructions
$ SHFT T C A C A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 2 0
Standard
GX E ENT
OUT 4
$ SHFT T C A D A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 3 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5
Standard RLL Instructions 533
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
NOTE: The accumulating type timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations
for the 8-digit value, and therefore two consecutive timer locations. For example, if
TMR 1 is used, the next available timer number is TMR 3.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
Timers T 0176
12007377
Pointers (preset only) P
74007577
Constants
K 099999999
(preset only)
NOTE: * With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are
Standard
accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references,
such as T2 for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and TA2 for the current value of
Timer T2.
The following examples show two methods of programming timers. One performs
functions when the timer reaches the preset value using the discrete status bit, or
use comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals.
534 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Accumulating In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset
Timer Example of 3 seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed
using Discrete for 3 seconds. Notice in this example that the timer times for 1 second , stops for one
Status Bits second, then resumes timing. The timer will reset when C10 turns on, turning the
discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0.
DirectSOFT Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TMRA T6
X1
K30
C10
C10
Y7 T6
T6
OUT Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value
1/10 Seconds
$ B ENT D A ENT
STR 1 3 0
$ SHFT C B A ENT $ SHFT T G ENT
STR 2 1 0 STR MLR 6
N SHFT A G GX B A ENT
TMR 0 6 OUT 1 0
Accumulator Timer In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds.
Example Using Comparative contacts are used to energized Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals
Comparative respectively. The comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.
Contacts
DirectSOFT Timing Diagram
X1
Seconds
TMRA T20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K45 X1
C10
C10
TA20 K10 Y3 Y3
OUT
Y4
TA20 K20 Y4
Y5
OUT
T20
TA20 K30 Y5
Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
OUT Value
1/10 Seconds
$ B GX E ENT
ENT OUT 4
STR 1
$ C B A $ SHFT T C A
RLL Instructions
SHFT ENT 3 0
TMR 0 2 0 4 5
$ T C A B A GX F ENT
SHFT ENT OUT 5
STR MLR 2 0 1 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
$ SHFT T C A C A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 2 0
Standard RLL Instructions 535
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Using Counters Counters are used to count events . The counters available are up counters,
up/down counters, and stage counters (used with RLL PLUS programming).
The up counter has two inputs, a count input and a reset input. The maximum count
value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter
input, counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset.
X1
CNT CT1
X1
Up K3
X2
X2
Reset
CT1
Current 1 2 3 4 0 Counter preset
Value Counts
The up down counter has three inputs, a count up input, count down input and reset
input. The maximum count value is 99999999. The timing diagram below shows the
relationship between the counter input, counter reset, associated discrete bit,
current value, and counter preset.
X1
X1 UDC CT2
Up K3
X2 X2
X3
Down
X3
CT2
Reset
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
Value Counts
Counter preset
The stage counter has a count input and is reset by the RST instruction. This
instruction is useful when programming using the RLL PLUS structured programming.
The maximum count value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship
between the counter input, associated discrete bit, current value, counter preset and
reset instruction.
X1 X1
SGCNT CT2
Up K3
CT2
Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value Counts Counter preset
RST
RLL Instructions
CT2
Standard
536 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Counters CT 0177
V memory 12007377
V
(preset only) 74007577
12007377
Pointers (preset only) P
74007577
Constants
K 09999
(preset only)
Counter discrete
CT/V 0177 or V4114041147
status bits
Counter current
V/CT* 0177
values
RLL Instructions
NOTE: * With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are
Standard
accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references,
such as CT2 for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and CTA2 for the current
value of Counter CT2.
Standard RLL Instructions 537
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Counter Example In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
Using Discrete increment by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter
Status Bits status bit CT2 will turn on and energize Y7. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter
status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter
CT2 will be held in V memory location V1002.
DirectSOFT Counting diagram
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10
CT2 Y7 Y10
OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
Counter Example In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
Using Comparative increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at
Contacts different counts. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and
the counter current value will be 0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT Counting diagram
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10
CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2 K2 Y4
Y5
OUT
Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
CTA2 K3 Y5
OUT
GY C D ENT GX E ENT
CNT 2 3 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5
538 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies
the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K)
or a V memory location.
Current Values: Counter current values
are accessed by referencing the
associated V or CT memory locations*.
The V-memory location is the counter
location + 1000. For example, the counter
current value for CT3 resides in V memory
location V1003.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status
bit is accessed by referencing the
associated CT memory location. It will be
on if the value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example the discrete
status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Counters CT 0177
V memory 12007377
V
(preset only) 74007577
12007377
Pointers (preset only) P
74007577
Constants
K 09999
(preset only)
Counter discrete
CT/V 0177 or V4114041147
status bits
Counter current
V/CT* 10001177
values
RLL Instructions
Standard
NOTE: * With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are
accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references,
such as CT2 for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and CTA2 for the current
value of Counter CT2.
Standard RLL Instructions 539
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Stage Counter In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, stage counter CT7
Example Using will increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7
Discrete Status will turn on and energize Y7. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the
Bits counter is reset using the RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter
status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0. The current value for
counter CT7 will be held in V memory location V1007.
DirectSOFT Counting diagram
X1
SGCNT CT7
X1
K3
CT7 Y7 Y10
OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
C5 CT7 RST
RST CT7
$ B ENT GX B A ENT
STR 1 OUT 1 0
Stage Counter In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
Example Using increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at
Comparative different counts. Although this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset
Contacts using the Reset instruction, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value
will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V memory location V1002.
DirectSOFT Counting diagram
X1
SGCNT CT2
K10
X1
CT2 K1 Y3
Y3
OUT
Y4
CT2 K2 Y4
OUT
Y5
Y5 Current 1 2 3 4 0
CT2 K3 Value
OUT
C B A ENT GX E ENT
2 1 0 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5
540 Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Instruction Specification
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies Caution: The UDC uses two
the counter number. V memory locations for the 8 digit
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) current value. This means that the
or two consecutive V memory locations. UDC uses two consecutive
Current Values: Current count is a double counter locations. If UDC CT1 is
word value accessed by referencing the used in the program, the next
associated V or CT memory locations*. available counter is CT3.
The V-memory location is the counter The counter discrete status bit and the
location + 1000. For example, the counter current value are not specified in the
current value for CT5 resides in V memory counter instruction.
location V1005 and V1006.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status
bit is accessed by referencing the
associated CT memory location.
Operating as a counter done bit it will be
on if the value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example the discrete
status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Counters CT 0176
V memory 12007377
V
(preset only) 74007577
12007377
Pointers (preset only) P
74007577
Constants
K 099999999
(preset only)
Counter discrete
CT/V 0176 or V4114041147
status bits
Counter current
V/CT* 0176
values
NOTE: * With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are
RLL Instructions
accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references,
such as CT2 for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and CTA2 for the current
Standard
Up / Down Counter In the following example if X2 and X3 are off ,when X1 toggles from off to on the
Example Using counter will increment by one. If X1 and X3 are off the counter will decrement by one
Discrete Status when X2 toggles from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3,
Bits the counter status bit will turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit
will turn off and the current value will be 0.
DirectSOFT Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
K3 X1
X2
X2
X3
X3
CT2
CT2 Y7
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
OUT Value
$ B ENT D ENT
STR 1 3
$ C ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C ENT
STR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
$ D ENT GX B A ENT
STR 3 OUT 1 0
SHFT U D C C
ISG 3 2 2
Up / Down Counter In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
Example Using increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different
Comparative counts. When the reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current
Contacts value will be 0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
V2000 X1
X2
X2
X3
X3
CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2 K2 Y4 1 2 3 4 0
Current
Value
OUT
$ B ENT B ENT
STR 1 1
RLL Instructions
$ C ENT GX D ENT
STR 2 OUT 3
Standard
SHFT U D C C C ENT
ISG 3 2 2 2
With each off to on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift
register block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed
into the starting bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on
the entry in the From and To fields. From C0 to C17 would define a block of sixteen
bits to be shifted from left to right. From C17 to C0 would define a block of sixteen
bits, to be shifted from right to left. The maximum size of the shift register block
depends on the number of available control relays. The minimum block size is 8
control relays.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
X1 $ B ENT
Data Input SR STR 1
$ C ENT
STR 2
From C0
X2 $ D
Clock Input ENT
STR 3
0 0-1-0 0
Standard
1 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
0 0 1
- indicates on - indicates off
Standard RLL Instructions 543
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000
Unused accumulator bits
Copy data from V2000 to the
are set to zero
lower 16 bits of the accumu-
lator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 8 9 3 5
OUT
V2010 8 9 3 5
Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V memory locations are 16 bits the Load Double
and Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or 8
digit BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory
address or from a V-memory address to the accumulator. For example if you wanted
to copy data from V2000 and V2001 to V2010 and V2011 the most efficient way to
perform this function would be as follows:
X1
LDD V2001 V2000
V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Acc. 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
OUTD
V2010 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Copy data from the accumulator to
V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010
RLL Instructions
Standard
544 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
Changing the Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the
Accumulator Data manipulated data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated
is cleared from the accumulator. The following example loads the constant value
4935 into the accumulator, shifts the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to
V2010.
X1 LD Constant 4 9 3 5
K4935
SHFR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K4 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
OUT
V2010
0 4 9 3
Output the lower 16 bits of the ac-
cumulator to V2010 V2010
Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive V
memory locations or an 8 digit BCD constant to manipulate data in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is added with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double
instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the
Out Double instruction.
V2001 V2000
X1
LDD 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
V2000
OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
RLL Instructions
Using the The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter
Accumulator Stack to execute a function or for user defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used
when more than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out
instruction. The first load instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator.
Every Load instruction thereafter without the use of an Out instruction places a value
into the accumulator and the value that was in the accumulator is placed onto the
accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies the previous load instruction and
does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack
when the next load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed onto the
accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The
accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32 bit registers). If there is a value in the
eighth location when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth
location is pushed off the stack and cannot be recovered.
X1 LD Constant 3 2 4 5
K3245
Current Acc. value
Accumulator Stack
Load the value 3245 into the accumu- Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
lator Level 1 X X X X X X X X
Previous Acc. value
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Acc. X X X X X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Constant 5 1 5 1 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD
K5151 Level 8 X X X X X X X X
Current Acc. value
6 3 6 3 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD Constant
Level 8 X X X X X X X X
K6363 Current Acc. value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 6 3 6 3
Load the value 6363 into the accumu- Bucket
lator, pushing the value 5151 to the 1st Previous Acc. value Accumulator Stack
stack location and the value 3245 to
the 2nd stack location Acc. 0 0 0 0 5 1 5 1 Level 1 0 0 0 0 5 1 5 1
Level 2 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Level 8 X X X X X X X X
RLL Instructions
Bucket
Standard
The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator.
When a POP is executed the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and the
value that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are
shifted up one position in the stack.
546 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
Acc. X X X X X X X X
Acc. 0 0 0 0 4 5 4 5
Using Pointers Many of the DL05 series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as a operand
(commonly known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data
from V-memory locations referenced by the pointer value.
In the following simple example we are using a pointer operand in a Load instruction.
V-memory location 2000 is being used as the pointer location. V2000 contains the
value 440 which the CPU views as the Hex equivalent of the Octal address
V-memory location V2100. The CPU will copy the data from V2100 which in this
example contains the value 2635 into the lower word of the accumulator.
Standard RLL Instructions 547
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
X1 V2076 X X X X
LD
V2077 X X X X
P2000
V2100 2 6 3 5
V1400 (P1400) contains the value 440 V2101 X X X X
HEX. 440 HEX. = 2100 Octal which
contains the value 2635. V2102 X X X X
V2000 V2103 X X X X
Accumulator
0 4 4 0 V2104 X X X X
2 6 3 5
V2105 X X X X
OUT
V2200 S
S
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2200. V2200 2 6 3 5
V2201 X X X X
The following example is identical to the one above with one exception. The LDA
(Load Address) instruction automatically converts the Octal address to Hex.
X1 LDA Load the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator with Hexadecimal
O 2100 equivalent to Octal 2100 (440) 2 1 0 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 0
S
S
V2076 X X X X
V2077 X X X X
S
S
OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2200 V2200 2 6 3 5
V 2200
V2201 X X X X
RLL Instructions
Standard
548 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFF
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator and output to V2010.
DirectSOFT
V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000
OUT
V2010
$ B X
STR 1 SET
SHFT L D
ANDST 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
RLL Instructions
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 549
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFFFFFF
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be
loaded into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011.
DirectSOFT
X1 LDD V2001 V2000
V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
OUTD
V2010 V2011 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D
ANDST 3 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
RLL Instructions
GX SHFT D
OUT 3
Standard
C A B A ENT
2 0 1 0
550 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
A aaa bbb
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Constant K 132
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10C16 (7 bits) will
be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7
bits of the accumulator are output to Y0Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
C0 Location Constant
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
OUTF Y0
K7
Location Constant Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Copy the value from the
specified number of bits in Y0 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
the accumulator to Y0 Y6
RLL Instructions
$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5
SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7
Standard RLL Instructions 551
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
aaa
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to
a HEX 4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction.
The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 LDA Octal Hexadecimal
O 40400 4 0 4 0 0 4 1 0 0
4 1 0 0
OUT
V2000 V2000
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D A
ANDST 3 0
E A E A A ENT
4 0 4 0 0
RLL Instructions
GX SHFT V C A A A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 0
Standard
552 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
A aaa
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator are copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 LD V2000 $ B ENT
8 9 3 5 STR 1
V2000
SHFT L D
Load the value in V2000 into ANDST 3
the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator
accumulator bits are set to zero C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 8 9 3 5
OUT GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
V2010
A aaa
In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
RLL Instructions
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
X1 $ B ENT
LDD STR 1
Standard
V2000
SHFT L D D
Load the value in V2000 and ANDST 3 3
V2001 into the accumulator Acc. 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
OUTD
GX SHFT D
V2010 OUT 3
Copy the value in the 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 C A B A ENT
accumulator to V2010 and 2 0 1 0
V2011 V2011 V2010
Standard RLL Instructions 553
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
A aaa bbb
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Constant K 132
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10C16 (7 bits) will
be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7
bits of the accumulator are output to Y0Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
C0 Location Constant
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5
SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7
SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
554 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
Pop Instruction In the example below, when C0 is on, the value 4545 that was on top of the stack is
Continued moved into the accumulator using the Pop instruction The value is output to V2000
using the Out instruction. The next Pop moves the value 3792 into the accumulator
and outputs the value to V2001. The last Pop moves the value 7930 into the
accumulator and outputs the value to V2002. Please note if the value in the stack
were greater than 16 bits (4 digits) the Out Double instruction would be used and 2 V
memory locations for each Out Double must be allocated.
DirectSOFT
Previous Acc. value
C0 POP
Acc. X X X X X X X X
OUT Level 4 X X X X X X X X
V2000 Level 5 X X X X X X X X
V2000 4 5 4 5 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2000 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Level 8 X X X X X X X X
POP
Previous Acc. value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 4 5 4 5
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack
up one location
Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2 Level 1 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
OUT Level 3 X X X X X X X X
V2001
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the Previous Acc. value
accumulator and move stack values
up one location Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A B ENT
Standard
OUT AND 2 0 0 1
A aaa
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded
with the value in V2006 using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator is output to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
AND
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
2 8 3 8
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT V C A A G ENT
AND AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
556 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator Logic Instructions
aaa
Constant K 0FFFFFFFF
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is anded with 36476A38 using the And double instruction. The value in
the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000
ANDD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUTD
V2010 1 4 4 6 2 8 3 8
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
AND 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
Standard RLL Instructions 557
Accumulator Logic Instructions
A aaa
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is ored with
V2006 using the Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are
output to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
6 A 7 A
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to V2010
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
STR 1
RLL Instructions
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
Standard
Q SHFT V C A A G ENT
OR AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
558 Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator Logic Instructions
aaa
Constant K 0FFFFFFFF
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is ored with 36476A38 using the Or Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
ORD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUTD
V2010
7 6 7 F 6 A 7 A
Copy the value in the
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
Q SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
OR 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
Standard RLL Instructions 559
Accumulator Logic Instructions
A aaa
SP70 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive
ored with V2006 using the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator are output to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
XOR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
4 2 4 2
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010 V2010
$ SHFT X B ENT
STR SET 1
Standard
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFFFFFF
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is exclusively ored with 36476A38 using the Exclusive Or Double
instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000
OUTD Acc. 0 0
1 0
1 0 0 1
0 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
A aaa
SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction
value.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the
accumulator is compared with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction.
The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value
specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1 LD Constant
K4526 4 5 2 6
Compared
with
CMP
V2000
8 9 4 5
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value V2000
in V2000
SP60 C30
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFFFFFF
SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction
value.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is compared with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD
instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than
the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
4 5 2 6 7 2 9 9
V2000
Acc. 4 5 2 6 7 2 9 9
Compared
CMPD with
V2010
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value
V2011 V2010
in V2010 and V2011
SP60 C30
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator are added to the value in V2006 using the Add instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT V2000
X1 4 9 3 5
LD
V2000
OUT
V2010 7 4 3 5
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT A D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
564 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 099999999
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is added with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double
instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the
Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
X1
LDD 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
V2000
OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT A D D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT 3 AND 2 0 1 0
Standard RLL Instructions 565
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is subtracted from the
value in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT V2000
2 4 7 5
X1 LD
V2000
OUT 0 8 8 3
V2010
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
A aaa
Constant K 099999999
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V2006 and
V2007 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4
X1 LDD
V2000
OUTD 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9
V2010
V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
RLL Instructions
V2011
Standard
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
A aaa
Constant K 09999
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value
in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011
using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2000
X1 1 0 0 0
LD
V2000
The unused accumulator
Load the value in V2000 into bits are set to zero
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
2 5 (V2006)
MUL
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
OUTD
V2010 V2010
V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT M U L C A A G ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
568 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NONBCD number was encountered.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded
into the accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is 12345678. That
numberis stored in V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the
accumulator, we multiply it times 12345678, which is 24691356.
DirectSOFT Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Accumulator)
X1 LDD Load the hex equivalent
of 12345678 decimal into
Kbc614e the accumulator.
2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6
MULD Multiply the accumulator
contents (2) by the
V1400 V1403 V1500
8-digit number in V1400
and V1401.
SHFT M U L D B E A A
ORST ISG ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
GX SHFT D B E A C ENT
OUT 3 1 4 0 2
Standard RLL Instructions 569
Math Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 19999
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work
with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided
by the value in V2006 using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT V2000
5 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000
OUT 1 0 0
V2010
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT D I V C A A G ENT
3 8 AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
570 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NONBCD number was encountered.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is divided by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double
instruction. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator an the remainder
resides in the first stack location. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500
and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT Display V1401 V1400
X1 LDD 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0
V1400
OUTD
V1500 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Standard
$ B ENT SHFT L D D
STR 1 ANDST 3 3
B E A A ENT SHFT D I V
1 4 0 0 3 8 AND
B E C A ENT GX SHFT D
1 4 2 0 OUT 3
B F A A ENT
1 5 0 0
Standard RLL Instructions 571
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP75 on when a BCD instruction is executed and a NONBCD number was encountered.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
C5 8 9 3 5
INC
V1400
SHFT I N C B E A A
8 TMR 2 1 4 0 0
C5 8 9 3 5
DEC
Standard
V1400
SHFT D E C B E A A
3 4 2 1 4 0 0
572 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
In the following example when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1.
DirectSOFT V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
C5 4 A 3 C
INCB $ SHFT C F ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT I N C B C A A A ENT
Increment the binary value 8 TMR 2 1 2 0 0 0
in the accumulator by1 V2000
4 A 3 D
A aaa
SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
DirectSOFT V2000
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Standard
4 A 3 C
C5 DECB $ C F
SHFT ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT D E C B C A A A ENT
Decrement the binary value 3 4 2 1 2 0 0 0
in the accumulator by1 V2000
4 A 3 B
Standard RLL Instructions 573
Math Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFF
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be
added to the binary value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Display V1400
0 A 0 5
X1 LD
V1400
OUTD 1 C C 9
V1500
V1500
RLL Instructions
$ B ENT SHFT L D
STR 1 ANDST 3
B E A A ENT SHFT A D D B
1 4 0 0 0 3 3 1
B E C A ENT GX SHFT D B F A A ENT
1 4 2 0 OUT 3 1 5 0 0
574 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFF
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted
from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
OUT 0 6 1 9
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V1500
RLL Instructions
Standard
SHFT L D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
A aaa
Constant K 1FFFF
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by
the binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Display V1400
X1 0 A 0 1
LD
V1400
OUTD 0 0 0 1 C C 2 E
V1500
V1501 V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501
SHFT L D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
Standard
SHFT M U L B B E C A ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 1 1 4 2 0
GX D B F A A
SHFT ENT
OUT 3 1 5 0 0
576 Standard RLL Instructions
Math Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 0FFFF
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is
divided by the binary value in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
OUT 0 3 2 0
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V1500
RLL Instructions
Standard
SHFT L D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT D I U B B E C A ENT
3 8 ISG 1 1 4 2 0
GX D B F A A
SHFT ENT
OUT 3 1 5 0 0
Standard RLL Instructions 577
Bit Operation Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X10X17 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
number of bits in the accumulator set to 1 is counted using the Sum instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
DirectSOFT Display
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
LDF X10
K8 The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value represented by
discrete locations X10X17
into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5
SUM
OUT 0 0 0 5
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500
SHFT L D F B A I ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 8
A aaa
Constant K 132
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 6 7 0 5 3 1 0 1
V2000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SHFL Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2
OUTD
V2010
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Copy the value in the Acc. 0
1 0 0 0
1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
9 C 1 4 C 4 0 4
V2011 V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
A aaa
Constant K 132
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
X1 LDD Constant 6 7 0 5 3 1 0 1
V2000
OUTD
V2010 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 9 C 1 4 C 4 0
V2011 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
RLL Instructions
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
Standard
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work
with.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V2000 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a 1 in the
accumulator is encoded to the corresponding 5 bit binary value using the Encode
instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010
using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT V2000
1 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000
Bit postion 12 is
converted
to binary
ENCO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Encode the bit position set
to 1 in the accumulator to a Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 bit binary value
OUT
V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT E N C O ENT
4 TMR 2 INST#
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
Standard RLL Instructions 581
Bit Operation Instructions
In the following example when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X10X14 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
five bit binary pattern in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit
position to a 1 using the Decode instruction.
DirectSOFT
X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 LDF X10 OFF ON OFF ON ON
K5
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Decode the five bit binary Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
pattern in the accumulator
and set the corresponding
bit position to a 1
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D F B A F ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 5
SHFT D E C O ENT
3 4 2 INST#
RLL Instructions
Standard
582 Standard RLL Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value in the
accumulator is converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction.
The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out
Double instruction. (The handheld programmer will display the binary value in
V2010 and V2011 as a HEX value.)
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP75 on when a BCD instruction is executed and a NONBCD number was encountered.
X1 0 0 0 2 8 5 2 9
LDD
V2000
BCD Value
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Convert the BCD value in Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
the accumulator to the
binary equivalent value 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1
1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6
4 7 6 8 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 4 2 2 6 8
7 3 8 4 2 0 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4
4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4
4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2
8 1 9 4 7 6 3 1 8 4 2 6
3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6
OUTD 6 2 2 6 8
4 4
V2010 8
Copy the binary value in the
accumulator to V2010 and V2011
RLL Instructions
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT B I N ENT
1 8 TMR
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
Standard RLL Instructions 583
Number Conversion Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary (HEX) value in V2000 and V2001
is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in
the accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD instruction.
The BCD value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out
Double instruction.
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
X1 0 0 0 0 6 F 7 1
LDD
V2000 Binary Value
BCD
16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529
OUTD
V2010
$ B
RLL Instructions
ENT
STR 1
Standard
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT B C D ENT
1 2 3
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
584 Standard RLL Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is inverted using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V2001 V2000
X1 0 4 0 5 0 2 5 0
LDD
V2000
INV
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Invert the binary bit pattern
in the accumulator
OUTD F B F A F D A F
V2010 V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT I N V ENT
8 TMR AND
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 585
Number Conversion Instructions
Step 2: Load the starting V memory location for the ASCII table into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Specify the starting V memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the
ATH instruction.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
aaa
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON the constant (K4) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the
accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location
for the ASCII table (V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address
instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII
to HEX instruction. The table below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.
31 1 39 9
Standard
32 2 41 A
33 3 42 B
34 4 43 C
35 5 44 D
36 6 45 E
37 7 46 F
586 Standard RLL Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
O 1400
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
1234 V1600
V1401 31 32
ATH V1600 is the starting
location for the HEX table
V1600
V1402 37 38
5678 V1601
SHFT L D A B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT A T H B G A A ENT
0 MLR 7 1 6 0 0
Step 2: Load the starting V memory location for the HEX table into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Specify the starting V memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the
HTA instruction.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
RLL Instructions
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 587
Number Conversion Instructions
aaa
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
In the following example, when X1 is ON the constant (K2) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table
(V1500) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The
starting location for the ASCII table (V1400) is specified in the HEX to ASCII
instruction.
DirectSOFT Display
Hexadecimal
X1 LD Equivalents ASCII TABLE
K2
HTA 37 38 V1402
V1400
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D A B F A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 5 0 0
SHFT H T A B E A A ENT
7 MLR 0 1 4 0 0
The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion
Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value
0 30 8 38
RLL Instructions
1 31 9 39
Standard
2 32 A 41
3 33 B 42
4 34 C 43
5 35 D 44
6 36 E 45
7 37 F 46
588 Standard RLL Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
DirectSOFT
X27 X26 X25 X12 X11 X10
S S S S
X1 LDF K16 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
X10
L D F B A B G 0000000110 0004
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 1 6
Standard
0000000111 0005
SHFT G R A Y ENT
6 ORN 0 MLS 0000000101 0006
GX V C A B A 0000000100 0007
SHFT ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0 S S
S S
S S
1000000001 1022
1000000000 1023
Standard RLL Instructions 589
Number Conversion Instructions
Step 2: Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator.
Note: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9F, the
corresponding position will be set to 0.
See example on the next page.
Note:If the number used to specify the order contains duplicate numbers, the
most significant duplicate number is valid. The result resides in the accumulator.
See example on the next page.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
The digits are shuffled and the result Specified order (accumulator)
B C E F 0 D A 9
Result (accumulator)
RLL Instructions
Standard
590 Standard RLL Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
In the following example when X1 is on, The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator.
Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9 F is not used when
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Also, there are no duplicate
numbers in the specified order.
Example B shows how the shuffle digits works when a 0 or 9F is used when
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits
instruction is executed, the bit positions in the first stack location that had a
corresponding 0 or 9F in the accumulator (order specified) are set to 0.
Example C shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits
instruction is executed, the most significant duplicate number in the order specified
is used in the result.
DirectSOFT
A B C
X1 LDD V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000
V2000 9 A B C D E F 0 0 F E D C B A 9 9 A B C D E F 0
New bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SFLDGT Positions
B C E F 0 D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 9 A B C Acc.
OUTD
B C E F 0 D A 9 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 0 0 0 0 9 A B C
V2010
V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
L D D C A A A
RLL Instructions
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
L D D C A A G
Standard
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 6
Table Instructions
Move The Move instruction moves the values
(MOV) from a V memory table to another
V memory table the same length. The MOV
function parameters are loaded into the V aaa
first level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps
necessary to program the Move function.
S Step 1: Load the number of V memory locations to be moved into the
first level of the accumulator stack. This parameter is a HEX value (K40
max, 100 octal).
S Step 2: Load the starting V memory location for the locations to be
moved into the accumulator. This parameter is a HEX value.
S Step 3: Insert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V
memory location (Vaaa) for the destination table.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 2000 (V2000), the starting location for the source table
is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table location (V2030) is specified in
the Move instruction.
DirectSOFT S
S
X1 Load the constant value 6
LD (HEX) into the lower 16 bits S X X X X V2026
K6 of the accumulator S
X X X X V2027
Convert octal 2000 to HEX 0 1 2 3 V2000 0 1 2 3 V2030
LDA 400 and load the value into
O 2000 the accumulator 0 5 0 0 V2001 0 5 0 0 V2031
9 9 9 9 V2002 9 9 9 9 V2032
Copy the specified table
MOV locations to a table 3 0 7 4 V2003 3 0 7 4 V2033
V2030 beginning at location V2030
Rll Instructions
8 9 8 9 V2004 8 9 8 9 V2034
Standard
1 0 1 0 V2005 1 0 1 0 V2035
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X X X X V2006 X X X X V2036
$ B ENT
STR 1 X X X X V2007 X X X X V2037
L D K G S S
SHFT SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 6 S S
SHFT L D A C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 0 0 0
SHFT M O V C A D A ENT
ORST INST# AND 2 0 3 0
592 Standard RLL Instructions
Table Instructions
Move Memory The Move Memory Cartridge and the Load Label
Cartridge / instructions are used to copy data from program
Load Label ladder memory to V memory. The Load Label MOVMC
instruction is used with the MOVMC instruction V aaa
(MOVMC), (LDLBL) when copying data from program ladder memory to
V memory.
To copy data from the program ladder memory to V
memory, the function parameters are loaded into the
first two levels of the accumulator stack and the LDLBL
accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed K aaa
below are the steps necessary to program the Move
Memory Cartridge and Load Label functions.
S Step 1: Load the number of words to be copied into the second level
of the accumulator stack.
S Step 2: Load the offset for the data label area in ladder memory and
the beginning of the V memory block into the first level of the stack.
S Step 3: Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the
accumulator when copying data from ladder memory to V memory. This
is the source location of the value.
S Step 4: Insert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination in
V-memory (Vaaa). This is the copy destination.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
A aaa
Copy Data From a In the example to the right, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V memory.
Data Label Area to When X1 is on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the
V Memory Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the
second stack location after the next Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions
are executed. The constant value (K0) is loaded into the accumulator, specifying
the offset for the source and destination data. It is placed in the first stack location
after the LDLBL instruction is executed. The source address where data is being
copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LDLBL instruction. The
MOVMC instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the
copying of data from the Data Label Area to V memory.
Data Label Area DirectSOFT
Programmed X1
After the END LD
Instruction K4
S
S
DLBL K1 Load the value 4 into the
accumulator specifying the
N C O N 1 2 3 4 V2000 number of locations to be
copied.
K 1 2 3 4
N C O N 4 5 3 2 V2001 LD
K 4 5 3 2 K0
SHFT L D L B L B ENT
ANDST 3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
SHFT M O V M C C A A A ENT
ORST INST# AND ORST 2 2 0 0 0
Rll Instructions
Standard
594 Standard RLL Instructions
CPU Control Instructions
SHFT N O P ENT
NOP TMR INST# CV
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
END
In the following example, when C0 turns on, the CPU will stop operation and switch
to the program mode.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
RLL Instructions
C0 $ SHFT C A ENT
Standard
STR 2 0
STOP S T O P
SHFT SHFT ENT
RST MLR INST# CV
SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
RSTWT
RLL Instructions
Standard
596 Standard RLL Instructions
Program Control Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 19999
Rll Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 597
Program Control Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For /
Next loop will be executed three times. If X1 is off the program inside the loop will not
be executed. The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending
on your application. Also, The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For / Next
loop does not extend the scan time larger the Watch Dog Timer setting. For more
information on the Watch Dog Timer, refer to the RSTWT instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 1 2 3
K3
FOR
RSTWT
X20 Y5
OUT
NEXT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT F O R D ENT
5 INST# ORN 3
SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5
SHFT N E X T ENT
TMR 4 SET MLR
RLL Instructions
Standard
598 Standard RLL Instructions
Program Control Instructions
aaa
Constant K 1FFFF
RTC
Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for
Standard
In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will
jump to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be
executed. If X35 is on the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction.
If X35 is not on Y0Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main
body of the program.
DirectSOFT Display X1 K3
GTS
C0
LD
K10
S
S
S
END
SBR K3
X20 Y5
OUTI
X21 Y10
OUTI
X35
RTC
X35 Y0 Y17
RSTI
RT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3
S
S
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT R T C ENT
ORN MLR 2
RLL Instructions
SP SHFT I D F ENT
STRN 8 3 5
Standard
S SHFT I A B H ENT
RST 8 0 1 7
SHFT R T ENT
ORN MLR
5100 Standard RLL Instructions
Program Control Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will
jump to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be
executed. The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the RT
instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1 K3
GTS
S
S
S
END
SBR K3
X20 Y5
OUT
X21 Y10
OUT
RT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3
S
S
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT R T ENT
Rll Instructions
ORN MLR
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 5101
Program Control Instructions
Master Line Set The Master Line Set instruction allows the
(MLS) program to control sections of ladder logic K aaa
by forming a new power rail controlled by MLS
the main left power rail. The main left rail is
always master line 0. When a MLS K1
instruction is used, a new power rail is
created at level 1. Master Line Sets and
Master Line Resets can be used to nest
power rails up to seven levels deep.
aaa
Constant K 17
aaa
Constant K 07
Understanding The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to
Master Control quickly enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program
Relays control flexibility. The following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions
operate by creating a sub power rail for control logic.
X1 Y7
OUT
X3
RLL Instructions
MLR MLR The MLR instructions note the end of the Master Control area. (They will be entered in
Standard
adjacent addresses.)
K0 K1
X10
5102 Standard RLL Instructions
Program Control Instructions
MLS/MLR Example In the following MLS/MLR example logic between the first MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0
(B) will function only if input X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1
(D) will function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either
of the MLS coils.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X0 K1
A $ A ENT
MLS STR 0
Y B ENT
X1 C0 MLS 1
OUT $ B ENT
STR 1
X2 C1 GX SHFT C A ENT
OUT 2 0
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X3 Y0
GX SHFT C B ENT
OUT OUT 2 1
$ D ENT
X10 STR 3
K2 C
GX A ENT
MLS
OUT 0
X5 $ B A ENT
Y1
STR 1 0
OUT Y C ENT
MLS 2
X4 Y2 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX B ENT
OUT 1
K1 D
$ E ENT
MLR STR 4
GX C ENT
X5 C2 OUT 2
OUT T B ENT
MLR 1
X6 Y3 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX SHFT C C ENT
OUT 2 2
K0
B
$ G ENT
MLR STR 6
GX D ENT
X7 Y4 OUT 3
OUT T A ENT
MLR 0
$ H ENT
STR 7
GX E C ENT
OUT 4 2
Rll Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 5103
Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt Instructions
SHFT D I S I ENT
3 8 RST 8
S
S S
S
S E N D
SHFT ENT
END 4 TMR 3
SHFT I N T A ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
INT O0
$ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
X1 Y5
X SHFT I F ENT
SETI SET 8 5
$ SHFT I D ENT
X3 Y7 STR 8 3
SETI
X SHFT I H ENT
SET 8 7
Timed Interrupt In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the
Program Example first-scan contact SP0. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode 40. Then we
configure the HSIO timer as a 10 mS interrupt by writing K104 to the configuration
register for X0 (V7634). See Chapter 3, Mode 40 Operation for more details.
When X4 turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X4 turns off, the interrupt will
be disabled. Every 10 mS the CPU will jump to the interrupt label INT O 0. The
application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X3 is not on
Y0Y7 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the
program.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 LD Load the constant value $ B ENT
(K40) into the lower 16 bits STR 1
K40 of the accumulator
SHFT L D SHFT K E A ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 4 0
S
X4 S
DISI
SHFT E N D ENT
S 4 TMR 3
S I N T A
SHFT ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
END
$ SHFT I C ENT
STR 8 2
INT O0
X SHFT I F ENT
SET 8 5
SP SHFT I D ENT
X2 Y5 STRN 8 3
SETI X SHFT I A H ENT
SET 8 0 7
SHFT I R T ENT
X3 Y0 Y7 8 ORN MLR
RSTI
IRT
Independent Timed Interrupt O1 is also available as an interrupt. This interrupt is independent of the
Interrupt HSIO features. Interrupt O1 uses an internal timer that is configured in V memory
location V7647. The interrupt period can be adjusted from 5 to 9999 mS. Once the
RLL Instructions
interrupt period is set and the interrupt is enabled in the program, the CPU will
Standard
continuously call the interrupt routine based on the time setting in V7647.
Message Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 1FFFF
SHFT F A U L T B ENT
S 5 0 ISG ANDST MLR 1
S
S
END
S
DLBL E N D
K1 SHFT ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT D L B L B ENT
ACON
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
A SW
SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN
SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
NCON TMR 2 INST# TMR 2 0 3 1
K 2031
RLL Instructions
SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 3 4 3 6
Standard
NCON
K 3436
Standard RLL Instructions 5107
Message Instructions
aaa
Constant K 1FFFF
aaa
ASCII A 09 AZ
aaa
Constant K 0FFFF
RLL Instructions
Standard
5108 Standard RLL Instructions
Message Instructions
Data Label In the following example, an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a
Example DLBL instruction to build a text message. See the FAULT instruction for information
on displaying messages. The DV-1000 Manual also has information on displaying
messages.
DirectSOFT
S
S
S
END
DLBL
K1
ACON
A SW
NCON
K 2031
NCON
K 3436
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT D L B L B ENT
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN
SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 2 0 3 1
SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 3 4 3 6
RLL Instructions
Standard
Standard RLL Instructions 5109
Message Instructions
A aaa
Constant K 2
You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL05s ports are
capable of several protocols. Port 1 cannot be configured for the non-sequence
portocol. To configure port 2 using the Handheld Programmer, use AUX 56 and
follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page. To
configure a port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup
Secondary Comm Port.
S Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 2.
S Protocol: Click the check box to the left of Non-sequence, and then
youll see the dialog box shown below.
S Baud Rate: Choose the baud rate that matches your printer.
S
RLL Instructions
Stop Bits, Parity: Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to
match your printer.
Standard
Port 2 on the DL05 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most printer
serial input connections.
Text element this is used for printing character strings. The character strings are
defined as the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two
hex numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also,
two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following
table:
The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the
output to the printer.
Example:
Length 0 without character
A Length 1 with character A
Length 1 with blank
$ Length 1 with double quotation mark
$R$L Length 2 with one CR and one LF
$0D$0A Length 2 with one CR and one LF
$$ Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks
before and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print
instruction contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT
instruction data during the application development.
The following example prints the message to port 2. We use a PD contact, which
causes the message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end
of the message, which produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This
prepares the printer to print the next line, starting from the left margin.
V-memory element this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer
format or real format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with : and data
type. The data types are shown in the table below. The Character code must be
capital letters.
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to
separate it from the text string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.
Example:
V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable.
The reactor temperature labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the : B
qualifier after the V2000 if the data is in BCD format, for example. The final string
adds the units of degrees to the line of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line
feed.
V-memory text element this is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the
% followed by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the
text. If you assign 0 as the number of characters, the print function will read the
character count from the first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location
and read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory.
Example:
RLL Instructions
Bit element this is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a
relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number
preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as
shown in the table below.
Example:
V2000 . 15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C00 in ON/OFF format
V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters
for each element is listed in the table below:
Special relay flags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL05 CPU ports
Standard
NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT
command to ensure the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still
busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX instruction.
Standard RLL Instructions 5113
Network Instructions
Network Instructions
Step 1: Load the slave address (090 BCD) into the low byte and F2 into the
high byte of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the
second layer of the stack).
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator (the
next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack).
Step 3: Load the starting Master CPU address into the accumulator. This is the
memory location where the data read from the slave will be put. This parameter
requires a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V memory location
(Aaaa) where the data will be read from in the slave.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can
be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into
the accumulator.
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
In the following example, when X1 is on and the port busy relay SP116 (see special
relays) is not on, the RX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master. Ten
consecutive bytes of data (V2000 V2004) will be read from a CPU at station
address 5 and copied into V memory locations V2300V2304 in the CPU with the
master port.
DirectSOFT
X1 SP116 LD
KF205
RX
V2000
$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B B G ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6
SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0
SHFT R X C A A A ENT
ORN SET 2 0 0 0
Standard RLL
Instructions
Standard RLL Instructions 5115
Network Instructions
Step 1: Load the slave address (090 BCD) into the low byte and F2 into the
high byte of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the
second layer of the stack).
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator (the
next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack).
Step 3: Load the starting Master CPU address into the accumulator. This is the
memory location where the data will be written from. This parameter requires a
HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V memory location
(Aaaa) where the data will be written to in the slave.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can
be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into
the accumulator.
A aaa
Inputs X 0377
Outputs Y 0377
Stage S 0377
Timer T 0177
Counter CT 0177
Standard RLL
Instructions
5116 Standard RLL Instructions
Network Instructions
In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP116 (see
special relays) is not on, the WX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master.
Ten consecutive bytes of data is read from the Master CPU and copied to V memory
locations V2000V2004 in the slave CPU at station address 5.
DirectSOFT
X1 SP116 LD
KF205
WX
V2000
$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B C E ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6
SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0
SHFT W X C A A A ENT
ANDN SET 2 0 0 0
Standard RLL
Instructions
16
Drum Instruction
Programming
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
Step Transitions
Overview of Drum Operation
Drum Control Techniques
Drum Instruction
EDrum Instruction
62
Drum Instruction Programming
Introduction
Drum Instruction
Programming
Purpose The Event Drum (EDRUM) instruction in the DL05 CPU electronically simulates an
electro-mechanical drum sequencer. The instruction offers enhancements to the
basic principle, which we describe first.
Drum Terminology Drum instructions are best suited for repetitive processes that consist of a finite
number of steps. They can do the work of many rungs of ladder logic with elegant
simplicity. Therefore, drums can save a lot of programming and debugging time.
We introduce some terminology associated with the drum instruction by describing
the original mechanical drum shown below. The mechanical drum generally has
pegs on its curved surface. The pegs are populated in a particular pattern,
representing a set of desired actions for machine control. A motor or solenoid rotates
the drum a precise amount at specific times. During rotation, stationary wipers sense
the presence of pegs (present = on, absent = off). This interaction makes or breaks
electrical contact with the wipers, creating electrical outputs from the drum. The
outputs are wired to devices on a machine for On/Off control.
Drums usually have a finite number of positions within one rotation, called steps.
Each step represents some process step. At powerup, the drum resets to a
particular step. The drum rotates from one step to the next based on a timer, or on
some external event. During special conditions, a machine operator can manually
increment the drum step using a jog control on the drums drive mechanism. The
contact closure of each wiper generates a unique on/off pattern called a sequence,
designed for controlling a specific machine. Because the drum is circular, it
automatically repeats the sequence once per rotation. Applications vary greatly, and
a particular drum may rotate once per second, or as slowly as once per week.
Pegs
Wipers
Drum
Outputs
Electronic drums provide the benefits of mechanical drums and more. For example,
they have a preset feature that is impossible for mechanical drums: The preset
function lets you move from the present step directly to any other step on command!
63
Drum Instruction Programming
Drum Chart For editing purposes, the electronic drum is presented in chart form in DirectSOFT
Representation and in this manual. Imagine slicing the surface of a hollow drum cylinder between
Drum Instruction
two rows of pegs, then pressing it flat. Now you can view the drum as a chart as
Programming
shown below. Each row represents a step, numbered 1 through 16. Each column
represents an output, numbered 0 through 15 (to match word bit numbering). The
solid circles in the chart represent pegs (On state) in the mechanical drum, and the
open circles are empty peg sites (Off state).
OUTPUTS
STEP 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 f F f F f f F f f f F f f F f f
2 f F f F F f F f f f f F f f F f
3 f F F F F f F F f f f f f f f f
4 F F f F F f F f F f f f f f f F
5 f f f F f f F f F f F f F f f F
6 f f f F f f F f F f F f F F f F
7 F f f F f f F F F F f F F F f F
8 F f F f f F f F F f f f F f f F
9 f f f f f f f F F f f f F f f f
10 f f f f f f f F F F f f f f f f
11 F f f f F f f f f F f f f f F f
12 f F f f F F f f F f F F f F F f
13 f f F f f f f f f f f F F f F f
14 f f f f f f f F f f f F F f F F
15 F f f f f F f F f F f F f f F F
16 f f F f f f f F f F f F F f f F
Output Sequences The mechanical drum sequencer derives its name from sequences of control
changes on its electrical outputs. The following figure shows the sequence of On/Off
controls generated by the drum pattern above. Compare the two, and you will find
that they are equivalent! If you can see their equivalence, you are well on your way to
understanding drum instruction operation.
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output
1
0 0
1
1 0
1
2 0
1
3 0
1
4 0
1
5 0
1
6 0
1
7 0
1
8 0
1
9 0
1
10 0
1
11 0
1
12 0
1
13 0
1
14 0
1
15 0
64
Drum Instruction Programming
Step Transitions
Drum Instruction
Programming
Drum Instruction There are two types of Drum instructions in the DL05 CPU:
Types S Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM)
S Time and Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (EDRUM)
The two drum instructions include time-based step transitions, and the EDRUM
includes event-based transitions as well. Each drum has 16 steps, and each step
has 16 outputs. Refer to the figure below. Each output can be either an X, Y, or C coil,
offering programming flexibility. We assign Step 1 an arbitrary unique output pattern
(f= Off, F= On) as shown. When programming a drum instruction, you also
determine both the output assignment and the On/Off state (pattern) at that time. All
steps use the same output assignment, but each step may have its own unique
output pattern.
Timer-Only Drums move from one step to another based on time and/or an external event
Transitions (input). Each step has its own transition condition which you assign during the drum
instruction entry. The figure below shows how timer-only transitions work.
Step 1 Outputs: F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f
Increment
count timer
Yes
Step 2 Outputs: f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F
The drum stays in Step 1 for a specific duration (user-programmable). The timebase
of the timer is programmable, from 0.01 seconds to 99.99 seconds. This establishes
the resolution, or the duration of each tick of the clock. Each step uses the same
timebase, but has its own unique counts per step, which you program. When the
counts for Step 1 have expired, then the drum moves to Step 2. The outputs change
immediately to match the new pattern for Step 2.
The drum spends a specific amount of time in each step, given by the formula:
For example, if you program a 5 second time base and 12 counts for Step 1, then the
drum will spend 60 seconds in Step 1. The maximum time for any step is given by the
Drum Instruction
formula:
Programming
Max Time per step = 0.01 seconds X 9999 X 9999
= 999,800 seconds = 277.7 hours = 11.6 days
NOTE: When first choosing the timebase resolution, a good rule of thumb is to make
it about 1/10 the duration of the shortest step in your drum. Then you will be able to
optimize the duration of that step in 10% increments. Other steps with longer
durations allow optimizing by even smaller increments (percentage-wise). Also,
note that the drum instruction executes once per CPU scan. Therefore, it is pointless
to specify a drum timebase that is much faster than the CPU scan time.
Timer and Event Step transitions may also occur based on time and/or external events. The figure
Transitions below shows how step transitions work in these cases.
Step 1 Outputs: F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f
No Is Step event
true?
Yes
Increment
count timer
No Has step
counts expired?
Yes
Step 2 Outputs: f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F
When the drum enters Step 1, it sets the output pattern as shown. Then it begins
polling the external input programmed for that step. You can define event inputs as
X, Y, or C discrete point types. Suppose we select X0 for the Step 1 event input. If X0
is off, then the drum remains in Step 1. When X0 is On, the event criteria is met and
the timer increments. The timer increments as long as the event (X0) remains true.
When the counts for Step 1 have expired, then the drum moves to Step 2. The
outputs change immediately to match the new pattern for Step 2.
66
Drum Instruction Programming
Event-Only Step transitions do not require both the event and the timer criteria programmed for
Transitions each step. You have the option of programming just one of the two, and even mixing
Drum Instruction
transition types among all the steps of the drum. For example, you might want Step 1
Programming
Step 1 Outputs: F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f
No Is Step event
true?
Yes
Step 2 Outputs: f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F
Counter Each drum instruction uses the resources of four counters in the CPU. When
Assignments programming the drum instruction, you select the first counter number. The drum
also uses the next three counters automatically. The counter bit associated with the
first counter turns on when the drum has completed its cycle, going off when the
drum is reset. These counter values and the counter bit precisely indicate the
progress of the drum instruction, and can be monitored by your ladder program.
Suppose we program a timer drum to have Counter Assignments
8 steps, and we select CT10 for the
CT10 Counts in step V1010 1528
counter number (remember, counter
numbering is in octal). Counter usage is CT11 Timer Value V1011 0200
shown to the right. The right column holds CT12 Preset Step V1012 0001
typical values, interpreted below. CT13 Current Step V1013 0004
CT10 shows that we are at the 1528th count in the current step, which is step 4
(shown in CT13). If we have programmed step 4 to have 3000 counts, then the step
is just over half completed. CT11 is the count timer, shown in units of 0.01 seconds.
So, each least-significant-digit change represents 0.01 seconds. The value of 200
means that we have been in the current count (1528) for 2 seconds (0.01 x 100).
Finally, CT12 holds the preset step value which was programmed into the drum
instruction. When the drums Reset input is active, it presets to step 1 in this case.
The value of CT12 changes only if the ladder program writes to it, or the drum
instruction is edited and the program is restarted. Counter bit CT10 turns on when
the drum cycle is complete, and turns off when the drum is reset.
67
Drum Instruction Programming
Last Step The last step in a drum sequence may be any step number, since partial drums are
Completion valid. Refer to the following figure. When the transition conditions of the last step are
Drum Instruction
met, the drum sets the counter bit corresponding to the counter named in the drum
Programming
instruction box (such as CT0). Then it moves to a final drum complete state. The
drum outputs remain in the pattern defined for the last step. Having finished a drum
cycle, the Start and Jog inputs have no effect at this point.
The drum leaves the drum complete state when the Reset input becomes active (or
on a program-torun mode transition). It resets the drum complete bit (such as CT0),
and then goes directly to the appropriate step number defined as the preset step.
Yes
Set
Set Drum Complete bit
CT0 = 1
Complete Outputs: F F F f f f F f f F f F F F f F
No Reset Input
Active?
Yes
Go to Preset Step
68
Drum Instruction Programming
Drum Instruction The drum instruction utilizes various inputs and outputs in addition to the drum
Block Diagram pattern itself. Refer to the figure below.
Start
Realtime Jog
Inputs
(from ladder) Reset
Drum
Preset Step f f F f f f
Step f f f f f f Final Drum
f f f f F f
Counts/Step Step Pointer F F f F
Outputs
F f
Control f F F f F f
Timebase f F F f F F
f F f f F F
Programming f F F f f F
Selections Events
Counter #
Pattern
Counter Assignments
CT0 Counts in step V1000 xxxx
CT1 Timer Value V1001 xxxx
CT2 Preset Step V1002 xxxx
CT3 Current Step V1003 xxxx
The drum instruction accepts several inputs for step control, the main control of the
drum. The inputs and their functions are:
S Start The Start input is effective only when Reset is off. When Start is
on, the drum timer runs if it is in a timed transition, and the drum looks
for the input event during event transitions. When Start is off, the drum
freezes in its current state (Reset must remain off), and the drum
outputs maintain their current on/off pattern.
S Jog The jog input is only effective when Reset is off (Start may be
either on or off). The jog input increments the drum to the next step on
each off-to-on transition (only EDRUM supports the jog input).
S Reset The Reset input has priority over the Start input. When Reset is
on, the drum moves to its preset step. When Reset is off, then the Start
input operates normally.
S Preset Step A step number from 1 to 16 that you define (typically is
step 1). The drum moves to this step whenever Reset is on, and
whenever the CPU first enters run mode.
69
Drum Instruction Programming
Drum Instruction
the counts/step is optional.
Programming
S Timer Value the current value of the counts/step timer.
S Counter # The counter number specifies the first of four consecutive
counters which the drum uses for step control. You can monitor these to
determine the drums progress through its control cycle. The DL05 has
128 counters (CT0 CT177 in octal).
S Events Either an X, Y, C, S, T, or CT type discrete point serves as
step transition inputs. Each step has its own event. However,
programming the event is optional.
WARNING: The outputs of a drum are enabled any time the CPU is in Run Mode.
The Start Input does not have to be on, and the Reset input does not disable the
outputs. Upon entering Run Mode, drum outputs automatically turn on or off
according to the pattern of the current step of the drum. This initial step number
depends on the counter memory configuration: non-retentive versus retentive.
Powerup State of The choice of the starting step on powerup and program-to-run mode transitions are
Drum Registers important to consider for your application. Please refer to the following chart. If the
counter memory is configured as non-retentive, the drum is initialized the same way
on every powerup or program-to-run mode transition. However, if the counter
memory is configured to be retentive, the drum will stay in its previous state.
Applications with relatively fast drum cycle times typically will need to be reset on
powerup, using the non-retentive option. Applications with relatively long drum cycle
times may need to resume at the previous point where operations stopped, using the
retentive case. The default option is the retentive case. This means that if you
initialize scratchpad V-memory, the memory will be retentive.
610
Drum Instruction Programming
Inputs
1
Start 0
1
Jog 0
1
Reset 0
Drum Status
1 1 2 1 1 2 3 3 4 ... 15 16 16 16 1 1
Step #
1
Drum
Complete (CT0) 0
1
Outputs (x 16) 0
When the drum completes the last step (Step 16 in this example), the Drum
Complete bit (CT0) turns on, and the step number remains at 16. When the Reset
input turns on, it turns off the Drum Complete bit (CT0), and forces the drum to enter
the preset step.
NOTE: The timing diagram shows all steps using equal time durations. Step times
can vary greatly, depending on the counts/step programmed.
611
Drum Instruction Programming
In the figure below, we focus on how the Jog input works on event drums. To the left
of the diagram, note that the off-to-on transitions of the Jog input increments the
Drum Instruction
step. Start may be either on or off (however, Reset must be off). Two jogs takes the
Programming
drum to step three. Next, the Start input turns on, and the drum begins running
normally. During step 6 another Jog input signal occurs. This increments the drum to
step 7, setting the timer to 0. The drum begins running immediately in step 7,
because Start is already on. The drum advances to step 8 normally.
As the drum enters step 14, the Start input turns off. Two more Jog signals moves the
drum to step 16. However, note that a third Jog signal is required to move the drum
through step 16 to drum complete. Finally, a Reset input signal arrives which forces
the drum into the preset step and turns off the drum complete bit.
Inputs
1
Start 0
1
Jog 0
1
Reset 0
Drum Status
1 2 3 3 3 4 5 6,7 8 ... 14 15 16 16 16 1
Step #
1
Drum
Complete (CT0) 0
1
Outputs (x 16) 0
Drum Instruction
Drum Instruction
Programming
The DL05 drum instructions may be programmed using DirectSOFT or for the
EDRUM instruction only you can use a handheld programmer (firmware version
v1.8 or later. This section covers entry using DirectSOFT for all instructions plus the
handheld mnemonics for the EDRUM instruction.
Timed Drum with The Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs is the most basic of the DL05s drum
Discrete Outputs instructions. It operates according to the principles covered on the previous pages.
(DRUM) Below is the instruction in chart form as displayed by DirectSOFT.
Counter Number Step Preset
Discrete Output Assignment
Timebase
DRUM CT aaa 15 0
Start
Step Preset K bb (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff)
Control
(Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff) (Fffff)
Inputs Reset 0.01 sec/Count K cccc
Step # Counts
1 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
2 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
3 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Step Number 4 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
5 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Counts per Step 6 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
7 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
8 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Output Pattern 9 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
f= Off, F= On 10 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
11 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
12 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
13 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
14 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
15 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
16 Kdddd f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
The Timed Drum features 16 steps and 16 outputs. Step transitions occur only on a
timed basis, specified in counts per step. Unused steps must be programmed with
counts per step = 0 (this is the default entry). The discrete output points may be
individually assigned as X, Y, or C types, or may be left unused. The output pattern
may be edited graphically with DirectSOFT.
Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. It stops when the
last step is complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum enters the
preset step chosen upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and whenever the
Reset input is energized.
Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
Drum Instruction
step number to CT(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for monitoring
Programming
purposes only.
The following ladder program shows the DRUM instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 10 are used, and twelve of the
sixteen output points are used. The preset step is step 1. The timebase runs at (K10
x 0.01) = 0.1 second per count. Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (25 x 0.1) = 2.5
seconds. In the last rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT0) turns on output Y0 upon
completion of the last step (step 10). A drum reset also resets CT0.
DirectSOFT Display
DRUM CT 0 15 0
X0
Start
Step Preset: K1 ( ) ( ) (C14) (Y10) (C4) (Y5) (Y13) (C7)
( ) ( ) (C30) (Y20) (C2) (Y6) (Y42) (C10)
X1
Reset 0.01 sec/Count: K 10
Step # Counts
1 K0025 f f f f F f f F F f f F f f f F
2 K0020 f f f f F f F f f F f f f f F f
3 K1500 f f f f f F f F f F f f F f f F
4 K0045 f f f f f f F f F f f F f f F f
5 K0180 f f f f f F f f f F f f f F f f
6 K0923 f f f f F f f F f f F f f F f F
7 K1200 f f f f F f F f F f F f f f F f
8 K8643 f f f f f F f f F f F f f f F F
9 K1200 f f f f F F F F F F F F F F F F
10 K4000 f f f f f F f F f F f F f F f f
11 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
12 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
13 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
14 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
15 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
16 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
CT0 Y0
Drum Complete OUT
614
Drum Instruction Programming
Event Drum The Event Drum (EDRUM) features time-based and event-based step transitions. It
(EDRUM) operates according to the general principles of drum operation covered in the
Drum Instruction
Counter Number
Step Preset
Timebase Discrete Output Assignment
Start EDRUM CT aa 15 0
Jog Step Preset: K bb (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff)
Control
(Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff) (Ffff)
Inputs 0.01 sec/Count: K cccc
Reset
Step # Counts Event
1 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
2 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
3 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Step Number 4 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
5 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Counts per Step 6 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
7 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
8 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Event per step 9 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
10 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Output Pattern 11 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
f= Off, F= On 12 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
13 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
14 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
15 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
16 Kdddd Eeeee f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
The Event Drum features 16 steps and 16 discrete outputs. Step transitions occur on
timed and/or event basis. The jog input also advances the step on each off-to-on
transition. Time is specified in counts per step, and events are specified as discrete
contacts. Unused steps and events must be left blank. The discrete output points
may be individually assigned.
Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. As long as the
event is true for the current step, the timer runs during that step. When the step count
equals the counts per step, the drum transitions to the next step. This process stops
when the last step is complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum
enters the preset step chosen upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and
whenever the Reset input is energized.
Drum Parameters Field Data Types Ranges
Counter Number aa 0 174
Preset Step bb K 1 16
Timer base cccc K 0 99.99 seconds
Counts per step dddd K 0 9999
Event eeee X, Y, C, S, T, CT see page 428
Discrete Outputs ffff X, Y, C see page 428
615
Drum Instruction Programming
Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
Drum Instruction
step number to CT(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for monitoring
Programming
purposes only.
The following ladder program shows the EDRUM instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 11 are used, and all sixteen
output points are used. The preset step is step 1. The timebase runs at (K10 x 0.01) =
0.1 second per count. Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (1 x 0.1) = 0.1 second. Note
that step 1 is time-based only (event is left blank). And, the output pattern for step 1
programs all outputs off, which is a typically desirable powerup condition. In the last
rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT4) turns on output Y0 upon completion of the last
step (step 11). A drum reset also resets CT4.
DirectSOFT Display
X0
Start EDRUM CT 4 15 0
X1
Jog Step Preset K1 (C34) (Y6) (C14) (Y0) (C4) (Y5) (Y1) (C7)
(Y3) (Y7) (C30) (Y2) (C2) (Y6) (Y4) (C10)
X2 0.01 sec/Count: K 10
Reset
Step # Counts Event
1 K0001 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
2 K0020 Y4 F f f F F f f f f f f F f f F f
3 K0150 X1 f f F f F f f f F f f F f F f f
4 K0048 X2 f F f f f F f f f F F F f F F f
5 K0180 C0 f F f F f f f F f F F f F f f F
6 K0923 C1 F f f F f f F F f F f f f f F F
7 K0120 X0 f F f f f F f f F f f f f F F f
8 K0864 X5 F f f F f f F f f F f F F f f F
9 K1200 X3 f f f f f f F F F f f f F f F f
10 K0400 Y7 f F f F F f f f f F F f f F f f
11 K0000 C20 F f f f f F f f f F f f f F F F
12 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
13 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
14 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
15 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
16 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
CT4 Y0
Drum Complete OUT
616
Drum Instruction Programming
Drum Mnemonics (Refer to the DirectSOFT manual for drum instruction entry using that tool).
Programming
X0
First, enter Store instructions for the Start
ladder rungs controlling the drums ladder Setup Outputs
X1 Info.
inputs. In the example to the right, the Jog Mask
f f F f f f
timer drums Start, Jog, and Reset inputs X2
Reset Steps f f f f f f
are controlled by X0, X1 and X2 f f f f F f
F F f F F f
respectively. The required keystrokes are f F F f F f
listed beside the mnemonic. f F F f F F
f F f f F F
These keystrokes precede the EDRUM f F F f f F
After the Store instructions, enter the EDRUM (using Counter CT0) as shown:
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
E D R U M A
EDRUM CNT0 SHFT
4 3 ORN ISG ORST 0
ENT
After entering the EDRUM mnemonic as above, the handheld programmer creates
an input form for all the drum parameters. The input form consists of approximately
fifty or more default mnemonic entries containing DEF (define) statements. The
default mnemonics are already input for you, so they appear automatically. Use the
NXT and PREV keys to move forward and backward through the form. Only the
editing of default values is required, thus eliminating many keystrokes. The entries
required for the basic timer drum are in the chart below.
NOTE: Default entries for output points and events are DEF 0000, which means
they are unassigned. If you need to go back and change an assigned output as
unused again, enter K0000. The entry will again show as DEF 0000.
617
Drum Instruction Programming
Using the DRUM entry chart (two pages before), we show the method of entry for the
basic time/event drum instruction. First, we convert the output pattern for each step
Drum Instruction
to the equivalent hex number, as shown in the following example.
Programming
Step 1 Outputs: f f f f F f f F f f f F F f F f
converts to: 15 0
0 9 1 A
The following diagram shows the method for entering the previous EDRUM example
on the HHP. The default entries of the form are in parenthesis. After the drum
instruction entry (on the fourth row), the remaining keystrokes over-write the
numeric portion of each default DEF statement. NOTE: Drum editing requires
Handheld Programmer firmware version 1.7 or later.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Start $ A ENT NOTE: You may use the NXT and PREV keys
STR 0
to skip past entries for unused outputs or steps.
Jog $ B ENT
STR 1
$ C
Reset STR 2
ENT
E D R U M A
Drum Inst. SHFT
4 3 ORN ISG ORST 0
ENT
NEXT
( DEF K0000 ) NEXT step 1 pattern = 0000
( DEF 0000 ) SHFT Y E NEXT
MLS 4 J I B C NEXT
( DEF K0000 ) 9 8 1 2
SHFT X B NEXT
( DEF 0000 ) SET 1 C I J E NEXT
( DEF K0000 ) 2 8 9 4
SHFT X A NEXT
( DEF 0000 ) SET 0 ( DEF K0000 ) E E I G NEXT
4 4 8 6
$ GY A NEXT
STR CNT 0
Last rung
SHFT Y A NEXT
MLS 0
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction to Stage Programming
Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams
Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions
Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller
Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program
Stage Program Example: A Garage Door Opener
Stage Program Design Considerations
RLL PLUS (Stage) Instructions
Questions and Answers about Stage Programs
72
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Its easy to see that these inefficiencies consume a lot of additional time, and time is
money. Stage programming overcomes these obstacles! We believe a few
moments of studying the stage concept is one of the greatest investments in
programming speed and efficiency a PLC programmer can make!
So, we encourage you to study stage programming and add it to your toolbox of
programming techniques. This chapter is designed as a self-paced tutorial on stage
programming. For best results:
S Start at the beginning and do not skip over any sections.
S Study each stage programming concept by working through each
example. The examples build progressively on each other.
S Read the Stage Questions and Answers at the end of the chapter for a
quick review.
73
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Stage Programming
can affect the outputs in just a few 3) Read (etc....)
milliseconds.
RLL PLUS
Most manufacturing processes consist of a series of activities or conditions , each
lasting for several seconds. minutes, or even hours. We might call these process
states, which are either active or inactive at any particular time. A challenge for RLL
programs is that a particular input event may last for just a brief instant. We typically
create latching relays in RLL to preserve the input event in order to maintain a
process state for the required duration.
We can organize and divide ladder logic into sections called stages, representing
process states. But before we describe stages in detail, we will reveal the secret to
understanding stage programming: state transition diagrams.
The Need for State Sometimes we need to forget about the scan nature of PLCs, and focus our thinking
Diagrams toward the states of the process we need to identify. Clear thinking and concise
analysis of an application gives us the best chance at writing efficient, bug-free
programs. State diagrams are just a tool to help us draw a picture of our process!
Youll discover that if we can get the picture right, our program will also be right!
A 2State Process Consider the simple process shown to the Inputs Outputs
right, which controls an industrial motor. On
We will use a green momentary SPST X0 Motor
pushbutton to turn the motor on, and a red Ladder Y0
one to turn it off. The machine operator will Off Program
press the appropriate pushbutton for just a X1
second or so. The two states of our
process are ON and OFF.
Transition condition
The next step is to draw a state transition
diagram, as shown to the right. It shows State
X0
the two states OFF and ON, with two
transition lines in-between. When the OFF ON
event X0 is true, we transition from OFF to X1
ON. When X1 is true, we transition from
ON to OFF. Output equation: Y0 = ON
If youre following along, you are very close to grasping the concept and the
problem-solving power of state transition diagrams. The output of our controller is
Y0, which is true any time we are in the ON state. In a boolean sense, Y0=ON state.
Next, we will implement the state diagram first as RLL, then as a stage program. This
will help you see the relationship between the two methods in problem solving.
74
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
OUT
pressed, output coil C0 turns on and the
C0 contact on the second row latches
itself on. So, X0 sets the latch C0 on, and
it remains on after the X0 contact opens. Latch Output
The motor output Y0 also has power flow, C0 Y0
so the motor is now on. OUT
When the Off pushbutton (X1) is pressed,
it opens the normally-closed X1 contact,
which resets the latch. Motor output Y0
turns off when the latch coil C0 goes off.
When the Off pushbutton (X1) is pressed, a transition back to the Off State occurs.
The JMP S0 instruction executes, which simply turns off the Stage bit S1 and turns
on Stage bit S0. On the next PLC scan, the CPU will not execute Stage S1, so the
motor output Y0 will turn off. The Off state (Stage 0) will be ready for the next cycle.
75
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Lets Compare Right now, you may be thinking I dont see the big advantage to Stage
Programming... in fact, the stage program is longer than the plain RLL program.
Well, now is the time to exercise a bit of faith. As control problems grow in complexity,
stage programming quickly out-performs RLL in simplicity, program size, etc.
For example, consider the diagram below.
Notice how easy it is to correlate the OFF
and ON states of the state transition SG
S0 OFF State
diagram below to the stage program at the
right. Now, we challenge anyone to easily X0 S1
identify the same states in the RLL JMP
program on the previous page!
Stage Programming
SG ON State
S1
RLL PLUS
SP1 Y0
OUT
X0
X1 S0
OFF ON JMP
X1
the stage instruction continuing until the next stage instruction or the end of program
belong to stage 0. Its equivalent operation is shown on the right. When S0 is true, the
RLL PLUS
SG S0
S0
Stage Programming
S0 S1
RLL PLUS
SG SG
S0 S0
S1
Equivalent S0
X0 X0
JMP RST
S1
SET
Please Read Carefully The jump instruction is easily misunderstood. The jump
does not occur immediately like a GOTO or GOSUB program control instruction
when executed. Heres how it works:
S The jump instruction resets the stage bit of the stage in which it occurs.
All rungs in the stage still finish executing during the current scan, even
if there are other rungs in the stage below the jump instruction!
S The reset will be in effect on the following scan, so the stage that
executed the jump instruction previously will be inactive and bypassed.
S The stage bit of the stage named in the Jump instruction will be set
immediately, so the stage will be executed on its next occurrence. In the
left program shown below, stage S1 executes during the same scan as
the JMP S1 occurs in S0. In the example on the right, Stage S1
executes on the next scan after the JMP S1 executes, because stage
S1 is located above stage S0.
SG SG Executes on next
S0 S1 scan after Jmp
X0 S1
S1 Y0
JMP
OUT
SG Executes on same SG
S1 scan as Jmp S0
X0 S1
S1 Y0
JMP
OUT
Note: Assume we start with Stage 0 active and stage 1 inactive for both examples.
78
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Note that this example differs from the motor example, because now we have just
one pushbutton. When we press the pushbutton, both transition conditions are met.
We would just transition around the state diagram at top speed. If implemented in
Stage, this solution would flash the light on or off each scan (obviously undesirable)!
The solution is to make the the push and the release of the pushbutton separate
events. Refer to the new state transition diagram below. At powerup we enter the
OFF state. When switch X0 is pressed, we enter the Press-ON state. When it is
released, we enter the ON state. Note that X0 with the bar above it denotes X0 NOT.
Powerup X0 X0
PushON ISG
S0 OFF State
X0 S1
OFF ON
JMP
Stage Programming
try dividing the problem into more than one process. Remember, you can still have
the processes communicate with each other to coordinate their overall activity.
RLL PLUS
2. Draw the Block Diagram.
Inputs represent all the information the process needs for decisions, and outputs
connect to all devices controlled by the process.
S Make lists of inputs and outputs for the process.
S Assign I/O point numbers (X and Y) to physical inputs and outputs.
3. Draw the State Transition Diagram.
The state transition diagram describes the central function of the block diagram,
reading inputs and generating outputs.
S Identify and name the states of the process.
S Identify the event(s) required for each transition between states.
S Ensure the process has a way to re-start itself, or is cyclical.
S Choose the powerup state for your process.
S Write the output equations.
4. Write the Stage Program.
Translate the state transition diagram into a stage program.
S Make each state a stage. Remember to number stages in octal. Up to
256 total stages are available in the DL05, numbered 0 to 377 in octal.
S Put transition logic inside the stage which originates each transition (the
stage each arrow points away from).
S Use an initial stage (ISG) for any states that must be active at powerup.
S Place the outputs or actions in the appropriate stages.
Youll notice that Steps 1 through 3 just prepare us to write the stage program in Step
4. However, the program virtually writes itself because of the preparation
beforehand. Soon youll be able to start with a word description of an application and
create a stage program in one easy session!
710
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Draw the Block The block diagram of the controller is Inputs Outputs
Diagram shown to the right. Input X0 is from the
pushbutton door control. Input X1 Toggle X0
energizes when the door reaches the full
up position. Input X2 energizes when the Ladder To motor:
Up limit Program Y1
door reaches the full down position. When X1
the door is positioned between fully up or Raise
down, both limit switches are open.
Down limit
The controller has two outputs to drive the X2 Y2 Lower
motor. Y1 is the up (raise the door)
command, and Y2 is the down (lower the
door) command.
711
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Draw the State Now we are ready to draw the state transition diagram. Like the previous light bulb
Diagram controller example, this application also has just one switch for the command input.
Refer to the figure below.
S When the door is down (DOWN state), nothing happens until X0
energizes. Its push and release brings us to the RAISE state, where
output Y1 turns on and causes the motor to raise the door.
S We transition to the UP state when the up limit switch (X1) energizes,
and turns off the motor.
S Then nothing happens until another X0 press-release cycle occurs. That
takes us to the LOWER state, turning on output Y2 to command the
motor to lower the door. We transition back to the DOWN state when the
Stage Programming
down limit switch (X2) energizes.
RLL PLUS
X0
X0 PushUP RAISE X1 ISG
Powerup S0 DOWN State
X0 S1
DOWN UP JMP
SG PushUP State
S1
X2 LOWER PushDOWN X0 X0 S2
X0 JMP
Modify the To control the light bulb, we add an output Inputs Outputs
Block Diagram and to our controller block diagram, shown to
State Diagram the right, Y3 is the light control output. Toggle
X0 Y1
Raise
In the diagram below, we add an additional
state called LIGHT. Whenever the Ladder
garage owner presses the door control Up limit Program Y2
X1
switch and releases, the RAISE or Lower
LOWER state is active and the LIGHT
state is simultaneously active. The line to
Down limit
the Light state is dashed, because it is not X2 Y3
the primary path. Light
We can think of the Light state as a parallel process to the raise and lower state. The
paths to the Light state are not a transition (Stage JMP), but a State Set command. In
the logic of the Light stage, we will place a three-minute timer. When it expires, timer
bit T0 turns on and resets the Light stage. The path out of the Light stage goes
nowhere, indicating the Light stage just becomes inactive, and the light goes out!
X0
DOWN LIGHT T0 UP
X0
X2 LOWER PushDOWN X0
X0
713
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Stage Programming
Most new stage programmers would be SET
concerned about where to place the Light SG
RAISE State
RLL PLUS
Stage in the ladder, and how to number it. S2
The good news is that it doesnt matter! SP1 Y1
S Just choose an unused Stage OUT
number, and use it for the new stage
X1 S3
and as the reference from other
stages. JMP
Toggle
state transition diagram, shown in shaded X0 Y1
Raise
areas in the figure below. Note the new
RLL PLUS
X0
X0 PushUP RAISE X1
X0
DOWN X3 LIGHT T0 UP
X0
X2 and X3
LOWER PushDOWN X0
X0
Exclusive It is theoretically possible that the down limit (X2) and the obstruction input (X3)
Transitions could energize at the same moment. In that case, we would jump to the Push-UP
and DOWN states simultaneously, which does not make sense.
Instead, we give priority to the obstruction
by changing the transition condition to the
SG
DOWN state to [X2 AND NOT X3]. This S5 LOWER State
ensures the obstruction event has the
priority. The modifications we must make SP1 Y2
to the LOWER Stage (S5) logic are shown OUT
to the right. The first rung remains X2 X3 to DOWN S0
unchanged. The second and third rungs JMP
implement the transitions we need. Note
the opposite relay contact usage for X3, X3 to Push-UP S2
which ensures the stage will execute only JMP
one of the JMP instructions.
715
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Stage Programming
Monitoring, and Operator Interface are all running. At powerup, three initial stages
shown begin operation.
RLL PLUS
Main Process
XXX = ISG
Idle Fill Agitate Rinse Spin
Status
How Instructions We can think of states or stages as simply dividing up our ladder program as
Work Inside Stages depicted in the figure below. Each stage contains only the ladder rungs which are
needed for the corresponding state of the process. The logic for transitioning out of a
stage is contained within that stage. Its easy to choose which ladder rungs are active
at powerup by using an initial stage type (ISG).
Stage 0 Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage Programming
RLL PLUS
Most all instructions work just like they do in standard RLL. You can think of a stage
just like a miniature RLL program which is either active or inactive.
Output Coils As expected, output coils in active stages will turn on or off outputs
according to power flow into the coil. However, note the following:
S Outputs work as usual, provided each output reference (such as Y3) is
used in only one stage.
S An output can be referenced from more than one stage, as long as only
one of the stages is active at a time.
S If an output coil is controlled by more than one stage simultaneously, the
active stage nearest the bottom of the program determines the final
output status during each scan. Therefore, use the OROUT instruction
instead when you want multiple stages to have a logical OR control of
an output.
One-Shot or PD coils Use care if you must use a Positive Differential coil in a
stage. Remember that the input to the coil must make a 01 transition. If the coil is
already energized on the first scan when the stage becomes active, the PD coil will
not work. This is because the 01 transition did not occur.
PD coil alternative: If there is a task which you want to do only once (on 1 scan), it can
be placed in a stage which transitions to the next stage on the same scan.
Counter In using a counter inside a stage, the stage must be active for one scan
before the input to the counter makes a 01 transition. Otherwise, there is no real
transition and the counter will not count.
The ordinary Counter instruction does have a restriction inside stages: it may not be
reset from other stages using the RST instruction for the counter bit. However, the
special Stage counter provides a solution (see next paragraph).
Stage Counter The Stage Counter has the benefit that its count may be globally
reset from other stages by using the RST instruction. It has a count input, but no reset
input. This is the only difference from a standard counter.
Drum Realize that the drum sequencer is its own process, and is a different
programming method than stage programming. If you need to use a drum with
stages, be sure to place the drum instruction in an ISG stage that is always active.
717
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Powerup
Stage Programming
ISG OFF State
S0
Supervisor Process
RLL PLUS
Supervisor X0 S1
JMP
PushOFF SG ON State
X0 X0 S2
SP1 Y0
New stage programming students will OUT
typically try to place the counter inside one the
the stages of the process they are trying to X0 S3
monitor. The problem with this approach is JMP
that the stage is active only part of the time. In
order for the counter to count, the count input SG PushOff State
S3
must transition from off to on at least one scan
after its stage activates. Ensuring this X0 S0
requires extra logic that can be tricky. JMP
In this case, we only need to add another
supervisory stage as shown above, to watch ISG Supervisor State
S4
the main process. The counter inside the
supervisor stage uses the stage bit S1 of the S1
main process as its count input. Stage bits SGCNT CT0
used as a contact let us monitor a process! K5000
Note that both the Supervisor stage and the
OFF stage are initial stages. The supervisor
stage remains active indefinitely.
Stage Counter The counter in the above example is a special Stage Counter. Note that it does not
have a reset input. The count is reset by executing a Reset instruction, naming the
counter bit (CT0 in this case). The Stage Counter has the benefit that its count may
be globally reset from other stages. The standard Counter instruction does not have
this global reset capability. You may still use a regular Counter instruction inside a
stage... however, the reset input to the counter is the only way to reset it.
718
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Power Flow Our discussion of state transitions has shown how the Stage JMP instruction makes
Transition the current stage inactive and the next stage (named in the JMP) active. As an
Technique alternative way to enter this in DirectSOFT, you may use the power flow method for
stage transitions.
The main requirement is that the current stage be located directly above the next
(jump-to) stage in the ladder program. This arrangement is shown in the diagram
below, by stages S0 and S1, respectively.
X0
S0 S1
Stage Programming
SG SG
S0 S0
RLL PLUS
Equivalent
X0 S1 All other rungs in stage...
JMP
X0
SG
S1 Power flow
transition
SG
S1
Recall that the Stage JMP instruction may occur anywhere in the current stage, and
the result is the same. However, power flow transitions (shown above) must occur as
the last rung in a stage. All other rungs in the stage will precede it. The power flow
transition method is also achievable on the handheld programmer, by simply
following the transition condition with the Stage instruction for the next stage.
The power flow transition method does eliminate one Stage JMP instruction, its only
advantage. However, it is not as easy to make program changes as using the Stage
JMP. Therefore, we advise using Stage JMP transitions for most programmers.
Stage View in The Stage View option in DirectSOFT will let you view the ladder program as a flow
DirectSOFT chart. The figure below shows the symbol convention used in the diagrams. You may
find the stage view useful as a tool to verify that your stage program has faithfully
reproduced the logic of the state transition diagram you intend to realize.
SG Stage Reference to Transition
J Jump S Set Stage
a Stage Logic
R Reset Stage
The following diagram is a typical stage view of a ladder program containing stages.
Note the left-to-right direction of the flow chart.
ISG SG SG SG
S0 J S1 J S2 S S4
SG SG
J J S5
S3
719
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Stage Programming
X0 S2
S0 S1 X0
RLL PLUS
JMP
S4 S5 S4
Process B JMP
Note that if we want Stages S2 and S4 to energize exactly on the same scan, both
stages must be located below or above Stage S1 in the ladder program (see the
explanation at the bottom of page 77). Overall, parallel branching is easy!
Converging Now we consider the opposite case of parallel branching, which is converging
Processes processes. This simply means we stop doing multiple things and continue doing one
thing at a time. In the figure below, processes A and B converge when stages S2 and
S4 transition to S5 at some point in time. So, S2 and S4 are Convergence Stages.
Process A S1 S2
= Convergence Stage S5 S6
Process B S3 S4
Convergence While the converging principle is simple enough, it brings a new complication. As
Stages parallel processing completes, the multiple processes almost never finish at the
(CV) same time. In other words, how can we know whether Stage S2 or S4 will finish last?
This is an important point, because we have to decide how to transition to Stage S5.
convergence stages.
RLL PLUS
Convergence The following summarizes the requirements in the use of convergence stages,
Stage Guidelines including some tips for their effective application:
Stage Programming
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
RLL PLUS
aaa
Stage S 0377
The following example is a simple RLL PLUS program. This program utilizes an initial
stage, stage, and jump instructions to create a structured program.
U A ENT
ISG S0
ISG 0
$ A ENT
STR 0
GX A ENT
X0 Y0 OUT 0
OUT $ B ENT
STR 1
X1 S2 X S C
SHFT ENT
SET RST 2
SET
$ F ENT
STR 5
X5 S1
K B ENT
JMP JMP 1
2 B ENT
SG 1
SG S1 $ C ENT
STR 2
GX B ENT
OUT 1
X2 Y1 2 C ENT
SG 2
OUT
$ G ENT
STR 6
GX C ENT
SG S2 OUT 2
$ H ENT
STR 7
V SHFT S B ENT
X6 Y2 AND RST 1
OUT K A ENT
JMP 0
X7 S1 S0
JMP
722
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
aaa
Stage S 0377
Stage Programming
Initial Stages are also activated by transitional logic, a jump or a set stage executed
from an active stage.
RLL PLUS
aaa
Stage S 0377
aaa
Stage S 0377
In the following example, only stage ISG0 will be active when program execution.
begins. When X1 is on, program execution will jump from Initial Stage 0 to Stage 1.
723
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
ISG S0 U A ENT
ISG 0
$ B ENT
S1 STR 1
X1
JMP K B ENT
JMP 1
2 B ENT
SG S1 SG 1
$ C ENT
Y5 STR 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT
OUT 5
S2 $ H ENT
X7 STR 7
Stage Programming
JMP
K C ENT
JMP 2
S3
RLL PLUS
X7 N K D
SHFT SHFT ENT
NJMP TMR JMP 3
S
S
S
aaa
Stage S 0377
724
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
In the following example, when Converge Stages S10 and S11 are both active the
CVJMP instruction will be executed when X4 is on. The CVJMP will deactivate S10
and S11, and activate S20. Then, if X5 is on, the program execution will jump back to
the initial stage, S0.
DirectSOFT Display Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
U A ENT
ISG 0
$ A ENT
STR 0
ISG S0 GX A ENT
OUT 0
$ B ENT
X0 Y0 STR 1
Stage Programming
OUT K B ENT
JMP 1
K B A
RLL PLUS
ENT
S1 JMP 1 0
X1
JMP 2 B ENT
SG 1
S10 $ C ENT
STR 2
JMP
K B B ENT
JMP 1 1
SG S1 SHFT C V B A ENT
2 AND 1 0
SHFT C V B B ENT
2 AND 1 1
X2 S11
$ D
JMP STR 3
ENT
GX D ENT
OUT 3
$ E
CV S10 STR 4
ENT
X4 S20
CVJMP
SG S20
X5 S0
JMP
725
RLL PLUS Stage Programming
Q. What does stage programming do that I cant do with regular RLL programs?
A. Stages allow you to identify all the states of your process before you begin
programming. This approach is more organized, because you divide up a ladder
program into sections. As stages, these program sections are active only when they
are actually needed by the process. Most processes can be organized into a
Stage Programming
sequence of stages, connected by event-based transitions.
RLL PLUS
Q. What are Stage Bits?
A. A stage bit is just a single bit in the CPUs image register, representing the
active/inactive status of the stage in real time. For example, the bit for Stage 0 is
referenced as S0. If S0 = 0, then the ladder rungs in Stage 0 are bypassed (not
executed) on each CPU scan. If S0 = 1, then the ladder rungs in Stage 0 are
executed on each CPU scan. Stage bits, when used as contacts, allow one part of
your program to monitor another part by detecting stage active/inactive status.
Q. Isnt a Stage JMP just like a regular GOTO instruction used in software?
A. No, it is very different. A GOTO instruction sends the program execution
immediately to the code location named by the GOTO. A Stage JMP simply resets
the Stage Bit of the current stage, while setting the Stage Bit of the stage named in
the JMP instruction. Stage bits are 0 or 1, determining the inactive/active status of
the corresponding stages. A stage JMP has the following results:
S When the JMP is executed, the remainder of the current stages rungs
are executed, even if they reside past(under) the JMP instruction. On
the following scan, that stage is not executed, because it is inactive.
S The Stage named in the Stage JMP instruction will be executed upon its
next occurrence. If located past (under) the current stage, it will be
Stage Programming
executed on the same scan. If located before (above) the current stage,
it will be executed on the following scan.
RLL PLUS
Q. How can I know when to use stage JMP, versus a Set Stage Bit or Reset Stage Bit?
A. These instructions are used according to the state diagram topology you have
derived:
S Use a Stage JMP instruction for a state transition... moving from one
state to another.
S Use a Set Stage Bit instruction when the current state is spawning a
new parallel state or stage sequence, or when a supervisory state is
starting a state sequence under its command.
S Use a Reset Bit instruction when the current state is the last state in a
sequence and its task is complete, or when a supervisory state is
ending a state sequence under its command.
Q. Can I have place program ladder rungs outside of the stages, so they are always on?
A. It is possible, but its not good software design practice. Place ladder that must
always be active in an initial stage, and do not reset that stage or use a Stage JMP
instruction inside it. It can start other stage sequences at the proper time by setting
the appropriate Stage Bit(s).
In This Chapter. . . .
DL05 PID Loop Features
Loop Setup Parameters
Loop Sample Rate and Scheduling
Ten Steps to Successful Process Control
Basic Loop Operation
PID Loop Data Configuration
PID Algorithms
Loop Tuning Procedure
PV Analog Filter
Feedforward Control
Time Proportioning Control
Cascade Control
Process Alarms
Ramp/Soak Generator
Troubleshooting Tips
Bibliography
Glossary of PID Loop Terminology
82
PID Loop Operation
The DL05 CPU has process control loop capability in addition to ladder program
execution. You can select and configure up to four loops. All sensor and actuator
wiring connects directly to DL05 analog modules. All process variables, gain values,
alarm levels, etc., associated with each loop reside in a Loop Variable Table in the
CPU. The DL05 CPU reads process variable (PV) inputs during each scan. Then it
makes PID loop calculations during a dedicated time slice on each PLC scan,
updating the control output value. The control loops use a
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) algorithm to generate the control output. This
PID Loop Operation
chapter describes how the loops operate, and what you must do to configure and
tune the loops.
Analog Output
DL05
PID Loop Calculations Manufacturing Process
and Troubleshooting
Maintenance
Analog Input
The best tool for configuring loops in the DL05 is the DirectSOFT32 programming
software, release 3.0c, or later. DirectSOFT32 uses dialog boxes to help you set up
the individual loops. After completing the setup, you can use DirectSOFT32s PID
Trend View to tune each loop. The configuration and tuning selections you make are
stored in the DL05s FLASH memory, which is retentive. The loop parameters also
may be saved to disk for recall later.
83
PID Loop Operation
Maintenance
change in control output value is made
The Basics of The key parts of a PID control loop are shown in the block diagram below. The path
PID Loops from the PLC to the Manufacturing Process and back to the PLC is the loop in
closed loop control.
Loop Configuring External
and Monitoring Disturbances
PLC System
Manufacturing Process the set of actions that adds value to raw materials. The
process can involve physical changes and/or chemical changes to the material. The
changes render the material more useful for a particular purpose, ultimately used in
a final product.
Process Variable a measurement of some physical property of the raw materials.
Measurements are made using some type of sensor. For example, if the
PID Loop Operation
manufacturing process uses an oven, you will most likely want to control
temperature. Temperature is a process variable.
Setpoint Value the theoretically perfect quantity of the process variable, or the
desired amount which yields the best product. The machine operator knows this
value, and either sets it manually or programs it into the PLC for later automated use.
External Disturbances the unpredictable sources of error which the control
system attempts to cancel by offsetting their effects. For example, if the fuel input is
constant an oven will run hotter during warm weather than it does during cold
weather. An oven control system must counter-act this effect to maintain a constant
oven temperature during any season. Thus, the weather (which is not very
and Troubleshooting
Error Term the algebraic difference between the process variable and the
setpoint. This is the control loop error, and is equal to zero when the process variable
is equal to the setpoint (desired) value. A well-behaved control loop is able to
maintain a small error term magnitude.
Loop Calculation the real-time application of a mathematical algorithm to the
error term, generating a control output command appropriate for minimizing the
error magnitude. Various control algorithms are available, and the DL05 uses the
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) algorithm (more on this later).
Control Output the result of the loop calculation, which becomes a command for
the process (such as the heater level in an oven).
Loop Configuring operator-initiated selections which set up and optimize the
performance of a control loop. The loop calculation function uses the configuration
parameters in real time to adjust gains, offsets, etc.
Loop Monitoring the function which allows an operator to observe the status and
performance of a control loop. This is used in conjunction with the loop configuring to
optimize the performance of a loop (minimize the error term).
85
PID Loop Operation
The diagram below shows each loop element in the form of its real-world physical
component. The example manufacturing process involves a liquid in a reactor
vessel. A sensor probe measures a process variable which may be pressure,
temperature, or another parameter. The sensor signal is amplified through a
transducer, and is sent through the wire in analog form to the PLC input module.
Using a analog I/O combination module, the PLC reads the PV from its analog input.
The CPU executes the loop calculation, and writes to the analog output. This signal
goes to a device in the manufacturing process, such as a heater, valve, pump, etc.
Over time, the liquid begins to change enough to be measured on the sensor probe.
The process variable changes accordingly. The next loop calculation occurs, and
the loop cycle repeats in this manner continuously.
Loop Configuration
and Monitoring
Process Variable
Control Output
Manufacturing
Process
Maintenance
The personal computer shown is used to run DirectSOFT32, the PLC programming
software for DirectLOGIC programmable controllers. DirectSOFT32, release 3.0c
or later, can program the DL05 PLC (including the PID feature). The software
features a forms-based editor to configure loop parameters. It also features a PID
loop trending screen which will be helpful during the loop tuning process. Details on
how to use that software are in the DirectSOFT32 Manual.
86
PID Loop Operation
If the number of loops is 0, the loop controller task is turned off during the ladder
program scan. The loop controller will allow use of loops in ascending order,
beginning with 1. For example, you cannot use loop 1 and 4 while skipping 2 and 3.
PID Loop Operation
The loop controller attempts to control the full number of loops specified in V7641.
PID Error Flags The CPU reports any programming errors
of the setup parameters in V7640 and
V7641. It does this by setting the PID Error Flags, V7642
appropriate bits in V7642 on
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
program-to-run mode transitions.
If you use the DirectSOFT32 loop setup dialog box, its automatic range checking
prohibits possible setup errors. However, the setup parameters may be written using
other methods such as RLL, so the error flag register may be helpful in those cases.
and Troubleshooting
Establishing the On a program -to-run mode transition, the CPU reads the loop setup parameters as
Loop Table Size pictured below. At that moment, the CPU learns the location of the loop table and the
and Location number of loops it configures. Then during the ladder program scan, the PID Loop
task uses the loop data to perform calculations, generate alarms, and so on. There
are some loop table parameters the CPU will read or write on every loop calculation.
CPU Tasks VMemory Space
User Data
READ/
Ladder WRITE LOOP
Program DATA
CONFIGURE/
MONITOR
PID Loop
Task
Setup Parameters
READ V7640, V7641
(at powerup)
DirectSOFT32 Programming Software
NOTE: The DL05 CPUs PID algorithm requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later)
Maintenance
and firmware version 2.1 (or later).
88
PID Loop Operation
Loop Table The parameters associated with each loop are listed in the following table. The
Word Definitions address offset is in octal, to help you locate specific parameters in a loop table. For
example, if a table begins at V2000, then the location of the reset (integral) term is
Addr+11, or V2011. Do not use the word# (in the first column) to calculate addresses.
Word # Address+Offset Description Format
1 Addr + 0 PID Loop Mode Setting 1 bits
2 Addr + 1 PID Loop Mode Setting 2 bits
3 Addr + 2 Setpoint Value (SP) word/binary
4 Addr + 3 Process Variable (PV) word/binary
5 Addr + 4 Bias (Integrator) Value word/binary
6 Addr + 5 Control Output Value word/binary
7 Addr + 6 Loop Mode and Alarm Status bits
8 Addr + 7 Sample Rate Setting word/BCD
9 Addr + 10 Gain (Proportional) Setting word/BCD
10 Addr + 11 Reset (Integral) Time Setting word/BCD
11 Addr + 12 Rate (Derivative) Time Setting word/BCD
12 Addr + 13 PV Value, Low-low Alarm word/binary
PID Loop Operation
PID Mode Setting 1 The individual bit definitions of the PID Mode Setting 1 word (Addr+00) are listed in
Bit Descriptions the following table. Additional information about the use of this word is available later
(Addr + 00) in this chapter.
Bit PID Mode Setting 1 Description Read/Write Bit=0 Bit=1
0 Manual Mode Loop Operation request write 01
request
1 Automatic Mode Loop Operation re- write 01
quest request
2 Cascade Mode Loop Operation request write 01
request
3 Bumpless Transfer select write Mode I Mode II
4 Direct or Reverse-Acting Loop select write Direct Reverse
5 Position / Velocity Algorithm select write Position Velocity
6 PV Linear / Square Root Extract select write Linear Sq. root
7 Error Term Linear / Squared select write Linear Squared
8 Error Deadband enable write Disable Enable
9 Derivative Gain Limit select write Off On
10 Bias (Integrator) Freeze select write Off On
Maintenance
810
PID Loop Operation
PID Mode Setting 2 The individual bit definitions of the PID Mode Setting 2 word (Addr+01) are listed in
Bit Descriptions the following table. Additional information about the use of this word is available later
(Addr + 01) in this chapter.
Bit PID Mode Setting 2 Description Read/Write Bit=0 Bit=1
0 Input (PV) and Control Output Range write unipolar bipolar
Unipolar/Bipolar select
(See Notes 1 and 2)
1 Input/Output Data Format select write 12 bit 15 bit
(See Notes 1 and 2)
2 Analog Input filter write off on
3 SP Input limit enable write disable enable
4 Integral Gain (Reset) units select write seconds minutes
5 Select Autotune PID algorithm write closed loop open loop
6 Autotune selection write PID PI only
(rate = 0)
7 Autotune start read/write autotune force start
done
8 PID Scan Clock (internal use) read
PID Loop Operation
Note 1: If the value in bit 9 is 0, then the values in bits 0 and 1 are read. If the value in
bit 9 is 1, then the values in bits 0 and 1 are not read, and bit 9 defines the
data format (the range is automatically unipolar).
Note 2: If the value in bit 10 is 0, then the values in bits 0, 1, and 9 define the input and
output ranges and data formats (the values in bits 11, 12, and 13 are not
read). If the value in bit 10 is 1, then the values in bits 0, 1, and 9 define only
the input range and data format, and bits 11, 12, and 13 are read and define
the output range and data format.
Note 3: If bit 10 has a value of 1 and bit 13 has a value of 0, then bits 11 and 12 are
read and define the output range and data format. If bit 10 and bit 13 each
have a value of 1, then bits 11 and 12 are not read, and bit 13 defines the data
format, (the output range is automatically unipolar).
811
PID Loop Operation
Mode / Alarm The individual bit definitions of the Mode / Alarm monitoring (Addr+06) word is listed
Monitoring Word in the following table. More details are in the PID Mode section and Alarms section.
(Addr + 06)
Bit Mode / Alarm Bit Description Read/Write Bit=0 Bit=1
0 Manual Mode Indication read Manual
1 Automatic Mode Indication read Auto
2 Cascade Mode Indication read Cascade
3 PV Input LOWLOW Alarm read Off On
4 PV Input LOW Alarm read Off On
5 PV Input HIGH Alarm read Off On
6 PV Input HIGHHIGH Alarm read Off On
7 PV Input YELLOW Deviation Alarm read Off On
8 PV Input RED Deviation Alarm read Off On
9 PV Input Rate-of-Change Alarm read Off On
10 Alarm Value Programming Error read Error
11 Loop Calculation Overflow/Underflow read Error
12 Loop in Auto-Tune indication read Off On
Ramp / Soak Table The individual bit definitions of the Ramp / Soak Table Flag (Addr+33) word is listed
Flags in the following table. Further details are given in the Ramp / Soak Operation section.
(Addr + 33)
Bit Ramp / Soak Flag Bit Description Read/Write Bit=0 Bit=1
0 Start Ramp / Soak Profile write 01 Start
1 Hold Ramp / Soak Profile write 01 Hold
Maintenance
2 Resume Ramp / soak Profile write 01
Resume
3 Jog Ramp / Soak Profile write 01 Jog
4 Ramp / Soak Profile Complete read Complete
5 PV Input Ramp / Soak Deviation read Off On
6 Ramp / Soak Profile in Hold read Off On
7 Reserved read
815 Current Step in R/S Profile read decode as byte (hex)
Bits 815 must be read as a byte to indicate the current segment number of the
Ramp/Soak generator in the profile. This byte will have the values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, A, B, C, D, E, F, and 10, which represent segments 1 to 16 respectively. If the
byte=0, then the Ramp/Soak table is not active.
812
PID Loop Operation
Ramp/Soak Each loop that you configure has the option of using a built-in Ramp/Soak generator
Table Location dedicated to that loop. This feature generates SP values that follow a profile. To use
(Addr + 34) the Ramp Soak feature, you must program a separate table of 32 words with
appropriate values. A DirectSOFT32 dialog box makes this easy to do.
In the loop table, the Ramp / Soak Table Pointer at Addr+34 must point to the start of
the ramp/soak data for that loop. This may be anywhere in user memory, and does
not have to adjoin to the Loop Parameter table, as shown to the left. Each R/S table
requires 32 words, regardless of the number of segments programmed.
The ramp/soak table parameters are defined in the table below. Further details are in
the section on Ramp / Soak Operation in this chapter.
Ramp/Soak Table The individual bit definitions of the Ramp / Soak Table Programming Error Flags
Programming Error word (Addr+35) is listed in the following table. Further details are given in the PID
Flags Loop Mode section and in the PV Alarm section later in this chapter.
(Addr + 35)
Bit R/S Error Flag Bit Description Read/ Bit=0 Bit=1
Write
0 Starting Addr out of lower V-memory range read Error
1 Starting Addr out of upper V-memory range read Error
23 Reserved for Future Use
4 Starting Addr in System Parameter read Error
V-memory Range
515 Reserved for Future Use
813
PID Loop Operation
Loop Sample Rates The main tasks of the CPU fall into categories
Addr + 07 as shown to the right. The list represents the
tasks done when the CPU is in Run Mode, on Read
Inputs
each PLC scan. Note that PID loop
calculations occur after the ladder logic task.
Note: It is possible to keep the PID loops Service
running even when the ladder is not. This is Peripherals
done by selecting direct access in
Addr + 36 and placing a 1 in bit 15 of Addr + 00.
Ladder
The sample rate of a control loop is simply the Program
frequency of the PID calculation. Each PLC
Scan
calculation generates a new control output
value. With the DL05 CPU, you can set the Calculate
sample rate of a loop from 50 mS to 99.99 PID Loops
seconds. Most loops do not require a fresh
PID calculation on every PLC scan. Some Internal
loops may need to be calculated only once in Diagnostics
1000 scans.
Maintenance
faster than necessary serve only to waste CPU processing power.
S Slower sample rates provide a rougher control output and less accurate
PV performance, but use less CPU processing time.
S A sample rate which is too slow will cause system instability, particularly
when a change in the setpoint or a disturbance occurs.
As a starting point, determine a sample rate for your loop which will be fast enough to
avoid control instability (which is extremely important). Follow the procedure on the
next page to find a starting sample rate:
814
PID Loop Operation
10%
PV
Rise Time
Sample
Rate
PID Loop Operation
In the figure above, suppose the measured rise time response of the PV was 25
seconds. The suggested sample rate from this measurement will be 2.5 seconds.
For illustration, the sample rate time line shows ten samples within the rise time
period. These show the frequency of PID calculations as the PV changes values. Of
course, the sample rate and PID calculations are continuous during operation.
NOTE: An excessively fast sample rate will diminish the available resolution in the
PV Rate-of-Change Alarm, because the alarm rate value is specified in terms of PV
change per sample period. For example, a 50 mS sample rate means the smallest
and Troubleshooting
Programming the The Loop Parameter table for each loop has a data location for the sample rate.
Sample Rate Referring to the figure below, location V+07 contains a BCD number from 00.05 to
99.99 (with an implied decimal point). This represents 50 mS to 99.99 seconds. This
number may be programmed using DirectSOFT32s PID Setup screen, or any other
method of writing to V-memory. It must be programmed before the loop will operate
properly.
Process Variable
Sample RateV+07
Sample Rate
X X X X BCD 00.05 to 99.99 sec
815
PID Loop Operation
PID Loop Effect Since PID loop calculations are a task within the CPU scan activities, the use of PID
on CPU Scan Time loops will increase the average scan time. The amount of scan time increase is
proportional to the number of loops used and the sample rate of each loop.
The execution time for a single loop PID Calculation Time
calculation depends on the number of Minimum 150 mS
options selected, such as alarms, error
Typical 250 mS
squared, etc. The chart to the right gives
the range of times you can expect. Maximum 350 mS
To calculate scan time increase, we also must know (or estimate) the scan time of
the ladder (without loops). A fast scan time will increase by a smaller percentage
than a slow scan time will, when adding the same PID loop calculation load in each
case. The formula for average scan time calculation is:
For example, suppose the estimated scan time without loop calculations is 50 mS,
and the loop sample time is 3 seconds. Now, calculate the new scan time:
As the calculation shows, the addition of only one loop with a slow sample rate has a
very small effect on scan time. Next, expand the equation above to show the effect of
adding any number of loops:
n=L
Maintenance
In the new equation above, you calculate the summation term (inside the brackets)
for each loop from 1 to L (last loop), and add the right-most term scan time without
loops only once at the end. Suppose you have a DL05 PLC controlling four loops.
The table below shows the data and summation term values for each loop.
Now adding the summation terms, plus the original scan time value, we have:
Avg. Scan Time with PID loops = 50 mS + 0.42 mS + 1.25 mS + 8.3 mS + 50 mS = 50.06 mS
816
PID Loop Operation
The DL05 CPU only does PID calculation on a particular scan for the loop(s) which
have sample time periods that are due for an update (calculation). The built-in loop
scheduler applies the following rules:
S Loops with sample rates 2 seconds are processed at the rate of as
many loops per scan as is required to maintain each loops sample rate.
Specifying loops with fast sample rates will increase the PLC scan time.
So, use this capability only if you need it!
S Loops with sample rates > 2 seconds are processed at the rate of one
or fewer loops per scan, at the minimum rate required to maintain each
loops sample rate.
The implementation of loop calculation scheduling is shown in the flow chart below.
This is a more detailed look at the contents of the Calculate PID Loops task in the
CPU scan activities flow chart. The pointers I and J correspond to the slow (> 2
sec) and fast ( 2 sec) loops, respectively. The flow chart allows the J pointer to
increment from loop 1 to the last loop, if there are any fast loops specified. The I
pointer increments only once per scan, and then only when the next slow loop is due
for an update. In this way, both I and J pointers cycle from 1 to the highest loop
number used, except at different rates. Their combined activity keeps all loops
properly updated.
PID Loop Operation
Loop J
No No Loop I
Sample rate 2 sec?
Time up?
Yes Yes
and Troubleshooting
Loop I
Maintenance
Yes
Step 2: This simply means choosing the method the machine will use to maintain control
Plan Loop over the Process Variables to follow their Setpoints. This involves many issues and
Control Strategy trade-offs, such as energy efficiency, equipment costs, ability to service the machine
during production, and more. You must also determine how to generate the Setpoint
value during the process, and whether a machine operator can change the SP.
Step 3: Assuming the control strategy is sound, it is still crucial to properly size the actuators
Maintenance
The DL05 provides 12bit and 15bit unipolar and bipolar data format
options, and a 16bit unipolar option. This selection affects SP, PV,
Control Output and Integrator sum.
Step 4: After deciding the number of loops, PV variables to measure, and SP values, you
Select I/O Modules can choose the appropriate I/O modules. Refer to the figure on the next page. In
many cases, you will be able to share input or output modules, or use a analog I/O
combination module, among several control loops. The example shown sends the
PV and Control Output signals for two loops through the same set of modules.
We offer DL05 analog input modules with 4 channels per module
that accept 0 20mA or 4 20mA signals. Also, analog input and output combination
modules are now available.
818
PID Loop Operation
DL05 CPU
Input V-memory Digital
Module Output
Loop 1 Data
Channel 1 PV SP OUT Channel 1 Process 1
Loop 2 Data
Channel 2 PV SP OUT Channel 2 Process 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Step 5: After selection and procurement of all loop components and I/O module(s), you can
Wiring and perform the wiring and installation. Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chapter 2 of this
Installation Manual, and to the D0OPTIONSM manual. The most common wiring errors when
installing PID loop controls are:
S Reversing the polarity of sensor or actuator wiring connections.
S Incorrect signal ground connections between loop components.
PID Loop Operation
Step 6: After wiring and installation, choose the loop setup parameters. The easiest method
Loop Parameters for programming the loop tables is using DirectSOFT32 (3.0c or later). This software
provides PID Setup dialog boxes which simplify the task. Note: It is important to
understand the meaning of all loop parameters mentioned in this chapter before
choosing values to enter.
Step 7: With the sensor and actuator wiring done, and loop parameters entered, we must
Check Open Loop manually and carefully check out the new control system (use Manual Mode).
Performance S Verify that the PV value from the sensor is correct.
S If it is safe to do so, gradually increase the control output up above 0%,
and Troubleshooting
Step 8: If the Open Loop Test (see Loop Tuning on page 838) shows the PV reading is
Loop Tuning correct and the control output has the proper effect on the process, you can follow
the closed loop tuning procedure (see Automatic Mode on page 839). In this step,
you tune the loop so the PV automatically follows the SP.
Step 9: If the closed loop test shows the PV will follow small changes in the SP, consider
Run Process Cycle running an actual process cycle. You will need to have completed the programming
which will generate the desired SP in real time. In this step, you may want to run a
small test batch of product through the machine, watching the SP change according
to the recipe.
Step 10: When the loop tests and tuning sessions are complete, be sure to save all loop setup
Save Parameters parameters to disk.
819
PID Loop Operation
Loop Table
V2002 XXXX Setpoint
V2003 XXXX Process Variable
V2005 XXXX Control Output
Data Sources The data for the SP, PV, and Control Output must interface with real-world devices.
Maintenance
Setpoint Sources: Output
Process
Operator Input
Ramp/soak generator Process Variable V+03
Ladder Program Analog
Another loops output (cascade) Input
The Setpoint has several possible sources, as listed above. Many applications will
use two or more of the sources at different times, depending on the loop mode. In
addition, the loop control strategy and programming method also determine how the
setpoint is generated.
When using the built-in Ramp/Soak generator or when cascading a loop, the PID
controller automatically writes the setpoint data in location V+02 for you. If you want
to use a setpoint from any other source, the ladder program must write that
setpoint to the loop table location V+02.
Each of the three main loop parameters can have only one source or destination at
any given time. During the application development, it is a good idea to draw loop
schematic diagrams showing data sources, etc., to help avoid mistakes.
820
PID Loop Operation
Direct Access The loop controller in the DL05 PLC has the ability to directly access analog input
to Analog I/O and output values independent of the ladder logic scan. These values represent the
process variable (PV) and the control output. The Direct Access feature makes it
possible for the loop controller to perform closed-loop control while the CPU is in
Program Mode.
The loop controller can read the analog PV value in the selected data format directly
from the desired analog input module and write the control output value in the same or
a different data format to the desired analog output. The Direct Access feature, when
enabled, accesses the analog values only once per PID calculation for each
respective loop. The ladder logic, however, may simultaneously access the same
analog input data by the standard method (LD instruction) or by the pointer method
whenever the CPU is in Run Mode.
NOTE: If PID direct access is used, do not use the analog output pointer logic to send
data to the outputs.
You may optionally configure each loop to access its analog I/O (PV and control
output) by placing proper values in the associated loop table registers. The figure
below shows the loop table parameters at V+36 and V+37 and their role in direct
access to the analog values.
+ S Calculation
-
Process Variable V+03
Loop Table
V2036 0F XX Slot / channel number for PV
V2037 0F XX Slot / channel number for Output
0F XX
and Troubleshooting
Channel number, 1 to 4
Maintenance
You may program these loop table parameters directly, or use the appropriate
DirectSOFT32 dialog box for easy configuring. For example, a value of 0F02 in
register V2036 directs the loop controller to read the PV data from channel 1 of the
analog input module. A value of 0000 in either register tells the loop controller not to
access the corresponding analog value directly. In that case, ladder logic must
transfer the value between the loop table and the analog input module.
If the PV or control output values require some math manipulation by ladder logic,
then it will not be possible to use the direct access function of the loop controller. In
this case, ladder logic will have to perform the math and transfer the data from the
analog module as required.
NOTE: The loop controller restricts the transfer of analog data to or from the module
to one method. In other words, you must designate the analog module for direct
access or ladder logic access.
821
PID Loop Operation
Loop Modes The DL05 gives you the three standard control modes: Manual, Automatic, and
Cascade. The sources of the three basic variables SP, PV, and control output are
different for each mode. An introduction to the three control modes and their signal
sources follows.
In Manual Mode, the loop is not executing PID calculations (however, loop alarms
are still active). With regard to the loop table, the CPU stops writing values to location
V+05 for that loop. It is expected that an operator or other intelligent source is
manually controlling the output, by observing the PV and writing data to V+05 as
necessary to keep the process under control. The drawing below shows the
equivalent schematic diagram of manual mode operation.
In Automatic Mode, the loop operates normally and generates new control output
values. It calculates the PID equation and writes the result in location V+05 every
sample period of that loop. The equivalent schematic diagram is shown below.
In Cascade Mode, the loop operates as it does in Automatic Mode, with one
important difference. The data source for the SP changes from its normal location at
V+02, using the control output value from another loop. So in Auto or Manual modes,
the loop calculation uses the data at V+02. In Cascade Mode, the loop calculation
reads the control output from another loops parameter table.
Maintenance
Another loop Cascaded loop
As pictured below, A loop can be changed from one mode to another, but cannot go
from Manual Mode directly to Cascade, or vice versa. This mode change is
prohibited because a loop would be changing two data sources at the same time,
and could cause a loss of control.
CPU Modes and The DL05 PLC has the ability to run PID calculations while the CPU is in Program
Loop Modes Mode. Usually, a CPU in Program Mode has halted all operations. However, a DL05
PLC in Program Mode may or may not be running PID calculations (and providing
PID control output), depending on your configuration settings. Having the ability to
run loops independent of the ladder logic makes it feasible to make a ladder logic
change while the process is still running. This is especially beneficial for large-mass
continuous processes that are difficult or costly to interrupt.
Loops that run independent of the ladder scan must have the ability to directly
access the analog module channels for the PV and control output values. The loop
controller does have this capability, which is covered in the section on direct access
of analog I/O (located prior to this section in this chapter).
The relationship between CPU modes and loop modes is depicted in the figure
below. The vertical dashed line shows the optional relationship between the mode
changes. Bit 15 of PID Mode 1 setting word (V+00) determines the selection. If set to
zero so the loop follows the CPU mode, then placing the CPU in Program Mode will
force all loops into Manual Mode. Similarly, placing the CPU in Run mode will allow
each loop to return to the mode it was in previously (which includes Manual,
Automatic, and Cascade). With this selection you automatically affect the modes of
the loops by changing the CPU mode.
CPU Modes:
PID Loop Operation
Mode change
Program Run
Loop
and Troubleshooting
Modes:
Maintenance
If Bit 15 is set to one, then the loops will run independent of the CPU mode. It is like
having two independent processors in the CPU... one is running ladders and the
other is running the process loops.
NOTE: To make changes to any loop table parameter values, the PID loop must be
in Manual Mode and the PLC must be stopped. If you have selected (as shown
above) to operate the PID loop independent of the CPU mode, then you must take
certain steps to make it possible to make loop parameter changes. You can
temporarily make the loops follow the CPU mode by changing bit 15 to 0. Then your
programming device (such as DirectSOFT32) will be able to place the loop into
Manual Mode. After you change the loops parameter setting, just restore bit 15 to a
value of 1 to re-establish PID operation independent of the CPU.
823
PID Loop Operation
How to Change The first three bits of the PID Mode 1 word PID Mode 1 Setting V+00
Loop Modes (V+00) request the operating mode of the
corresponding loop. Note: these bits are Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mode change requests, not commands
(certain conditions can prohibit a
Cascade Manual
particular mode change see next page).
Automatic
The normal state of these mode request bits is 000. To request a mode change, you
must SET the corresponding bit to a 1, for one scan. The PID loop controller
automatically resets the bits back to 000 after it reads the mode change request.
Methods of requesting mode changes are:
S DirectSOFT32s PID View this is the easiest method. Click on one of
the radio buttons, and DirectSOFT32 sets the appropriate bit.
S HPP Use Word Status (WD ST) to monitor the contents of V+00,
which will be a 4-digit BCD/hex value. You must calculate and enter a
new value for V+00 that ORs the correct mode bit with its current value.
S Ladder program ladder logic can request any loop mode when the
PLC is in Run Mode. This will be necessary after application startup.
Use the program shown to the right to SET Go to Auto Mode
the mode bit on (do not use an out coil). On X0 B2000.1
Maintenance
Input from Operator
Control Output
from another loop Cascade Control Output
Setpoint Error Term Loop
+ S Calculation
Normal Source Auto/Cascade
Auto/Manual Process Variable
Mode Select
PID Mode
Control
PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 Loop Mode and Alarm Status V+06
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Operator Panel Since the modes Manual, Auto, and Cascade are the most fundamental and
Control of important PID loop controls, you may want to hard-wire mode control switches to
PID Modes an operators panel. Most applications will need only Manual and Auto selections
(Cascade is used in a few advanced applications). Remember that mode controls
are really mode request bits, and the actual loop mode is indicated elsewhere.
The following figure shows an operators panel using momentary push-buttons to
request PID mode changes. The panels mode indicators do not connect to the
switches, but interface to the corresponding data locations.
Auto
Mode Request Mode Monitoring
Cascade
PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 Loop Mode and Alarm Status V+06
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PLC Modes Effect If you have selected the option for the loops to follow the PLC mode, the PLC modes
on Loop Modes (Program, Run) interact with the loops as a group. The following summarizes this
PID Loop Operation
interaction:
S When the PLC is in Program Mode, all loops are placed in Manual Mode
and no loop calculations occur. However, note that output modules
(including analog outputs) turn off in PLC Program Mode. So, actual
manual control is not possible when the PLC is in Program Mode.
S The only time the CPU will allow a loop mode change is during PLC run
Mode operation. As such, the CPU records the modes of all 16 loops as
the desired mode of operation. If power failure and restoration occurs
during PLC Run Mode, the CPU returns all loops to their prior mode
(which could be Manual, Auto, or Cascade).
and Troubleshooting
S You can add and configure new loops only when the PLC is in Program
Mode. New loops automatically begin in Manual Mode.
Loop Mode In normal conditions the mode of a loop is determined by the request to V+00, bits 0,
Override 1, and 2. However, some conditions exist which will prevent a requested mode
change from occurring:
S A loop that is not set independent of PLC mode cannot change modes
when the PLC is in Program mode.
S A major loop of a cascaded pair of loops cannot go from Manual to Auto
until its minor loop is in Cascade mode.
In other situations, the PID loop controller will automatically change the mode of the
loop to ensure safe operation:
S A loop which develops an error condition automatically goes to Manual.
S If the minor loop of a cascaded pair of loops leaves Cascade Mode for
any reason, its major loop automatically goes to Manual Mode.
825
PID Loop Operation
Bumpless In process control, the word transfer has a particular meaning. A loop transfer
Transfers occurs when we change its mode of operation, as shown below. When we change
loop modes, what we are really doing is causing a transfer of control of some loop
parameter from one source to another. For example, when a loop changes from
Manual Mode to Automatic Mode, control of the output changes from the operator to
the loop controller. When a loop changes from Automatic Mode to Cascade Mode,
control of the SP changes from its original source in Auto Mode to the output of
another loop (the major loop).
SP Transfer SP
generated generated
local to loop remotely by
major loop
The basic problem of loop transfers is the two different sources of the loop parameter
Maintenance
The characteristics of Bumpless I and II transfer types are listed in the chart below.
Note that their operation also depends on which PID algorithm you are using, the
position or velocity form of the PID equation. Note that you must use Bumpless
Transfer type I when using the velocity form of the PID algorithm.
Select data
01 12 bit bipolar 0 to 0FFF, 8FFF to 8001
format using
(0 to 4095, 4095 to 1)
bits 0 and 1.
10 15 bit unipolar 0 to 32767
The data format is a very powerful setting, because it determines the numerical
interface between the PID loop and the PV sensor, and the Control Output device.
The Setpoint must also be in the same data format. Normally, the data format is
and Troubleshooting
chosen during the initial loop configuration and is not changed again.
Maintenance
Choosing Unipolar Choosing the data format involves deciding whether to use unipolar or bipolar
or Bipolar Format numbers. Most applications such as temperature control will use only positive
numbers, and therefore need unipolar format. Usually it is the Control Output which
determines bipolar/unipolar selection. For example, velocity control may include
control of forward and reverse directions. At a zero velocity setpoint the desired
control output is also zero. In that case, bipolar format must be used.
Unipolar Bipolar
827
PID Loop Operation
Handling In many batch process applications, sensors or actuators interface to DL05 analog
Data Offsets modules using 420 mA signals. This signal type has a built-in 20% offset, because
the zero-point is a 4 mA instead of 0 mA. However, remember the analog modules
convert the signals into data and remove the offset at the same time. For example, a
420 mA signal is often converted to 0000 0FFF hex, or 0 to 4095 decimal. In this
case, all you need to do is choose 12-bit unipolar data format, and make sure the
ladder program copies the data appropriately between the loop table and the analog
modules.
S PV Offset In the event you have a PV value with a 20% offset, convert
it to zerooffset by subtracting 20% of the top of its range, and multiply
by1.25.
S Control Output In the event the Control Output is going to a device
with 20% offset, all you need to do is have the ladder program write a
value equivalent to the offset to the integrator register (V+04), before
transitioning from Manual to Auto mode. The loop will then see this
offset as a part of the process, taking care of it for you automatically.
Setpoint (SP) The Setpoint in loop table location V+02 represents the desired value of the process
Limits variable. After selecting the data format for these variables, you can set limits on the
range of SP values which the loop calculation will use. Many loops have two or more
possible sources writing the Setpoint at various times, and the limits you set will help
safeguard the process from the effects of a bad SP value.
No
Limits
0
Control
Setpoint Loop Output
With + S Calculation
1
Limits
Maintenance
Process Variable (PV)
Loop Table
V+26 XXXX SP Lower Limit PID Mode 2 Setting V+01
V+27 XXXX SP Upper Limit
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SP Limits enable
The loop calculation checks these SP upper and lower limits before each
calculation. This means ladder logic can change the limit settings while a process is
in progress, allowing you to keep a tighter guard band on the SP input value.
828
PID Loop Operation
Remote Setpoint You may recall there are generally several possible data sources for the SP value.
(SP) Location The PID loop controller has the built-in ability to select between two sources
according to the current loop mode. Refer to the figure below. A loop reads its
setpoint from table location V+02 in Auto or Manual modes. If you plan to use
Cascade Mode for the loop at any time, then you must program its loop parameter
table with a remote setpoint pointer.
The Remote SP pointer resides in location V+32 in the loop table. For loops that will
be cascaded (made a minor loop), you will need to program this location with the
address of the major loops Control Output address. Find the starting location of the
major loops parameter table and add offset +05 to it.
Loop Table
V+32 XXXX Remote SP Pointer
Another loop
(major loop) Cascaded loop
Cascade (minor loop)
Loop Control Output V+05
Calculation Control Output
Setpoint Loop
+ S Calculation
Normal SP V+02
Auto/Manual Process Variable
PID Loop Operation
A DirectSOFT32 Loop Setup dialog box will allow you to enter the Remote SP
pointer if you know the address. Otherwise, you can enter it with a HPP or program it
through ladder logic using the LDA instruction.
Process Variable The process variable input to each loop is the value the loop is ultimately trying to
(PV) Configuration control, to make it equal to the setpoint and follow setpoint changes as quickly as
possible. Most sensors for process variables have a primarily linear response curve.
Most temperature sensors are mostly linear across their sensing range. However,
flow sensing using an orifice plate technique gives a signal representing
(approximately) the square of the flow. Therefore, a square-root extract function is
and Troubleshooting
necessary before using the signal in a linear control system (such as PID).
Maintenance
Some flow transducers are available which will do the square-root extract, but they
add cost to the sensor package. The PID loop PV input has a selectable square-root
extract function, pictured below. You can select between normal (linear) PV data,
and data needing a square-root extract by using PID Mode setting V+00 word, bit 6.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Linear/Square-root PV select
829
PID Loop Operation
Control Output The Control Output is the numerical result of the PID calculation. All of the other
Configuration parameter choices ultimately influence the value of a loops Control Output for each
calculation. Some final processing selections dedicated to the Control Output are
available, shown below. At the far right of the figure, the final output may be restricted
by lower and upper limits that you program. The values for V+30 and V+31 may be
set once using DirectSOFT32s PID Setup dialog box.
With
Normal Output
0 Limits
Setpoint Loop Control Output
+ S Calculation
Inverted Output 1
Process Variable
Maintenance
Loop Table
PID Mode 1 Setting V+00
V+30 XXXX Control Output Lower Limit
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 V+31 XXXX Control Output Upper Limit
Error Term The Error term is internal to the CPUs PID loop controller, and is generated again in
Configuration each PID calculation. Although its data is not directly accessible, you can easily
calculate it by subtracting: Error = (SPPV). If the PV square-root extract is enabled,
then Error = (SP (sqrt(PV)). In any case, the size of the error and algebraic sign
determine the next change of the control output for each PID calculation.
Now we will superimpose some special effects on to the error term as described.
Refer to the diagram below. Bit 7 of the PID Mode Setting 1 V+00 word lets you select
a linear or squared error term, and bit 8 enables or disables the error deadband.
NOTE: When first configuring a loop, its best to use the standard error term. After
the loop is tuned, then you will be able to tell if these functions will enhance control.
Error Error
0 0
Error
Setpoint Term Loop
+ S Error Error with Calculation
1 1
squared Deadband
Process Variable
PID Loop Operation
Error Squared When selected, the squared error function simply squares the
error term (but preserves the original algebraic sign), which is used in the
calculation. This affects the Control Output by diminishing its response to smaller
error values, but maintaining its response to larger errors. Some situations in which
and Troubleshooting
S Noisy PV signal using a squared error term can reduce the effect of
low-frequency electrical noise on the PV, which will make the control
system jittery. A squared error maintains the response to larger errors.
S Non-linear process some processes (such as chemical pH control)
require non-linear controllers for best results. Another application is
surge tank control, where the Control Output signal must be smooth.
Error Deadband When selected, the error deadband function takes a range of
small error values near zero, and simply substitutes zero as the value of the error. If
the error is larger than the deadband range, then the error value is used normally.
Loop parameter location V+23 must be programmed with a desired deadband
amount. Units are the same as the SP and PV units (0 to FFF in 12-bit mode, and 0 to
7FFF in 15-bit mode). The PID loop controller automatically applies the deadband
symmetrically about the zero-error point.
831
PID Loop Operation
PID Algorithms
The ProportionalIntegralDerivative (PID) algorithm is widely used in process
control. The PID method of control adapts well to electronic solutions, whether
implemented in analog or digital (CPU) components. The DL05 CPU implements the
PID equations digitally by solving the basic equations in software. I/O modules serve
only to convert electronic signals into digital form (or vise-versa).
The DL05 features two types of PID controls: position and velocity. These terms
usually refer to motion control situations, but here we use them in a different sense:
S PID Position Algorithm The control output is calculated so it responds
to the displacement (position) of the PV from the SP (error term).
S PID Velocity Algorithm The control output is calculated to represent
the rate of change (velocity) for the PV to become equal to the SP.
The majority of applications will use the position form of the PID equation. If you are
not sure of which algorithm to use, try the Position Algorithm first. Use
DirectSOFT32s PID View Setup dialog box to select the desired algorithm. Or, use
bit 5 of PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word as shown below to select the algorithm.
Loop Calculation
0
Position Algorithm
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Maintenance
Position Algorithm The Position Algorithm causes the PID equation to calculate the Control Output Mn:
n
Mn = Kc * en + Ki * S ei + Kr * (en en1) + Mo
i=1
In the formula above, the sum of the integral terms and the initial output are
combined into the Bias term, Mx. Using the bias term, we define formulas for the
Bias and Control Output as a function of sampling time:
Mxo =Mo
Mxn =Ki * en + Mxn1
n
Mn = Ki * S ei + Mo
i=1
Mn = Kc * en + Kr * (en en1) + Mxn.....Output for sampling time n
832
PID Loop Operation
Bias
Term
The initial output is the output value assumed from Manual mode control when the
loop transitioned to Auto Mode. The sum of the initial output and the integral term is
the bias term, which holds the position of the output. Accordingly, the Velocity
Algorithm discussed next does not have a bias component.
Velocity Algorithm The Velocity Algorithm form of the PID equation can be obtained by transforming
and Troubleshooting
Position Algorithm formula with subtraction of the equation of (n1)th degree from
the equation of nth degree.
Maintenance
Ts = Sample rate
Kc = Proportional gain
Ki = Kc * (Ts/Ti) = coefficient of integral term
Kr = Kc * (Td/Ts) = coefficient of derivative term
Ti = Reset time (integral time)
Td = Rate time (derivative time)
SPn = Set Point for sampling time n (SP value)
PVn = Process variable for sampling time n (PV)
en = SPn PVn = Error term for sampling time n
Mn = Control Output for sampling time n
The resulting equations for the Velocity Algorithm form of the PID equation are:
DMn =Mn Mn1
DMn = Kc * (en en1) + Ki * en + Kr * (en 2*en1 +en2)
833
PID Loop Operation
Direct-Acting and The gain of a process determines, in part, how it must be controlled. The process
Reverse-Acting shown in the diagram below has a positive gain, which we call direct-acting. This
Loops means that when the control output increases, the process variable also eventually
increases. Of course, a true process is usually a complex transfer function that
includes time delays. Here, we are only interested in the direction of change of the
process variable in response to a control output change.
Most process loops will be direct-acting, such as a temperature loop. An increase in
the heat applied increases the PV (temperature). Accordingly, direct-acting loops
are sometimes called heating loops.
A reverse-acting loop is one in which the process has a negative gain, as shown
below. An increase in the control output results in a decrease in the PV. This is
commonly found in refrigeration controls, where an increase in the cooling input
causes a decrease in the PV (temperature). Accordingly, reverse-acting loops are
sometimes called cooling loops.
Maintenance
as direct-acting. One easy way to find out is to run the loop in Manual Mode, where
you must manually generate control output values. Observe whether the PV goes up
or down in response to a step increase in the control output.
To run a loop in Auto or Cascade Mode, the control output must be correctly
programmed (refer to the previous section on Control Output Configuration). Use
normal output for direct-acting loops, and inverted output for reverse-acting
loops. To compensate for a reverse-acting loop, the PID controller must know to
invert the control output. If you have a choice, configure and wire the loop to be
direct-acting. This will make it easier to view and interpret loop data during the loop
tuning process.
834
PID Loop Operation
P-I-D Loop Terms You may recall the introduction of the position and velocity forms of the PID loop
equations. The equations basically show the three components of the PID
calculation. The following figure shows a schematic form of the PID calculation, in
which the control output is the sum of the proportional, integral and derivative terms.
On each calculation of the loop, each term receives the same error signal value.
Loop Calculation
P
Setpoint Error Term + Control Output
+ S I + S
D +
Process Variable
The role of the P, I, and D terms in the control task are as follows:
S Proportional the proportional term simply responds proportionally to
the current size of the error. This loop controller calculates a
proportional term value for each PID calculation. When the error is zero,
the proportional term is also zero.
S Integral the integrator (or reset) term integrates (sums) the error
values. Starting from the first PID calculation after entering Auto Mode,
the integrator keeps a running total of the error values. For the position
form of the PID equation, when the loop reaches equilibrium and there
PID Loop Operation
The P, I, and D terms work together as a team. To do that effectively, they will need
some additional instructions from us. The figure below shows the P, I, and D terms
contain programmable gain values kp, ki, and kd respectively. The values reside in
and Troubleshooting
the loop table in the locations shown. The goal of the loop tuning process (covered
later) is to derive gain values that result in good overall loop performance.
Maintenance
NOTE: The proportional gain is also simply called gain, in PID loop terminology.
Loop Calculation
kp P
Process Variable kd D
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Units select
In DirectSOFT32s trend view, you can program the gain values and units in realtime
while the loop is running. This is typically done only during the loop tuning process.
Proportional Gain This is the most basic gain of the three. Values range from
0000 to 9999, but they are used internally as xx.xx. An entry of 0000 effectively
removes the proportional term from the PID equation. This accommodates
applications which need integral-only loops.
Maintenance
NOTE: It is very important to know how to increase and decrease the gains. The
proportional and derivative gains are as one might expect... smaller numbers
produce less gains and larger numbers produce more gain. However, the integral
term has a reciprocal gain(1/Ts), so smaller numbers produce more gain and larger
numbers produce less gain. This is very important to know during loop tuning.
Using a Subset of Each of the P, I, and D gains allows a setting to eliminate that term from the PID
PID Control equation. Many applications actually work best by using a subset of PID control. The
figure below shows the various combinations of PID control offered on the DL05. We
do not recommend using any other combination of control, because most of them
are inherently unstable.
P P
+ + + +
I + S I + S P S I S
D +
836
PID Loop Operation
Derivative Gain The derivative term is unique in that it has an optional gain-limiting feature. This is
Limiting provided because the derivative term reacts badly to PV signal noise or other causes
of sudden PV fluctuations. The function of the gain-limiting is shown in the diagram
below. Use bit 9 of PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word to enable the gain limit.
Loop Calculation
Proportional
P
Control
Setpoint Error Term Integral + Output
+ S I + S
+
Derivative
D 0
Process Variable
Derivative, 1
gain-limited
The derivative gain limit in location V+25 must have a value between 0 and 20, in
BCD format. This setting is operational only when the enable bit = 1.
The gain limit can be particularly useful during loop tuning. Most loops can tolerate
only a little derivative gain without going into wild oscillations.
Bias Term In the widely-used position form of the PID equation, an important component of the
control output value is the bias term shown below. Its location in the loop table is in
V+04. the loop controller writes a new bias term after each loop calculation.
and Troubleshooting
n
Mn = Kc * en + Ki * S ei + Kr * (en en1) + Mo
Maintenance
i=1
If we cause the error (en) to go to zero for two or more sample periods, the
proportional and derivative terms cancel. The bias term is the sum of the integral
term and the initial output (Mo). It represents the steady, constant part of the control
output value, and is similar to the DC component of a complex signal waveform.
The bias term value establishes a working region for the control output. When the
error fluctuates around its zero point, the output fluctuates around the bias value.
This concept is very important, because it shows us why the integrator term must
respond more slowly to errors than either the proportional or derivative terms.
837
PID Loop Operation
Bias Freeze The term reset windup refers to an undesirable characteristic of integrator
behavior which occurs naturally under certain conditions. Refer to the figure below.
Suppose the PV signal becomes disconnected, and the PV value goes to zero.
While this is a serious loop fault, it is made worse by reset windup. Notice the bias
(reset) term keeps integrating normally during the PV disconnect, until its upper limit
is reached. When the PV signal returns, the bias value is saturated (windup) and
takes a long time to return to normal. The loop output consequently has an extended
recovery time. Until recovery, the output level is wrong and causes further problems.
PV
PV loss PV loss
0
Reset windup Freeze bias enabled
Bias
Output
NOTE: The bias freeze feature stops the bias term from changing when the control
Maintenance
output reaches the end of the data range. If you have set limits on the control output
other than the range (i.e, 04095 for a unipolar/12bit loop), the bias term still uses the
end of range for the stopping point and bias freeze will not work.
In the feedforward method discussed later in this chapter, ladder logic writes directly
to the bias term value. However, there is no conflict with the freeze bias feature,
because bias term writes due to feedforward are relatively infrequent when in use.
838
PID Loop Operation
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the process
should make changes that affect the loop tuning constants. Using the loop auto tune
procedures will affect the process, including inducing large changes in the control
output value. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to
minimize the risk of injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The auto tune in the
DL05 is not intended to perform as a replacement for your process knowledge.
PID Loop Operation
Open-Loop Test Whether you use manual or auto tuning, it is very important to verify basic
characteristics of a newly-installed process before attempting to tune it. With the
loop in Manual Mode, verify the following items for each new loop.
S Setpoint verify the source which is to generate the setpoint can do so.
You can put the PLC in Run Mode, but leave the loop in Manual Mode.
Then monitor the loop table location V+02 to see the SP value(s). The
ramp/soak generator (if you are using it) should be tested now.
S Process Variable verify the PV value is an accurate measurement,
and Troubleshooting
and the PV data arriving in the loop table location V+03 is correct. If the
Maintenance
The discussion beginning on the following page covers the manual tuning
procedure. If want to perform only auto tuning, please skip the next section and
proceed directly to the section on auto tuning.
839
PID Loop Operation
Manual Tuning Now comes the exciting moment when we actually close the loop (go to Auto Mode)
Procedure for the first time. Use the following checklist before switching to Auto mode:
S Monitor the loop parameters with a loop trending instrument. We
recommend using the PID view feature of DirectSOFT.
NOTE: We recommend using the PID trend view setup menu to select the vertical
scale feature to manual, for both SP/PV area and Bias/Control Output areas. The
auto scaling feature will otherwise change the vertical scale on the process
parameters and add confusion to the loop tuning process.
S Adjust the gains so the Proportional Gain = 10, Integrator Gain = 9999,
and Derivative Gain =0000. This disables the integrator and derivative
terms, and provides a little proportional gain.
S Check the bias term value in the loop parameter table (V+04). If it is not
zero, then write it to zero using DirectSOFT32 or HPP, etc.
Now we can transition the loop to Auto Mode. Check the mode monitoring bits to
verify its true mode. If the loop will not stay in Auto Mode, check the troubleshooting
tips at the end of this chapter.
CAUTION: If the PV and Control Output values begin to oscillate, reduce the gain
values immediately. If the loop does not stabilize immediately, then transfer the loop
S If the control output value changed, the loop should be getting more
Maintenance
energy from the actuator, heater, or other device. Soon the PV should
move in the direction of the SP. If the PV does not change, then
increase the proportional gain until it moves slightly.
S Now, add a small amount of integral gain. Remember that large
numbers are small integrator gains and small numbers are large
integrator gains! After this step, the PV should = SP, or be very close.
Until this point we have only used proportional and integrator gains. Now we can
bump the process (change the SP by 10%), and adjust the gains so the PV has an
optimal response. Refer to the figure below. Adjust the gains according to what you
see on the PID trend view. The critically- damped response shown gives the fastest
PV response without oscillating.
840
PID Loop Operation
Now you may want to add a little derivative gain to further improve the
critically-damped response above. Note the proportional and integral gains will be
PID Loop Operation
very close to their final values at this point. Adding some derivative action will allow
you to increase the proportional gain slightly without causing loop oscillations. The
derivative action tends to tame the proportional response slightly, so adjust these
gains together.
Auto Tuning Autotuning is initiated within DirectSOFT32. You can use autotuning to establish
Procedure initial PID parameter values (autotuning is not run continuously during operation).
Whenever a substantial change in loop dynamics occurs (mass of process, size of
actuator, etc.), you will need to repeat the tuning procedure to derive the new gains
that are required for optimal control.
and Troubleshooting
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the process
Maintenance
should make changes that affect the loop tuning constants. Using the loop auto
tuning procedures will affect the process, including inducing large changes in the
control output value. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes
to minimize the risk of injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The auto tune in
the DL05 is not intended to perform as a replacement for your process knowledge.
The loop controller offers both closed-loop and open-loop methods. If you intend to
use the auto tune feature, we recommend you use the open-loop method first. This
will permit you to use the closed-loop method of auto tuning when the loop is
operational (Auto Mode) and cannot be shut down (Manual Mode). The following
sections describe how to use the auto tuning feature, and what occurs in open and
closed-loop auto tuning.
841
PID Loop Operation
The controls for the auto tuning function use three bits in the PID Mode 2 word V+01,
as shown below. DirectSOFT32 will manipulate these bits automatically when you
use the auto tune feature within DirectSOFT. Or, you may have ladder logic access
these bits directly for allowing control from another source such as a dedicated
operator interface. The individual control bits let you to start the auto tune procedure,
select PID or PI tuning, and select closed-loop or open-loop tuning. If you select PI
tuning, the auto tune procedure leaves the derivative gain at 0. The Loop Mode and
Alarm Status word V+06 reports the auto tune status as shown. Bit 12 will be on (1)
when during the auto tuning cycle, automatically returning to off (0) when done.
Auto Tune Function
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Maintenance
Control
Setpoint Value Error Term Loop Output Manufacturing
+ S Calculation Process
Process Variable
NOTE: In theory, the SP value does not matter in this case, because the loop is not
closed. However, the firmware requires that the SP value be more than 205 counts
away from the PV value before starting the auto tune cycle (205 counts or more
below the SP for forward-acting loops, or 205 counts or more above the SP for
reverse-acting loops).
When auto tuning, the loop controller induces a step change on the output and
simply observes the response of the PV. From the PV response, the auto tune
function calculates the gains and the sample time. It automatically places the results
in the corresponding registers in the loop table.
842
PID Loop Operation
The following timing diagram shows the events which occur in the open-loop auto
tuning cycle. The auto tune function takes control of the control output and induces a
10%-of-span step change. If the PV change which the loop controller observes is
less than 2%, then the step change on the output is increased to 20%-of-span.
Open Loop Auto Tune Cycle Wave: Step Response Method
PV
Tangent Rr = Slope
(%)
SP
Process Wave
Base Line
LrRr
(%)
Lr
(sec.)
Time (sec)
Step Change Dm=10%
Output Value
(%)
When the loop tuning observations are complete, the loop controller computes Rr
(maximum slope in %/sec.) and Lr (dead time in sec). The auto tune function
computes the gains according to the Ziegler-Nichols equations, shown below:
PID tuning: PI tuning:
and Troubleshooting
I = 2.0 * Lr I = 3.33 * Lr
D = 0.5 * Lr D=0
Sample Rate = 0.056 * Lr Sample Rate = 0.12 * Lr
We highly recommend using DirectSOFT32 for the auto tuning interface. The
duration of each auto tuning cycle will depend on the mass of our process. A
slowly-changing PV will result in a longer auto tune cycle time. When the auto tuning
is complete, the proportional, integral, and derivative gain values are automatically
updated in loop table locations V+10, V+11, and V+12 respectively. The sample time
in V+07 is also updated automatically. You can test the validity of the values the auto
tuning procedure yields by measuring the closed-loop response of the PV to a step
change in the output. The instructions on how to do this are in the section on the
manual tuning procedure (located prior to this section on auto tuning).
843
PID Loop Operation
Closed-Loop Auto Tuning During a closed-loop auto tuning cycle, the loop
controller operates as shown in the diagram below.
PLC System
Process Variable
Control
Setpoint Value Error Term Loop Output Manufacturing
+ S Calculation Process
Process Variable
When auto tuning, the loop controller imposes a square wave on the output. Each
transition of the output occurs when the PV value crosses over (or under) the SP
value. Therefore, the frequency of the limit cycle is roughly proportional to the mass
of the process. From the PV response, the auto tune function calculates the gains
and the sample time. It automatically places the results in the corresponding
registers in the loop table.
SP
Process Wave
Maintenance
PV
Output Value
To
PID Cycle PID Cycle
Auto Tune Cycle
When the loop tuning observations are complete, the loop controller computes To
(bump period) and Xo (amplitude of the PV). Then it uses these values to compute
Kpc (sensitive limit) and Tpc (period limit). From these values, the loop controller
auto tune function computes the PID gains and the sample rate according to the
Ziegler-Nichols equations shown below:
M = amplitude of output
Auto tuning error if the auto tune error bit (bit 13 of Loop Mode and Alarm status
word V+06) is on, please verify the PV and SP values are within 5% of full scale
difference, as required by the auto tune function. The bit will also turn on if the
closed-loop method is in use, and the output goes to the limits of the range.
NOTE: If your PV fluctuates rapidly, you probably need to use the built-in analog filter
PID Loop Operation
(see page 845) or create a filter in ladder logic (see example on page 846).
Tuning In tuning cascaded loops, we will need to de-couple the cascade relationship and
Cascaded Loops tune the loops individually, using one of the loop tuning procedures previously
covered.
1. If you are not using auto tuning, then find the loop sample rate for the
minor loop, using the method discussed earlier in this chapter. Then set
the sample rate of the major loop slower than the minor loop by a factor
of 10. Use this as a starting point.
and Troubleshooting
Maintenance
2. Tune the minor loop first. Leave the major loop in Manual Mode, and
you will need to generate SP changes for the minor loop manually as
described in the loop tuning procedure.
4. In this step, you will need to get the minor loop in Cascade Mode, and
then the Major loop in Auto Mode. We will be tuning the major loop with
the minor loop treated as a series component its overall process.
Therefore, do not go back and tune the minor loop again while tuning
the major loop.
5. Tune the major loop, following the standard loop tuning procedure in
this section. The response of the major loop PV is actually the overall
response of the cascaded loops together.
845
PID Loop Operation
PV Analog Filter
A noisy PV signal can make tuning difficult and can cause the control output to be
more extreme than necessary, as the output tries to respond to the peaks and
valleys of the PV. There are two equivalent methods of filtering the PV input to make
the loop more stable. The first method is accomplished using the DL05s built-in
filter. The second method achieves a similar result using ladder logic.
The DL05 Built-in The DL05 provides a selectable first-order low-pass PV input filter which can be
Analog Filter particularly helpful during auto tuning, using the closed-loop method. Shown in the
figure below, we strongly recommend the use of a filter during auto tuning. You
may disable the filter after auto tuning is complete, or continue to use it if the PV input
signal is noisy.
Bit 2 of PID Mode Setting 2 provides the enable/disable control for the low-pass PV
filter (0=disable, 1=enable). The roll-off frequency of the single-pole low-pass filter is
controlled by using register V+24 in the loop parameter table, the filter constant. The
data format of the filter constant value is BCD, with an implied decimal point 00X.X,
as follows:
Maintenance
S The filter constant has a valid range of 000.1 to 001.0.
S DirectSOFT32 converts values above the valid range to 001.0 and
values below this range to 000.1
S Values close to 001.0 result in higher roll-off frequencies, while values
closer to 000.1 result in lower roll-off frequencies.
We highly recommend using DirectSOFT32 for the auto tuning interface. The
duration of each auto tuning cycle will depend on the mass of your process. A
slowly-changing PV will result in a longer auto tune cycle time.
When the auto tuning is complete, the proportional, integral, and derivative gain
values are automatically updated in loop table locations V+10, V+11, and V+12
respectively. The sample time in V+07 is also updated automatically. You can test
the validity of the values the auto tuning procedure yields by measuring the
closed-loop response of the PV to a step change in the output. The instructions on
how to do this are in the section on the manual tuning procedure.
846
PID Loop Operation
V2200 V2003 If the raw analog input (V2200 in our example) is greater
LD than or equal to the current PV value in the PID Loop Table
V2200 (V2003), load the raw analog input into the accumulator.
SUB Subtract the Loop Table PV value from the raw
V2003 analog input.
MUL
V1400 The MUL and DIV instructions have the
combined effect of multiplying by a decimal
DIV number between 0.1 and 1.0.
K10
MUL
V1400 The MUL and DIV instructions have the
combined effect of multiplying by a decimal
DIV number between 0.1 and 1.0.
K10
ADD Add the adjusted difference (between the raw analog input
V2200 and the PV) back to the analog input value.
Feedforward Control
Feedforward control is an enhancement to standard closed-loop control. It is most
useful for diminishing the effects of a quantifiable and predictable loop disturbance
or sudden change in setpoint. Use of this feature is an option available to you on the
DL05. However, its best to implement and tune a loop without feedforward, and
adding it only if better loop performance is still needed. The term feed-forward
refers to the control technique involved, shown in the diagram below. The incoming
setpoint value is fed forward around the PID equation, and summed with the output.
Feedforward path
kf
+
Setpoint Loop Control Output
+ S Calculation + S
Process Variable
In the previous section on the bias term, we said that the bias term value establishes
a working region or operating point for the control output. When the error fluctuates
around its zero point, the output fluctuates around the bias value. Now, when there
Maintenance
offset disturbances.
S Proper use of feedforward will allow us to reduce the integrator gain.
Reducing integrator gain gives us an even more stable control system.
Feedforward is very easy to use in the DL05 loop controller, as shown below. The
bias term has been made available to the user in a special read/write location, at PID
Parameter Table location V+04.
Loop Calculation
kp P
V+04
Setpoint Error Term + Control Output
+ S ki I XXXX Bias Term
+ S
+
Process Variable kd D
848
PID Loop Operation
To change the bias (operating point), ladder logic only has to write the desired value
to V+04. The PID loop calculation first reads the bias value from V+04 and modifies
the value based on the current integrator calculation. Then it writes the result back to
location V+04. This arrangement creates a sort of transparent bias term. All you
have to do to implement feed forward control is write the correct value to the bias
term at the right time (the example below shows you how).
NOTE: When writing the bias term, one must be careful to design ladder logic to
write the value only once, at the moment when the new bias operating point is to
occur. If ladder logic writes the bias value on every scan, the loops integrator is
effectively disabled.
Feedforward How do we know when to write to the bias term, and what value to write? Suppose we
Example have an oven temperature control loop, and we have already tuned the loop for
optimal performance. Refer to the figure below. We notice that when the operator
opens the oven door, the temperature sags a bit while the loop bias adjusts to the
heat loss. Then when the door closes, the temperature rises above the SP until the
loop adjusts again. Feedforward control can help diminish this effect.
Oven Closed
Open Closed
PID Loop Operation
door
PV PV sags
PV excess
Bias
First, we record the amount of bias change the loop controller generates when the
and Troubleshooting
door opens or closes. Then, we write a ladder program to monitor the position of an
oven door limit switch. When the door opens, our ladder program reads the current
Maintenance
bias value from V+04, adds the desired change amount, and writes it back to V+04.
When the door closes, we duplicate the procedure, but subtracting desired change
amount instead. The following figure shows the results.
Oven Closed
Open Closed
door
PV
Feed-forward Feed-forward
Bias
The step changes in the bias are the result of our two feed-forward writes to the bias
term. We can see the PV variations are greatly reduced. The same technique may
be applied for changes in setpoint.
849
PID Loop Operation
Time-Proportioning Control
The PID loop controller in the DL05 CPU generates a smooth control output signal
across a numerical range. The control output value is suitable to drive an analog
output module, which connects to the process. In the process control field, this is
called continuous control, because the output is on (at some level) continuously.
While continuous control can be smooth and robust, the cost of the loop components
(such as actuators, heater amplifiers) can be expensive. A simpler form of control is
called time-proportioning control. This method uses actuators which are either on or
off (no in-between). Loop components for on/off-based control systems are lower
cost than their continuous control counterparts.
In this section, we will show you how to convert the control output of a loop to
time-proportioning control for the applications that need it. Lets take a moment to
review how alternately turning a load on and off can control a process. The diagram
below shows a hot-air balloon following a path across some mountains. The desired
path is the setpoint. The balloon pilot turns the burner on and off alternately, which is
his control output. The large mass of air in the balloon effectively averages the effect
of the burner, converting the bursts of heat into a continuous effect: slowly changing
balloon temperature and ultimately the altitude, which is the process variable.
Desired
Effect
On/Off On
Control Off
If we were to plot the on/off times of the burner in the hot-air balloon, we would
probably see a very similar relationship to its effect on balloon temperature and
altitude.
850
PID Loop Operation
On/Off Control The following ladder segment provides a time proportioned on/off control output. It
Program Example converts the continuous output in V2005 to on/off control using the output coil, Y0.
The example program uses two timers to generate On/Off control. It makes the
following assumptions, which you can alter to fit your application:
S The loop table starts at V2000, so the control output is at V2005.
S The data format of the control output is 12-bit, unipolar (0 FFF).
S The time base (one full cycle) for the On/Off waveform is 10 seconds.
We use a fast timer (0.01 sec/tick), counting to 1000 ticks (10 seconds).
S The On/Off control output is Y0.
The time proportioning program must match the resolution of the output (1 part in
1000) to the resolution of the time base of T0 (also 1 part in 1000).
NOTE: Some processes change too fast for time proportioning control. Consider the
speed of your process when you choose this control method. Use continuous control
for processes that change too fast for time proportioning control.
PID Loop Operation
Use a fast timer (0.01 sec. resolution) for the main time
T0 base. The K1000 provides a preset of 10 seconds. The
TMRF T0 N.C. T0 contact makes this self-resetting. T0 is on for
K1000
one scan each 10 seconds.
Cascade Control
Introduction Cascaded loops are an advanced control technique that is superior to individual loop
control in certain situations. As the name implies, cascade means that one loop is
connected to another loop. In addition to Manual (open loop) and Auto (closed loop)
Modes, the DL05 also provides Cascaded Mode.
Maintenance
behave as one loop, but with improved performance over the previous single-loop
solution.
External External
Disturbances Disturbances
Output B/
Setpoint Loop B Loop A Output A Process A Process B
+ S Calculation
Setpoint A
+ S Calculation (secondary) (primary)
Minor
Major Loop
Loop PV, Process A
PV, Process B
One of the benefits to cascade control can be seen by examining its response to
external disturbances. Remember the minor loop is faster acting than the major
loop. Therefore, if a disturbance affects process A in the minor loop, the Loop A PID
calculation can correct the resulting error before the major loop sees the effect.
852
PID Loop Operation
Cascaded Loops in In the use of the term cascaded loops, we must make an important distinction. Only
the DL05 CPU the minor loop will actually be in the Cascade Mode. In normal operation, the major
loop must be in Auto Mode. If you have more than two loops cascaded together, the
outer-most (major) loop must be in Auto Mode during normal operation, and all inner
loops in Cascade Mode.
NOTE: Technically, both major and minor loops are cascaded in strict process
control terminology. Unfortunately, we are unable to retain this convention when
controlling loop modes. Remember that all minor loops will be in Cascade Mode, and
only the outer-most (major) loop will be in Auto Mode.
You can cascade together as many loops as necessary on the DL05, and you may
have multiple groups of cascaded loops. For proper operation on cascaded loops
you must use the same data range (12/15 bit) and unipolar/bipolar settings on the
major and minor loop.
To prepare a loop for Cascade Mode operation as a minor loop, you must program its
remote Setpoint Pointer in its loop parameter table location V+32, as shown below.
The pointer must be the address of the V+05 location (control output) of the major
loop. In Cascade Mode, the minor loop will ignore the its local SP register (V+02),
and read the major loops control output as its SP instead.
Major Loop (Auto mode) Minor Loop (Cascade Mode)
PID Loop Operation
When using DirectSOFT32s PID View to watch the SP value of the minor loop,
DirectSOFT32 automatically reads the major loops control output and displays it for
Maintenance
the minor loops SP. The minor loops normal SP location, V+02, remains
unchanged.
Now, we use the loop parameter arrangement above and draw its equivalent loop
schematic, shown below.
Major loop Minor Cascaded loop
Remember that a major loop goes to Manual Mode automatically if its minor loop is
taken out of Cascade Mode.
853
PID Loop Operation
Process Alarms
The performance of a process control loop may be generally measured by how
closely the process variable matches the setpoint. Most process control loops in
industry operate continuously, and will eventually lose control of the PV due to an
error condition. Process alarms are vital in early discovery of a loop error condition,
and can alert plant personnel to manually control a loop or take other measures until
the error condition has been repaired.
The DL05 CPU has a sophisticated set of alarm features for each loop:
S PV Absolute Value Alarms monitors the PV with respect to two lower
limit values and two upper limit values. It generates alarms whenever
the PV goes outside these programmed limits.
S PV Deviation Alarm monitors the PV value as compared to the SP. It
alarms when the difference between the PV and SP exceed the
programmed alarm value.
S PV Rate-of-change Alarm computes the rate-of-change of the PV,
and alarms if it exceeds the programmed alarm amount
S Alarm Hysteresis works in conjunction with the absolute value and
deviation alarms to eliminate alarm chatter near alarm thresholds.
Maintenance
Process Variable
1 Alarm Generation
0 PV Value
1
0 PV Deviation
1
0 PV Rate-of-change
Enable Alarms PID Mode 1 Setting PID Alarm Word Monitor Alarms
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Unlike the PID calculations, the alarms are always functioning any time the CPU is in
Run Mode. The loop may be in Manual, Auto, or Cascade, and the alarms will be
functioning if the enable bit(s) as listed above are set =1.
854
PID Loop Operation
PV Absolute The PV absolute value alarms are organized as two upper and two lower alarms.
Value Alarms The alarm status is false as long as the PV value remains in the region between the
upper and lower alarms, as shown below. The alarms nearest the safe zone are
named High Alarm and Low Alarm. If the loop loses control, the PV will cross one of
these thresholds first. Therefore, you can program the appropriate alarm threshold
values in the loop table locations shown below to the right. The data format is the
same as the PV and SP (12-bit or 15-bit). The threshold values for these alarms
should be set to give an operator an early warning if the process loses control.
If the process remains out of control for some time, the PV will eventually cross one
of the outer alarm thresholds, named High-high alarm and Low-low alarm. Their
threshold values are programmed using the loop table registers listed above. A
High-high or Low-low alarm indicates a serious condition exists, and needs the
PID Loop Operation
PV Deviation The PV Deviation Alarms monitor the PV deviation with respect to the SP value. The
Alarms deviation alarm has two programmable thresholds, and each threshold is applied
Maintenance
equally above and below the current SP value. In the figure below, the smaller
deviation alarm is called the Yellow Deviation, indicating a cautionary condition for
the loop. The larger deviation alarm is called the Red Deviation, indicating a strong
error condition for the loop. The threshold values use the loop parameter table
locations V+17 and V+20 as shown.
The thresholds define zones, which fluctuate with the SP value. The green zone
which surrounds the SP value represents a safe (no alarm) condition. The yellow
zones lie outside the green zone, and the red zones are beyond those.
855
PID Loop Operation
The PV Deviation Alarms are reported in PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06
the two bits in the PID Mode and Alarm
Status word in the loop table, as shown to Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
the right. We highly recommend using
ladder logic to monitor these bits. The Red Deviation
bit-of-word instructions make this easy to Yellow Deviation
do. Additionally, you can monitor PID
alarms using DirectSOFT.
The PV Deviation Alarm can be independently enabled and disabled from the other
PV alarms, using bit 13 of the PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word.
Remember the alarm hysteresis feature works in conjunction with both the deviation
and absolute value alarms, and is discussed at the end of this section.
PV Rate-of-Change One powerful way to get an early warning of a process fault is to monitor the
Alarm rate-of-change of the PV. Most batch processes have large masses and
slowly-changing PV values. A relatively fast-changing PV will result from a broken
signal wire for either the PV or control output, a SP value error, or other causes. If the
operator responds to a PV Rate-of-Change Alarm quickly and effectively, the PV
absolute value will not reach the point where the material in process would be ruined.
The DL05 loop controller provides a programmable PV Rate-of-Change Alarm, as
shown below. The rate-of-change is specified in PV units change per loop sample
Loop Table
PV slope OK PV slope excessive
V+21 XXXX PV Rate-of-Change Alarm
PV
PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06
rate-of-change alarm
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sample time Sample time
PV Rate of
Maintenance
Change Alarm
From the calculation result, we would program the value 5 in the loop table for the
rate-of-change. The PV Rate-of-Change Alarm can be independently enabled and
disabled from the other PV alarms, using bit 14 of the PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word.
The alarm hysteresis feature (discussed next) does not affect the Rate-of-Change
Alarm.
856
PID Loop Operation
PV Alarm The PV Absolute Value Alarm and PV Deviation Alarm are programmed using
Hysteresis threshold values. When the absolute value or deviation exceeds the threshold, the
alarm status becomes true. Real-world PV signals have some noise on them, which
can cause some fluctuation in the PV value in the CPU. As the PV value crosses an
alarm threshold, its fluctuations cause the alarm to be intermittent and annoy
process operators. The solution is to use the PV Alarm Hysteresis feature.
The PV Alarm Hysteresis amount is programmable from 1 to 200 (hex). When using
the PV Deviation Alarm, the programmed hysteresis amount must be less than the
programmed deviation amount. The figure below shows how the hysteresis is
applied when the PV value goes past a threshold and descends back through it.
Alarm threshold
Hysteresis
Loop Table
PV
V+22 XXXX PV Alarm Hysteresis
Alarm 1
0
PID Loop Operation
The hysteresis amount is applied after the threshold is crossed, and toward the safe
zone. In this way, the alarm activates immediately above the programmed threshold
value. It delays turning off until the PV value has returned through the threshold by
the hysteresis amount.
Alarm The PV Alarm threshold values must have PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06
Programing Error certain mathematical relationships to be
valid. The requirements are listed below. If Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
not met, the Alarm Programming Error bit
will be set, as indicated to the right. Alarm Programming Error
and Troubleshooting
Ramp/Soak Generator
Introduction Our discussion of basic loop operation noted the setpoint for a loop will be generated
in various ways, depending on the loop operating mode and programming
preferences. In the figure below, the ramp / soak generator is one of the ways the SP
may be generated. It is the responsibility of your ladder program to ensure only one
source attempts to write the SP value at V+02 at any particular time.
Setpoint Sources:
Operator Input
Setpoint V+02 Loop Control Output
Ramp/soak generator
+ S Calculation
Ladder Program
Another loops output (cascade)
Process Variable
If the SP for your process rarely changes or can tolerate step changes, you probably
will not need to use the ramp/soak generator. However, some processes require
precisely-controlled SP value changes. The ramp / soak generator can greatly
reduce the amount of programming required for these applications.
The terms ramp and soak have special SP
Maintenance
SP values, as shown below. It has two categories of inputs which determine the SP
values generated. The ramp/soak table must be programmed in advance,
containing the values that will define the ramp/soak profile. The loop reads from the
table during each PID calculation as necessary. The ramp/soak controls are bits in a
special loop table word that control the real-time start/stop functionality of the
ramp/soak generator. The ladder program can monitor the status of the ramp soak
profile (current ramp/segment number).
Ramp/soak table
Ramp/soak Setpoint Loop Control Output
Ramp/soak controls Generator + S Calculation
Process Variable
858
PID Loop Operation
Now that we have described the general ramp/soak generator operation, we list its
specific features:
S Each loop has its own ramp/soak generator (use is optional).
S You may specify up to eight ramp/soak steps (16 segments).
S The ramp soak generator can run anytime the PLC is in Run mode. Its
operation is independent of the loop mode (Manual or Auto).
S Ramp/soak real-time controls include Start, Hold, Resume, and Jog.
S Ramp/soak monitoring includes Profile Complete, Soak Deviation (SP
minus PV), and current ramp/soak step number.
The following figure shows a SP profile consisting of ramp/soak segment pairs. The
segments are individually numbered as steps from 1 to 16. The slope of each of the
ramp may be either increasing or decreasing. The ramp/soak generator
automatically knows whether to increase or decrease the SP based on the relative
values of a ramps end points. These values come from the ramp/soak table.
15 16
13 14 Soak
Ramp
5 6 Soak
Ramp
4
PID Loop Operation
3 Soak
Ramp
Step 1 2 Soak
Ramp
Soak
Ramp
SP
Ramp/Soak Table
The parameters which define the VMemory Space
ramp/soak profile for a loop are in a
ramp/soak table. Each loop may have its
and Troubleshooting
User Data
own ramp/soak table, but it is optional.
Recall the Loop Parameter table consists
Maintenance
V2000 LOOP #1
a 32-word block of memory for each loop, V2034 =
and together they occupy one contiguous V2037 32 words 3000 octal
memory area. However, the ramp/soak V2040 LOOP #2
table for a loop is individually located, 32 words V2074 =
V2077
3600 octal
because it is optional for each loop. An
address pointer in location V+34 in the
loop table specifies the starting location of V3000
the ramp/soak table. Ramp/Soak #1
32 words
In the example to the right, the loop
parameter tables for Loop #1 and #2
occupy contiguous 32-word blocks as
shown. Each has a pointer to its
ramp/soak table, independently located
elsewhere in user V-memory. Of course, V3600 Ramp/Soak #2
you may locate all the tables in one group, 32 words
as long as they do not overlap.
859
PID Loop Operation
The parameters in the ramp/soak table must be user-defined. the most convenient
way is to use DirectSOFT, which features a special editor for this table. Four
parameters are required to define a ramp and soak segment pair, as pictured below.
S Ramp End Value specifies the destination SP value for the end of the
ramp. Use the same data format for this number as you use for the SP.
It may be above or below the beginning SP value, so the slope could be
up or down (we dont have to know the starting SP value for ramp #1).
S Ramp Slope specifies the SP increase in counts (units) per second. It
is a BCD number from 00.00 to 99.99 (uses implied decimal point).
S Soak Duration specifies the time for the soak segment in minutes,
ranging from 000.1 to 999.9 minutes in BCD (implied decimal point).
S Soak PV Deviation (optional) specifies an allowable PV deviation
above and below the SP value during the soak period. A PV deviation
alarm status bit is generated by the ramp/soak generator.
Ramp End
SP Value Soak PV Ramp/Soak Table
deviation V+00 XXXX Ramp End SP Value
V+01 XXXX Ramp Slope
Slope Soak
The ramp segment becomes active when the previous soak segment ends. If the
ramp is the first segment, it becomes active when the ramp/soak generator is
started, and automatically assumes the present SP as the starting SP.
Offset Step Description Offset Step Description
+ 00 1 Ramp End SP Value + 20 9 Ramp End SP Value
+ 01 1 Ramp Slope + 21 9 Ramp Slope
Maintenance
+ 02 2 Soak Duration + 22 10 Soak Duration
+ 03 2 Soak PV Deviation + 23 10 Soak PV Deviation
+ 04 3 Ramp End SP Value + 24 11 Ramp End SP Value
+ 05 3 Ramp Slope + 25 11 Ramp Slope
+ 06 4 Soak Duration + 26 12 Soak Duration
+ 07 4 Soak PV Deviation + 27 12 Soak PV Deviation
+ 10 5 Ramp End SP Value + 30 13 Ramp End SP Value
+ 11 5 Ramp Slope + 31 13 Ramp Slope
+ 12 6 Soak Duration + 32 14 Soak Duration
+ 13 6 Soak PV Deviation + 33 14 Soak PV Deviation
+ 14 7 Ramp End SP Value + 34 15 Ramp End SP Value
+ 15 7 Ramp Slope + 35 15 Ramp Slope
+ 16 8 Soak Duration + 36 16 Soak Duration
+ 17 8 Soak PV Deviation + 37 16 Soak PV Deviation
860
PID Loop Operation
Many applications do not require all 16 R/S steps. Use all zeros in the table for
unused steps. The R/S generator ends the profile when it finds ramp slope=0.
Ramp/Soak The individual bit definitions of the Ramp / Soak Table Flag (Addr+33) word is listed
Table Flags in the following table.
Ramp/Soak The main enable control to permit PID Mode 1 Setting V+00
Generator Enable ramp/soak generation of the SP value is
accomplished with bit 11 in the PID Mode 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting V+00 word, as shown to the right.
The other ramp/soak controls in V+33 Ramp/Soak
Generator Enable
shown in the table above will not operate
unless this bit=1 during the entire
ramp/soak process.
Ramp/Soak The four main controls for the ramp/soak Ramp/Soak Settings V+33
Controls generator are in bits 0 to 3 of the
and Troubleshooting
Ladder logic must set a control bit to a 1 to command the corresponding function.
When the loop controller reads the ramp/soak value, it automatically turns off the bit
for you. Therefore, a reset of the bit is not required, when the CPU is in Run Mode.
The example program rung to the right Start R/S Generator
shows how an external switch X0 can turn X0 B2033.0
on, and the PD contact uses the leading SET
edge to set the proper control bit to start
the ramp soak profile. This uses the Set
Bit-of-word instruction.
861
PID Loop Operation
The normal state for the ramp/soak control bits is all zeros. Ladder logic must set
only one control bit at a time.
S Start a 0-to-1 transition will start the ramp soak profile. The CPU must
be in Run Mode, and the loop can be in Manual or Auto Mode. If the
profile is not interrupted by a Hold or Jog command, it finishes normally.
S Hold a 0-to-1 transition will stop the ramp/soak profile in its current
state, and the SP value will be frozen.
S Resume a 0-to-1 transition cause the ramp/soak generator to resume
operation if it is in the hold state. The SP values will resume from their
previous value.
S Jog a 0-to-1 transition will cause the ramp/soak generator to truncate
the current segment (step), and go to the next segment.
Ramp/Soak Profile You can monitor the Ramp/Soak profile Ramp/Soak Settings V+33
Monitoring status using other bits in the Ramp/Soak
Settings V+33 word, shown to the right. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S R/S Profile Complete =1 when the
R/S Profile in Hold
last programmed step is done.
Soak PV Deviation
S Soak PV Deviation =1 when the R/S Profile Complete
error (SPPV) exceeds the specified
Maintenance
and you have the step number.
Ramp/Soak The starting address for the ramp/soak Ramp/Soak Table Error V+35
Programming table must be a valid location. If the
Errors address points outside the range of user Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
V-memory, one of the bits to the right will
turn on when the ramp/soak generator is Starting Address set in
started. We recommend using reserved system V-memory
DirectSOFT32 to configure the Starting Address set out of
ramp/soak table. It automatically range V-memory upper range
checks the addresses for you.
Starting Address set out
of V-memory lower range
Testing Your Its a good idea to test your ramp/soak profile before using it to control the process.
Ramp/Soak Profile This is easy to do, because the ramp/soak generator will run even when the loop is in
Manual Mode. Using DirectSOFT32s PID View will be a real time-saver, because it
will draw the profile on-screen for you. Be sure to set the trending timebase slow
enough to display completed ramp-soak segment pairs in the waveform window.
862
PID Loop Operation
Troubleshooting Tips
Q. The loop will not go into Automatic Mode.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S A PV alarm exists, or a PV alarm programming error exists.
S The loop is the major loop of a cascaded pair, and the minor loop is not
in Cascade Mode.
Q. The Control Output stays at zero constantly when the loop is in Automatic Mode.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The Control Output upper limit in loop table location V+31 is zero.
S The loop is driven into saturation, because the error never goes to zero
value and changes (algebraic) sign.
Q. The Ramp/Soak Generator does not operate when I activate the Start bit.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The Ramp/Soak enable bit is off. Check the status of bit 11 of loop
parameter table location V+00. It must be set =1.
S The hold bit or other bits in the Ramp/Soak control are on.
S The beginning SP value and the first ramp ending SP value are the
same, so first ramp segment has no slope and consequently has no
and Troubleshooting
Q. The PV value in the table is constant, even though the analog module receives the PV signal.
A. Your ladder program must read the analog value from the module successfully
and write it into the loop table V+03 location. Verify the analog module is generating
the value, and the ladder is working.
Q. The Derivative gain doesnt seem to have any affect on the output.
A. The derivative limit is probably enabled (see section on derivative gain limiting).
863
PID Loop Operation
Maintenance
Author: Paul W. Murrill Author: Paul W. Murrill
Publisher: Instrument Society of America Publisher: Instrument Society of America
ISBN 1556172974 ISBN 1556170807
PID Controllers: Theory, Design, and Tuning, 2nd Edition Fundamentals of Temperature, Pressure, and Flow
Author: K. Astrom and T Hagglund Measurements, Third edition
Publisher: Instrument Society of America Author: Robert P. Benedict
ISBN 1556175167 Publisher: John Wiley and Sons
ISBN 0471893838
Process / Industrial Instruments & Controls Handbook, pH Measurement and Control, Second Edition
Fourth Edition Author: Gregory K. McMillan
Author (Editor-in-Chief): Douglas M. Considine Publisher: Instrument Society of America
Publisher: McGraw-Hill, Inc. ISBN 1556174837
ISBN 0070124450
Process Control, Third Edition Process Measurement and Analysis, Third Edition
Instrument Engineers Handbook Instrument Engineers Handbook
Author (Editor-in-Chief): Bela G. Liptak Author (Editor-in-Chief): Bela G. Liptak
Publisher: Chilton Publisher: Chilton
ISBN 0801982421 ISBN 0801981972
864
PID Loop Operation
current error.
Maintenance
Major Loop In cascade control, it is the loop that generates a setpoint for the cascaded loop.
Manual Mode An operational mode of a loop, it which the PID calculations are stopped. The operator
must manually control the loop by writing to the control output value directly.
Minor Loop In cascade control, the minor loop is the subordinate loop that receives its SP from the
major loop.
On / Off Control A simple method of controlling a process, through on/off application of energy into the
system. The mass of the process averages the on/off effect for a relatively smooth PV. A
simple ladder program can convert the DL05s continuous loop output to on/off control.
PID Loop A mathematical method of closed-loop control involving the sum of three terms based
on proportional, integral, and derivative error values. The three terms have independent
gain constants, allowing one to optimize (tune) the loop for a particular physical system.
Position Algorithm The control output is calculated so it responds to the displacement (position) of the PV
from the SP (error term)
Process A manufacturing procedure which adds value to raw materials. Process control
particularly refers to inducing chemical changes to the material in process.
Process Variable (PV) A quantitative measurement of a physical property of the material in process, which
affects final product quality and is important to monitor and control.
865
PID Loop Operation
Proportional Gain A constant that determines the magnitude of the PID proportional term in response to
the current error.
PV Absolute Alarm A programmable alarm that compares the PV value to alarm threshold values.
PV Deviation Alarm A programmable alarm that compares the difference between the SP and PV values to
a deviation threshold value.
Ramp / Soak Profile A set of SP values called a profile, which is generated in real time upon each loop
calculation. The profile consists of a series of ramp and soak segment pairs, greatly
simplifying the task of programming the PLC to generate such SP sequences.
Rate Also called differentiator, the rate term responds to the changes in the error term.
Remote Setpoint The location where a loop reads its setpoint when it is configured as the minor loop in a
cascaded loop topology.
Reset Also called integrator, the reset term adds each sampled error to the previous,
maintaining a running total called the bias.
Reset Windup A condition created when the loop is unable to find equilibrium, and the persistent error
causes the integrator (reset) sum to grow excessively (windup). Reset windup causes
an extra recovery delay when the original loop fault is remedied.
Reverse-Acting Loop A loop in which the PV increases in response to a control output decrease. In other
words, the process has a negative gain.
Sampling time The time between PID calculations. The CPU method of process control is called a
sampling controller, because it samples the SP and PV only periodically.
Maintenance
19
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
In This Chapter. . . .
Hardware System Maintenance
Diagnostics
CPU Indicators
Communications Problems
I/O Point Troubleshooting
Noise Troubleshooting
Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting
92
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fatal Errors Fatal errors are errors which may cause the system to function improperly, perhaps
introducing a safety problem. The CPU will automatically switch to Program Mode if
it is in Run Mode. (Remember, in Program Mode all outputs are turned off.) If the fatal
error is detected while the CPU is in Program Mode, the CPU will not allow you to
transition to Run Mode until the error has been corrected.
Some examples of fatal errors are:
S Power supply failure
and Troubleshooting
Non-fatal Errors Non-fatal errors are errors that need your attention, but should not cause improper
operation. They do not cause or prevent any mode transitions of the CPU. The
application program can use special relay contacts to detect non-fatal errors, and
even take the system to an orderly shutdown or switch the CPU to Program Mode if
desired. An example of a non-fatal error is:
S Particular programming errors
Finding Diagnostic The programming devices will notify you of an error if one occurs while online.
Information S DirectSOFT provides the error number and an error message.
S The handheld programmer displays error numbers and short
descriptions of the error.
Appendix B has a complete list of error messages in order by error number.
Many error messages point to supplemental V-memory locations which contain
related information. Special relays (SP contacts) also provide error indications.
93
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
V-memory Error The following table names the specific memory locations that correspond to certain
Code Locations types of error messages.
Error Class Error Category Diagnostic
V-memory
User-Defined Error code used with FAULT instruc- V7751
tion
System Error Fatal Error code V7755
Major Error code V7756
Minor Error code V7757
Grammatical Address where syntax error occurs V7763
Error Code found during syntax check V7764
CPU Scan Number of scans since last Program V7765
to Run Mode transition
Current scan time (ms) V7775
Minimum scan time (ms) V7776
Maximum scan time (ms) V7777
Special Relays (SP) The special relay table also includes status indicators which can indicate errors. For
Corresponding to a more detailed description of each of these special relays refer to Appendix D.
Error Codes
and Troubleshooting
SP16 Terminal Program mode
Accumulator Status Relays
SP17 Forced stop
Maintenance
SP60 Acc. is less than value
SP20 STOP instruction was executed
SP61 Acc. is equal to value
SP22 Interrupt enabled
SP62 Acc. is greater than value
System Monitoring Relays
SP63 Acc. result is zero
SP36 Override setup
SP64 Half borrow occurred
SP37 Scan control error
SP65 Borrow occurred
SP40 Critical error SP66 Half carry occurred
SP41 Non-critical error SP67 Carry occurred
SP42 Diagnostics error SP70 Result is negative (sign)
SP44 Program memory error SP71 Pointer reference error
SP45 I/O error SP73 Overflow
SP46 Communications error SP75 Data is not in BCD
SP50 Fault instruction was executed SP76 Load zero
SP51 Watchdog timeout
94
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
DL05 Micro PLC These errors can be generated by the CPU or by the Handheld Programmer,
Error Codes depending on the actual error. Appendix B provides a more complete description of
the error codes.
The errors can be detected at various times. However, most of them are detected at
power-up, on entry to Run Mode, or when a Handheld Programmer key sequence
results in an error or an illegal request.
Program Error The following table lists program syntax and runtime error codes. Error detection
Codes occurs during a Program-to-Run mode transition, or when you use AUX 21 Check
Program. The CPU will also turn on SP52 and store the error code in V7755.
Appendix B provides a more complete description of the error codes.
and Troubleshooting
Maintenance
96
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CPU Indicators
PWR Indicator In general there are three reasons for the CPU power status LED (PWR) to be OFF:
1. Power to the unit is incorrect or is not applied.
2. PLC power supply is faulty.
3. Other component(s) have the power supply shut down.
If the voltage to the power supply is not correct, the PLC may not operate properly or
may not operate at all. Use the following guidelines to correct the problem.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect the system
and Troubleshooting
The best way to check for a faulty PLC is to substitute a known good one to see if this
corrects the problem. The removable connectors on the DL05 make this relatively
easy. If there has been a major power surge, it is possible the PLC internal power
supply has been damaged. If you suspect this is the cause of the power supply
damage, consider installing an AC line conditioner to attenuate damaging voltage
spikes in the future.
97
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
RUN Indicator If the CPU will not enter the Run mode (the RUN indicator is off), the problem is
usually in the application program, unless the CPU has a fatal error. If a fatal error
has occurred, the CPU LED should be on. (You can use a programming device to
determine the cause of the error.)
Both of the programming devices, Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT, will
return an error message describing the problem. Depending on the error, there may
also be an AUX function you can use to help diagnose the problem. The most
common programming error is Missing END Statement. All application programs
require an END statement for proper termination. A complete list of error codes can
be found in Appendix B.
CPU Indicator If the CPU indicator is on, a fatal error has occurred in the CPU. Generally, this is not
a programming problem but an actual hardware failure. You can power cycle the
system to clear the error. If the error clears, you should monitor the system and
determine what caused the problem. You will find this problem is sometimes caused
by high frequency electrical noise introduced into the CPU from an outside source.
Check your system grounding and install electrical noise filters if the grounding is
suspected. If power cycling the system does not reset the error, or if the problem
returns, you should replace the CPU.
Communications Problems
If you cannot establish communications with the CPU, check these items.
and Troubleshooting
S A grounding difference exists between the two devices.
Maintenance
S Electrical noise is causing intermittent errors.
S The PLC has a bad communication port and should be replaced.
Some Quick Steps When troubleshooting the DL05 Micro PLCs there are a few facts you should be
aware of. These facts may assist you in quickly correcting an I/O problem.
S HSIO configuration errors are commonly mistaken for I/O point failure
during program development. If the I/O point in question is in X0X2, or
Y0Y1, check all parameter locations listed in Chapter 3 that apply to
the HSIO mode you have selected.
S The output circuits cannot detect shorted or open output points. If you
suspect one or more faulty points, measure the voltage drop from the
common to the suspect point. Remember when using a Digital Volt
Meter, leakage current from an output device such as a triac or a
transistor must be considered. A point which is off may appear to be on
if no load is connected the point.
S The I/O point status indicators are logic-side indicators. This means the
LED which indicates the on or off status reflects the status of the point
with respect to the CPU. On an output point the status indicators could
be operating normally while the actual output device (transistor, triac
etc.) could be damaged. With an input point, if the indicator LED is on
the input circuitry is probably operating properly. Verify the LED goes off
and Troubleshooting
I/O point. False input signals can be generated when the leakage
current of an output device is great enough to turn on the connected
input device. To correct this install a resistor in parallel with the input or
output of the circuit. The value of this resistor will depend on the amount
of leakage current and the voltage applied but usually a 10K to 20KW
resistor will work. Verify the wattage rating of the resistor is correct for
your application.
S Because of the removable terminal blocks on the DL05, the easiest
method to determine if an I/O circuit has failed is to replace the unit if
you have a spare. However, if you suspect a field device is defective,
that device may cause the same failure in the replacement PLC as well.
As a point of caution, you may want to check devices or power supplies
connected to the failed I/O circuit before replacing the unit with a spare.
99
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Testing Output Output points can be set on or off in the DL05 series CPUs. If you want to do an I/O
Points check out independent of the application program, follow the procedure below:
Step Action
Use a handheld programmer or DirectSOFT to communicate online to
1
the PLC.
2 Change to Program Mode.
3 Go to address 0.
Insert an END statement at address 0. (This will cause program
4 execution to occur only at address 0 and prevent the application pro-
gram from turning the I/O points on or off).
5 Change to Run Mode.
Use the programming device to set (turn) on or off the points you wish
6
to test.
When you finish testing I/O points delete the END statement at
7
address 0.
and Troubleshooting
END
Maintenance
From a clear display, use the following keystrokes
STAT ENT
16P STATUS
BIT REF X
NEXT A ENT
Y 10 Y 0
0
Y2 is now on
Use arrow keys to select point, then use
ON and OFF to change the status
SHFT ON Y 10 Y 0
INS
910
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Noise Troubleshooting
Electrical Noise Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise can enter a
Problems system in many different ways and they fall into one of two categories, conducted or
radiated. It may be difficult to determine how the noise is entering the system but the
corrective actions for either of the types of noise problems are similar.
S Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into
the system by way of a attached wire, panel connection ,etc. It may
enter through an I/O circuit, a power supply connection, the
communication ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.
S Radiated noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the
system without a direct electrical connection, much in the same manner
as radio waves.
Reducing While electrical noise cannot be eliminated it can be reduced to a level that will not
Electrical Noise affect the system.
S Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A
good earth ground can be the single most effective way to correct noise
problems. If a ground is not available, install a ground rod as close to
the system as possible. Ensure all ground wires are single point
grounds and are not daisy chained from one device to another. Ground
metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire can act as a large
antenna, introducing noise into the system. Therefore, tighten all
connections in your system. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to
noise than the other wires in your system. Review Chapter 2 Installation,
Wiring, and Specifications if you have questions regarding how to
ground your system.
S Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the
PLC and I/O circuits. Installing an isolation transformer for all AC
sources can correct this problem. DC sources should be well-grounded
good quality supplies.
and Troubleshooting
S Separate input wiring from output wiring. Never run low-voltage I/O
Maintenance
Syntax Check Even though the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT provide error checking
during program entry, you may want to check a program that has been modified.
Both programming devices offer a way to check the program syntax. For example,
you can use AUX 21, CHECK PROGRAM to check the program syntax from a
Handheld Programmer, or you can use the PLC Diagnostics menu option within
DirectSOFT. This check will find a wide variety of programming errors. The following
example shows how to use the syntax check with a Handheld Programmer.
and Troubleshooting
Maintenance
One of two displays will appear
Error Display (example)
$00050 E401
MISSING END
(shows location in question)
Syntax OK display
NO SYNTAX ERROR
?
See the Error Codes Section for a complete listing of programming error codes. If
you get an error, just press CLR and the Handheld will display the instruction where
the error occurred. Correct the problem and continue running the Syntax check until
the NO SYNTAX ERROR message appears.
912
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Special There are several instructions that can be used to help you debug your program
Instructions during machine startup operations.
S END
S PAUSE
S STOP
END Instruction: If you need a way to quickly disable part of the program, just insert
an END statement prior to the portion that should be disabled. When the CPU
encounters the END statement, it assumes that is the end of the program. The
following diagram shows an example.
Normal Program New END disables X10 and Y1
X0 X2 Y0 X0 X2 Y0
X1 X3 X4 X1 X3 X4
X10 Y1
END
X10 Y1
END
END
PAUSE Instruction: This instruction provides a quick way to allow the inputs (or
other logic) to operate while disabling selected outputs. The output image register is
still updated, but the output circuits are not. For example, you could make this
conditional by adding an input contact or CR to control the instruction with a switch or
a programming device. Or, you could just add the instruction without any conditions
so the selected outputs would be disabled at all times.
Normal Program PAUSE disables Y0 and Y1
and Troubleshooting
X0 X2 Y0 Y0 Y1
PAUSE
Maintenance
X1 X3 X4 X0 X2 Y0
X10 Y1 X1 X3 X4
X10 Y1
END
END
STOP Instruction: Sometimes during machine startup you need a way to quickly
turn off all the outputs and return to Program Mode. You can use the STOP
instruction. When this instruction is executed the CPU automatically exits Run Mode
and enters Program Mode. Remember, all outputs are turned off during Program
Mode. The following diagram shows an example of a condition that returns the CPU
to Program Mode.
913
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
X0 X2 Y0 X7
STOP
X1 X3 X4 X0 X2 Y0
X5 Y1 X1 X3 X4
X5 Y1
END
END
In the example shown above, you could trigger X10 which would execute the STOP
instruction. The CPU would enter Program Mode and all outputs would be turned off.
Duplicate You can also check for multiple uses of the same output coil. Both programming
Reference Check devices offer a way to check for this condition.. For example, you can AUX 21,
CHECK PROGRAM to check for duplicate references from a Handheld
Programmer, or you can use the PLC Diagnostics menu option within DirectSOFT.
The following example shows how to perform the duplicate reference check with a
Handheld Programmer.
and Troubleshooting
very long.)
Maintenance
One of two displays will appear
$00024 E471
Error Display (example)
DUP COIL REF
(shows location in question)
NO DUP REFS
Syntax OK display
?
If you get an error, just press CLR and the Handheld will display the instruction where
the error occurred. Correct the problem and continue running the Duplicate
Reference check until no duplicate references are found.
NOTE: You can use the same coil in more than one location, especially in programs
containing Stage instructions and / or OROUT instructions. The Duplicate
Reference check will find occurrences, even though they are acceptable.
914
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Run Time Edits The DL05 Micro PLC allows you to make changes to the application program during
Run Mode. These edits are not bumpless. Instead, CPU scan is momentarily
interrupted (and the outputs are maintained in their current state) until the program
change is complete. This means if the output is off, it will remain off until the program
change is complete. If the output is on, it will remain on.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode
become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any
changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. There are
some important operational changes during Run Time Edits.
1. If there is a syntax error in the new instruction, the CPU will not enter the Run
Mode.
2. If you delete an output coil reference and the output was on at the time, the output
will remain on until it is forced off with a programming device.
3. Input point changes are not acknowledged during Run Time Edits. So, if youre
using a high-speed operation and a critical input comes on, the CPU may not see
the change.
Not all instructions can be edited during a Run Time Edit session. The following list
shows the instructions that can be edited.
ENT
(Note, the RUN LED on the D2HPP *MODE CHANGE*
Handheld starts flashing to indicate RUNTIME EDITS
Run Time Edits are enabled.)
Press the arrow key to move to the X. Then enter the new contact (C10).
SHFT C B A ENT
RUNTIME EDIT?
2 1 0
STR C10
and Troubleshooting
Maintenance
ENT (Note, once you press ENT, the next
address is displayed. OR C0
916
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Forcing I/O Points There are many times, especially during machine startup and troubleshooting, that
you need the capability to force an I/O point to be either on or off. Before you use a
programming device to force any data type it is important you understand how the
DL05 CPUs process the forcing requests.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with the application should
make program changes. Do thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to
minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
Bit Forcing Bit forcing temporarily changes the status of a discrete bit. For
example, you may want to force an input on even though the program has turned it
off. This allows you to change the point status stored in the image register. The
forced value will be valid until the CPU writes to the image register location during the
next scan. This is useful you just need to force a bit on to trigger another event.
The following diagrams show a brief X0 Y0
example of how you could use the OUT
D2HPP Handheld Programmer to force
an I/O point. The example assumes you C0
have already placed the CPU into Run
Mode.
From a clear display, use the following keystrokes
STAT ENT
16P STATUS
BIT REF X
Use the PREV or NEXT keys to select the Y data type. (Once the Y
appears, press 0 to start at Y0.)
NEXT A ENT
Y 10 Y 0
0
and Troubleshooting
Bit Forcing with From a blank display, use the following Solid fill indicates point is on.
Direct Access keystrokes to force Y7 ON
Y H ON
SHFT
MLS 7
SHFT
INS BIT FORCE
Y7
From a blank display, use the following No fill indicates point is off.
keystrokes to force Y7 OFF
SHFT Y
MLS
H
7
SHFT OFF
DEL
BIT FORCE
Y7
1A
Auxiliary Functions
In This Appendix. . . .
Introduction
AUX 2* RLL Operations
AUX 3* Vmemory Operations
AUX 4* I/O Configuration
AUX 5* CPU Configuration
AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration
AUX 7* EEPROM Operations
AUX 8* Password Operations
A2
Auxiliary Functions
Introduction
Auxiliary Functions
Appendix A
Purpose of Many CPU setup tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX
Auxiliary Functions Functions perform many different operations, including clearing ladder memory,
displaying the scan time, and copying programs to EEPROM in the handheld
programmer. They are divided into categories that affect different system resources.
You can access the AUX Functions from DirectSOFT or from the D2HPP
Handheld Programmer. The manuals for those products provide step-by-step
procedures for accessing the AUX Functions. Some of these AUX Functions are
designed specifically for the Handheld Programmer setup, so they will not be
needed (or available) with the DirectSOFT package. Even though this Appendix
provides many examples of how the AUX functions operate, you should supplement
this information with the documentation for your choice of programming device.
Note, the Handheld Programmer may have additional AUX functions that are not
supported with the DL05 PLCs.
AUX Function and Description DL05 AUX Function and Description DL05
AUX 2* RLL Operations AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configura-
tion
21 Check Program
61 Show Revision Numbers
22 Change Reference
62 Beeper On / Off HP
23 Clear Ladder Range
65 Run Self Diagnostics HP
24 Clear All Ladders
AUX 7* EEPROM Operations
AUX 3* V-Memory Operations
71 Copy CPU memory to HP
31 Clear V Memory HPP EEPROM
AUX 4* I/O Configuration 72 Write HPP EEPROM to CPU HP
41 Show I/O Configuration 73 Compare CPU to HP
AUX 5* CPU Configuration HPP EEPROM
51 Modify Program Name 74 Blank Check (HPP EEPROM) HP
53 Display Scan Time 75 Erase HPP EEPROM HP
54 Initialize Scratchpad 76 Show EEPROM Type HP
(CPU and HPP)
55 Set Watchdog Timer
AUX 8* Password Operations
56 Set Communication Port 2
81 Modify Password
57 Set Retentive Ranges
82 Unlock CPU
58 Test Operations
83 Lock CPU
59 Override Setup
5B HSIO Interface Configuration
5D Scan Control Setup
supported
HP Handheld Programmer function
A3
Auxilliary Functions
Accessing AUX DirectSOFT provides various menu options during both online and offline
Auxiliary Functions
Functions via programming. Some of the AUX functions are only available during online
DirectSOFT programming, some only during offline programming, and some during both online
Appendix A
and offline programming. The following diagram shows and example of the PLC
operations menu available within DirectSOFT.
Menu Options
Accessing AUX You can also access the AUX functions by using a Handheld Programmer. Plus,
Functions via the remember some of the AUX functions are only available from the Handheld.
Handheld Sometimes the AUX name or description cannot fit on one display. If you want to see
Programmer the complete description, just press the arrow keys to scroll left and right. Also,
depending on the current display, you may have to press CLR more than once.
CLR AUX
AUX FUNCTION SELECTION
AUX 2* RLL OPERATIONS
NEXT
AUX FUNCTION SELECTION
AUX 3* V OPERATIONS
You can also enter the exact AUX number to go straight to the sub-menu.
CLR D B AUX
AUX 3* V OPERATIONS
3 1
AUX 31 CLR V MEMORY
A4
Auxiliary Functions
RLL Operations auxiliary functions allow you to perform various operations on the
ladder program.
AUX 21 Both the Handheld and DirectSOFT automatically check for errors during program
Check Program entry. However, there may be occasions when you want to check a program that has
already been in the CPU. Two types of checks are available:
S Syntax
S Duplicate References
The Syntax check will find a wide variety of programming errors, such as missing
END statements. If you perform this check and get an error, see Appendix B for a
complete listing of programming error codes. Correct the problem and then continue
running the Syntax check until the message NO SYNTAX ERROR appears.
Use the Duplicate Reference check to verify you have not used the same output coil
reference more than once. Note, this AUX function will also find the same outputs
even if they have been used with the OROUT instruction, which is perfectly
acceptable.
This AUX function is available on the PLC Diagnostics sub-menu from within
DirectSOFT.
AUX 22 There will probably be times when you need to change an I/O address reference or
Change Reference control relay reference. AUX 22 allows you to quickly and easily change all
occurrences, (within an address range), of a specific instruction. For example, you
can replace every instance of X5 with X10.
AUX 23 There have been many times when weve taken existing programs and added or
Clear Ladder removed certain portions to solve new application problems. By using AUX 23 you
Range can select and delete a portion of the program. DirectSOFT does not have a menu
option for this AUX function, but you can just select the appropriate portion of the
program and cut it with the editing tools.
AUX 24 AUX 24 clears the entire program from CPU memory. Before you enter a new
Clear Ladders program, you should always clear ladder memory. This AUX function is available on
the PLC/Clear PLC sub-menu within DirectSOFT.
Auxiliary Functions
Appendix A
The following auxiliary AUX functions allow you to setup, view, or change the CPU
configuration.
AUX 51 DL05 PLCs can use a program name for the CPU program or a program stored on
Modify Program EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer. (Note, you cannot have multiple programs
Name stored on the EEPROM.) The program name can be up to eight characters in length
and can use any of the available characters (AZ, 09). AUX 51 allows you to enter a
program name. You can also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT by
using the PLC/Setup sub-menu. Once youve entered a program name, you can
only clear the name by using AUX 54 to reset the system memory. Make sure you
understand the possible effects of AUX 54 before you use it!
AUX 53 AUX 53 displays the current, minimum, and maximum scan times. The minimum
Display Scan Time and maximum times are the ones that have occurred since the last Program Mode to
Run Mode transition. You can also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT
by using the PLC/Diagnostics sub-menu.
AUX 54 The CPU maintains system parameters in a memory area often referred to as the
Initialize scratchpad. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that will be
Scratchpad stored in system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control Relays
(CRs) as retentive, these changes are stored.
NOTE: You may never have to use this feature unless you have made changes that
affect system memory. Usually, youll only need to initialize the system memory if you
are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup. You
can usually change from program to program without ever initializing system
memory.
AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values. You can also perform this
operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC/Setup sub-menu.
AUX 55 DL05 PLCs have a watchdog timer that is used to monitor the scan time. The
Set Watchdog default value set from the factory is 200 ms. If the scan time exceeds the watchdog
Timer time limit, the CPU automatically leaves RUN mode and enters PGM mode. The
Handheld displays the following message E003 S/W TIMEOUT when the scan
overrun occurs.
Use AUX 55 to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. You can also perform
this operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC/Setup sub-menu.
AUX 56 Since the DL05 CPU has an additional communication port, you can use the
CPU Network Handheld to set the network address for port 2 and the port communication
Address parameters. The default settings are:
S Station address 1
S HEX mode
S Odd parity
You can use this port with either the Handheld Programmer, DirectSOFT, or, as a
communication port for DirectNET and MODBUS. Refer to DirectNET and
MODBUS manuals for additional information about communication settings
required for network operation.
A6
Auxiliary Functions
NOTE: You will only need to use this procedure if you have port 2 connected to a
Auxiliary Functions
Use AUX 56 to set the network address and communication parameters. You can
also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC/Setup
sub-menu.
AUX 57 DL05 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. Some of the
Set Retentive retentive memory locations are backed up by a super-capacitor, and others are in
Ranges non-volatile FLASH memory. The FLASH memory locations are V7400 to V7577.
The default ranges are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if
your application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all.
The default settings are:
DL05
Memory Area Default Range Available
Range
Control Relays C400 C777 C0 C777
V Memory V1400 V7777 V0 V7777
Timers None by default T0 T177
Counters CT0 CT177 CT0 CT177
Stages None by default S0 S377
Use AUX 57 to change the retentive ranges. You can also perform this operation
from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC/Setup sub-menu.
WARNING: The DL05 CPUs do not have battery-backed RAM. The super-capacitor
will retain the values in the event of a power loss, but only up to 3 weeks. (The
retention time may be as short as 4 1/2 days in 60 degree C operating temperature.)
AUX 58 AUX 58 is used to override the output disable function of the Pause instruction. Use
Test Operations AUX 58 to program a single output or a range of outputs which will operate normally
even when those points are within the scope of the pause instruction.
AUX 59 Bit override can be enabled on a point-by-point basis by using AUX 59 from the
Bit Override Handheld Programmer or, by a menu option from within DirectSOFT. Bit override
basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the CPU. For example, if you
enable bit override for X1, and X1 is off at the time, then the CPU will not change the
state of X1. This means that even if X1 comes on, the CPU will not acknowledge the
change. So, if you used X1 in the program, it would always be evaluated as off in
this case. Of course, if X1 was on when the bit override was enabled, then X1 would
always be evaluated as on.
There is an advantage available when you use the bit override feature. The regular
forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled. For example, if you
enabled the Bit Override for Y0 and it was off at the time, then the CPU would not
change the state of Y0. However, you can still use a programming device to change
the status. Now, if you use the programming device to force Y0 on, it will remain on
and the CPU will not change the state of Y0. If you then force Y0 off, the CPU will
maintain Y0 as off. The CPU will never update the point with the results from the
application program or from the I/O update until the bit override is removed from the
point.
A7
Auxilliary Functions
The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override feature. Notice the
Auxiliary Functions
CPU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled.
Appendix A
Bit Override OFF Bit Override ON
AUX 5B AUX 5B is used with the High-Speed I/O (HSIO) function to select the configuration.
Counter Interface You can choose the type of counter, set the counter parameters, etc. See Chapter 3
Configuration for a complete description of how to select the various counter features.
AUX 5D The DL05 CPU has two program scan modes: fixed and variable. In fixed mode, the
Select PLC scan time is lengthened to the time you specify (in milliseconds). If the actual scan
Scan Mode time is longer than the fixed scan time, then the error code E504 BAD REF/VAL is
displayed. In variable scan mode, the CPU begins each scan as soon as the
previous scans activities complete.
A8
Auxiliary Functions
The following auxiliary functions allow you to setup, view, or change the Handheld
Programmer configuration.
AUX 61 As with most industrial control products, there are cases when additional features
Show Revision and enhancements are made. Sometimes these new features only work with certain
Numbers releases of firmware. By using AUX 61 you can quickly view the CPU and Handheld
Programmer firmware revision numbers. This information (for the CPU) is also
available from within DirectSOFT from the PLC/Diagnostics sub-menu.
AUX 62 The Handheld has a beeper that provides confirmation of keystrokes. You can use
Beeper On/Off Auxiliary (AUX) Function 62 to turn off the beeper.
AUX 65 If you think the Handheld Programmer is not operating correctly, you can use AUX 65
Run Self to run a self diagnostics program. You can check the following items.
Diagnostics S Keypad
S Display
S LEDs and Backlight
S Handheld Programmer EEPROM check
AUX 71 AUX 71 copies information from the CPU memory to an EEPROM installed in the
CPU to HPP Handheld Programmer.You can copy different portions of EEPROM (HP) memory to
EEPROM the CPU memory as shown in the previous table.
A9
Auxilliary Functions
Auxiliary Functions
AUX 72 AUX 72 copies information from the EEPROM installed in the Handheld
HPP EEPROM Programmer to CPU memory in the DL05. You can copy different portions of
Appendix A
to CPU EEPROM (HP) memory to the CPU memory as shown in the previous table.
AUX 73 AUX 73 compares the program in the Handheld programmer (EEPROM) with the
Compare HPP CPU program. You can compare different types of information as shown previously.
EEPROM to CPU
AUX 74 AUX 74 allows you to check the EEPROM in the handheld programmer to make sure
HPP EEPROM it is blank. Its a good idea to use this function anytime you start to copy an entire
Blank Check program to an EEPROM in the handheld programmer.
AUX 75 AUX 75 allows you to clear all data in the EEPROM in the handheld programmer.
Erase HPP You should use this AUX function before you copy a program from the CPU.
EEPROM
AUX 76 You can use AUX 76 to quickly determine what size EEPROM is installed in the
Show EEPROM Handheld Programmer.
Type
AUX 81 You can use AUX 81 to provide an extra measure of protection by entering a
Modify Password password that prevents unauthorized machine operations. The password must be
an eight-character numeric (09) code. Once youve entered a password, you can
remove it by entering all zeros (00000000). (This is the default from the factory.)
Once youve entered a password, you can lock the CPU against access. There are
two ways to lock the CPU with the Handheld Programmer.
S The CPU is always locked after a power cycle (if a password is present).
S You can use AUX 82 and AUX 83 to lock and unlock the CPU.
A10
Auxiliary Functions
You can also enter or modify a password from within DirectSOFT by using the
Auxiliary Functions
WARNING: Make sure you remember the password before you lock the CPU. Once
the CPU is locked you cannot view, change, or erase the password. If you do not
remember the password, you have to return the CPU to the factory for password
removal.
NOTE: The DL05 CPUs support multi-level password protection of the ladder
program. This allows password protection while not locking the communication port
to an operator interface. The multi-level password can be invoked by creating a
password with an upper case A followed by seven numeric characters (e.g.
A1234567).
AUX 82 AUX 82 can be used to unlock a CPU that has been password protected.
Unlock CPU DirectSOFT will automatically ask you to enter the password if you attempt to
communicate with a CPU that contains a password.
AUX 83 AUX 83 can be used to lock a CPU that contains a password. Once the CPU is
Lock CPU locked, you will have to enter a password to gain access. Remember, this is not
necessary with DirectSOFT since the CPU is automatically locked whenever you
exit the software package.
1B
DL05 Error Codes
In This Appendix. . . .
Error Code Table
B2
DL05 Error Codes
E104 A write to the CPU was not successful. Disconnect the power, remove the
WRITE FAILED CPU, and make sure the EEPROM is not write protected. If the EEPROM is
not write protected, make sure the EEPROM is installed correctly. If both
conditions are OK, replace the CPU.
E151 A parity error has occurred in the application program. SP44 will be on and
BAD COMMAND the error code will be stored in V7755 .This problem may possibly be due to
electrical noise. Clear the memory and download the program again. Correct
any grounding problems. If the error returns replace the Micro PLC.
E311 A request from the handheld programmer could not be processed by the
HP COMM CPU. Clear the error and retry the request. If the error continues replace the
ERROR 1 CPU. SP46 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7756.
E312 A data error was encountered during communications with the CPU. Clear
HP COMM the error and retry the request. If the error continues check the cabling
ERROR 2 between the two devices, replace the handheld programmer, then if
necessary replace the CPU. The error code will be stored in V7756.
E313 An address error was encountered during communications with the CPU.
HP COMM Clear the error and retry the request. If the error continues check the cabling
ERROR 3 between the two devices, replace the handheld programmer, then if
necessary replace the CPU. The error code will be stored in V7756.
E316 A mode error was encountered during communications with the CPU. Clear
HP COMM the error and retry the request. If the error continues replace the handheld
ERROR 6 programmer, then if necessary replace the CPU. The error code will be stored
in V7756.
E320 The CPU did not respond to the handheld programmer communication
HP COMM request. Check to insure cabling is correct and not defective. Power cycle the
TIME-OUT system if the error continues replace the CPU first and then the handheld
programmer if necessary.
E321 A data error was encountered during communication with the CPU. Check to
COMM ERROR insure cabling is correct and not defective. Power cycle the system and if the
error continues replace the CPU first and then the handheld programmer if
necessary.
B3
DL05 Error Codes
Appendix A
HP PERIPHERAL programmer communication request. Check to insure cabling is correct and
PORT TIME-OUT not defective. The peripheral device or handheld programmer could be
defective.
E4** A syntax error exists in the application program. The most common is a
NO PROGRAM missing END statement. Run AUX21 to determine which one of the E4**
series of errors is being flagged. SP52 will be on and the error code will be
stored in V7755.
E401 All application programs must terminate with an END statement. Enter the
MISSING END END statement in appropriate location in your program. SP52 will be on and
Error Codes
Appendix B
STATEMENT the error code will be stored in V7755.
E402 A MOVMC or LDLBL instruction was used without the appropriate label.
MISSING LBL Refer to the Chapter 5 for details on these instructions. SP52 will be on and
the error code will be stored in V7755.
E403 A subroutine in the program does not end with the RET instruction. SP52 will
MISSING RET be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E404 A NEXT instruction does not have the corresponding FOR instruction. SP52
MISSING FOR will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E405 A FOR instruction does not have the corresponding NEXT instruction. SP52
MISSING NEXT will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E406 An interrupt routine in the program does not end with the IRT instruction.
MISSING IRT SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E412 There is greater than 64 SBR or DLBL instructions in the program. This error
SBR/LBL>64 is also returned if there is greater than 2 INT instructions used in the program.
SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E421 Two or more SG or ISG labels exist in the application program with the same
DUPLICATE STAGE number. A unique number must be allowed for each Stage and Initial Stage.
REFERENCE SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E422 Two or more LBL instructions exist in the application program with the same
DUPLICATE LBL number. A unique number must be allowed for each and label. SP52 will be
REFERENCE on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E423 Nested loops (programming one FOR/NEXT loop inside of another) are not
NESTED LOOPS allowed. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
E431 An ISG or SG instruction must not be placed after the end statement (such as
INVALID ISG/SG inside a subroutine). SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in
ADDRESS V7755.
B4
DL05 Error Codes
INVALID INT the program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
ADDRESS
E437 An IRTC must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body
INVALID IRTC of the program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
ADDRESS
E438 An IRT must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of
INVALID IRT the program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.
ADDRESS
E440 Either the DLBL instruction has been programmed in the main program area
INVALID DATA (not after the END statement), or the DLBL instruction is on a rung containing
ADDRESS input contact(s).
E441 An ACON or NCON must be programmed after the end statement, not in the
ACON/NCON main body of the program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7755.
E451 MLS instructions must be numbered in ascending order from top to bottom.
BAD MLS/MLR
E453 A timer or counter contact is being used where the associated timer or
MISSING T/C counter does not exist.
E454 One of the contacts is missing from a TMRA instruction.
BAD TMRA
E455 One of the contacts is missing from a CNT or UDC instruction.
BAD CNT
E456 One of the contacts is missing from the SR instruction.
BAD SR
B5
DL05 Error Codes
Appendix A
STACK OVERFLOW of OR STR and AND STR instructions.
E462 An unmatched number of logic levels have been stored on the stack. Insure
STACK the number of AND STR and OR STR instructions match the number of STR
UNDERFLOW instructions.
E463 A STR instruction was not used to begin a rung of ladder logic.
LOGIC ERROR
E464 A rung of ladder logic is not terminated properly.
MISSING CKT
E471 Two or more OUT instructions reference the same I/O point.
Error Codes
Appendix B
DUPLICATE COIL
REFERENCE
E472 Two or more TMR instructions reference the same number.
DUPLICATE TMR
REFERENCE
E473 Two or more CNT instructions reference the same number.
DUPLICATE CNT
REFERENCE
E499 Invalid PRINT instruct usage. Quotations and/or spaces were not entered or
PRINT entered incorrectly.
INSTRUCTION
B6
DL05 Error Codes
INVALID
INSTRUCTION
E506 An invalid operation was attempted by the handheld programmer.
INVALID
OPERATION
E520 An operation which is invalid in the RUN mode was attempted by the
BAD OPRUN handheld programmer.
E521 An operation which is invalid in the TEST RUN mode was attempted by the
BAD OPTRUN handheld programmer.
E523 An operation which is invalid in the TEST PROGRAM mode was attempted
BAD OPTPGM by the handheld programmer.
E524 An operation which is invalid in the PROGRAM mode was attempted by the
BAD OPPGM handheld programmer.
E525 An operation was attempted by the handheld programmer while the CPU
MODE SWITCH mode switch was in a position other than the TERM position.
E526 The handheld programmer is in the OFFLINE mode. To change to the
OFF LINE ONLINE mode use the MODE the key.
E527 The handheld programmer is in the ON LINE mode. To change to the OFF
ON LINE LINE mode use the MODE the key.
E528 The operation attempted is not allowed during a Run Time Edit.
CPU MODE
E540 The CPU has been password locked. To unlock the CPU use AUX82 with the
CPU LOCKED password.
E541 The password used to unlock the CPU with AUX82 was incorrect.
WRONG
PASSWORD
E542 The CPU powered up with an invalid password and reset the password to
PASSWORD RESET 00000000. A password may be re-entered using AUX81.
E601 Attempted to enter an instruction which required more memory than is
MEMORY FULL available in the CPU.
E602 A search function was performed and the instruction was not found.
INSTRUCTION
MISSING
B7
DL05 Error Codes
Appendix A
DATA MISSING
E604 A search function was performed and the reference was not found.
REFERENCE
MISSING
E620 An attempt to transfer more data between the CPU and handheld
OUT OF MEMORY programmer than the receiving device can hold.
E621 An attempt to write to a non-blank EEPROM in the handheld programmer
EEPROM NOT was made. Erase the EEPROM and then retry the write.
BLANK
Error Codes
Appendix B
E622 A data transfer was attempted with no EEPROM (or possibly a faulty
NO HPP EEPROM EEPROM) installed in the handheld programmer.
E623 A function was requested with an EEPROM in the handheld programmer
SYSTEM EEPROM which contains system information only.
E624 A function was requested with an EEPROM in the handheld programmer
V-MEMORY ONLY which contains V-memory data only.
E625 A function was requested with an EEPROM in the handheld programmer
PROGRAM ONLY which contains program data only.
E626 An attempt to transfer data from a tape to a UVPROM Memory Cartridge.
PROM MC This transfer must be made using a CMOS RAM Cartridge.
E627 An attempt to write to a write-protected or faulty EEPROM in the handheld
BAD WRITE programmer was made. Check the write protect jumper and replace the
EEPROM if necessary.
E628 The wrong size EEPROM is being used in the handheld programmer. This
EEPROM TYPE error occurs when the program size is larger than what the HPP can hold.
ERROR
E640 A compare between the EEPROM handheld programmer and the CPU was
COMPARE ERROR found to be in error.
E641 The volume level of the cassette player is not set properly. Adjust the volume
VOLUME LEVEL and retry the operation.
E642 An error was detected while data was being transferred to the handheld
CHECKSUM ERROR programmers Memory Cartridge. Check cabling and retry the operation.
E650 A system error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the
HPP SYSTEM handheld programmer. If the error returns replace the handheld programmer.
ERROR
E651 A ROM error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the
HPP ROM ERROR handheld programmer. If the error returns replace the handheld programmer.
E652 A RAM error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the
HPP RAM ERROR handheld programmer. If the error returns replace the handheld programmer.
1C
Instruction
Execution Times
In This Appendix. . . .
Introduction
Instruction Execution Times
C2
Instruction Execution Times
Introduction
This appendix contains several tables that provide the instruction execution times
for DL05 Micro PLCs. Many of the execution times depend on the type of data used
with the instruction. Registers may be classified into the following types:
S Data (word) Registers
S Bit Registers
V-Memory Data Some V-memory locations are considered data registers, such as timer or counter
Registers current values. Standard user V memory is classified as a V-memory data register.
Note that you can load a bit pattern into these types of registers, even though their
primary use is for data registers. The following locations are data registers:
V-Memory Bit You may recall that some of the discrete points such as X, Y, C, etc. are automatically
Registers mapped into V memory. The following bit registers contain this data:
Appendix C
In these cases, execution times that depend on the amount and type of parameters.
The execution time tables list execution times for both situations, as shown below:
Appendix C
ORPD X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP 20.0 ms 12.6 ms
ORND X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP 19.8 ms 12.7 ms
ANDPD X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP 20.0 ms 12.6 ms
ANDND X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP 19.9 ms 12.8 ms
SET 1st #: X, Y, C, S 32.2 ms 3.7 ms
2nd #: X, Y, C, S (N pt) 14ms+3.1msxN 4.7 ms
RST 1st #: X, Y, C, S 34.4 ms 3.7 ms
2nd #: X, Y, C, S (N pt) 16+3.2xN 4.7 ms
1st #: T, CT 63.6 ms 3.7 ms
2nd #: T, CT (N pt) 39+6.7xN 4.9 ms
PAUSE 1wd: Y 23.4 ms 23.0 ms
2wd: Y (N points) 19.7+1.5xN 19.5+1.4xN
C4
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
V: Data Reg. V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg. 16.7 ms 16.8 ms
K:Constant 11.6 ms 11.7 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 42.7 ms 42.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 42.7 ms 42.9 ms
V: Bit Reg. V:Data Reg. 16.7 ms 16.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 16.7 ms 16.8 ms
K:Constant 11.6 ms 11.7 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 42.7 ms 42.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 42.7 ms 42.9 ms
P:Indir. (Data) V:Data Reg. 42.7 ms 42.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 42.7 ms 42.8 ms
K:Constant 37.8 ms 38.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 66.6 ms 66.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 66.6 ms 66.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) V:Data Reg. 42.7 ms 42.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 42.7 ms 42.8 ms
K:Constant 37.8 ms 38.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 66.6 ms 66.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 66.6 ms 66.7 ms
C6
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
V:Bit Reg. 42.9 ms 42.8 ms
K:Constant 38.1 ms 38.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 66.8 ms 66.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 66.8 ms 66.7 ms
STRN 1st 2nd
T, CT V:Data Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
V:Bit Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
K:Constant 11.9 ms 12.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
1st 2nd
V: Data Reg. V:Data Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
V:Bit Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
K:Constant 11.9 ms 12.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
V: Bit Reg. V:Data Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
V:Bit Reg. 17.1 ms 17.2 ms
K:Constant 11.9 ms 12.0 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
P:Indir. (Data) V:Data Reg. 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
V:Bit Reg. 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
K:Constant 38.3 ms 38.4 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 67.0 ms 67.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 67.0 ms 67.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) V:Data Reg. 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
V:Bit Reg. 43.0 ms 43.1 ms
K:Constant 38.3 ms 38.4 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 67.0 ms 67.1 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 67.0 ms 67.1 ms
C8
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
V:Bit Reg. 41.6 ms 41.6 ms
K:Constant 36.9 ms 36.9 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 65.6 ms 65.6 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 65.6 ms 65.6 ms
ANDN 1st 2nd
T, CT V:Data Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7
V:Bit Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7
K:Constant 10.8 ms 10.8
P:Indir. (Data) 41.9 ms 41.9
P:Indir. (Bit) 41.9 ms 41.9
1st 2nd
V: Data Reg. V:Data Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7 ms
V:Bit Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7 ms
K:Constant 10.8 ms 10.8 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 41.9 ms 41.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 41.9 ms 41.9 ms
V: Bit Reg. V:Data Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7 ms
V:Bit Reg. 15.8 ms 15.7 ms
K:Constant 10.8 ms 10.8 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 41.9 ms 41.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 41.9 ms 41.9 ms
P:Indir. (Data) V:Data Reg. 41.8 ms 41.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 41.8 ms 41.8 ms
K:Constant 37.8 ms 37.8 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 65.9 ms 65.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 65.9 ms 65.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) V:Data Reg. 41.8 ms 41.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 41.8 ms 41.8 ms
K:Constant 37.8 ms 37.8 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 65.9 ms 65.9 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 65.9 ms 65.9 ms
C10
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
P:Indir. (Bit) 68.7 ms 3.7 ms
LDD V:Data Reg. 47.1 ms 3.7 ms
V:Bit Reg. 47.1 ms 3.7 ms
K:Constant 42.8 ms 3.7 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 72.2 ms 3.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 72.2 ms 3.7 ms
LDF 1st 2nd
X, Y, C, S K:Constant 65.8ms+13.9msxN 4.9 ms
T, CT, SP (N pt)
LDA O: (Octal constant for address) 42.7 ms 3.7 ms
OUT V:Data Reg. 16.6 ms 3.7 ms
V:Bit Reg. 16.6 ms 3.7 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 41.8 ms 3.7 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 41.8 ms 3.7 ms
OUTD V:Data Reg. 18.1 ms 3.8 ms
V:Bit Reg. 18.1 ms 3.8 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 43.3 ms 3.8 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 43.3 ms 3.8 ms
OUTF 1st 2nd
X, Y, C K:Constant 61.9ms+22msxN 4.7 ms
(N pt)
POP None 41.1 ms 2.7 ms
C12
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
INC V:Data Reg. 35.7 ms 3.4 ms
V:Bit Reg. 35.7 ms 3.4 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 60.2 ms 3.4 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 60.2 ms 3.4 ms
DEC V:Data Reg. 41.4 ms 3.3 ms
V:Bit Reg. 41.4 ms 3.3 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 64.2 ms 3.3 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 64.2 ms 3.3 ms
ADDB V:Data Reg. 69.5 ms 3.3 ms
V:Bit Reg. 69.5 ms 3.3 ms
K:Constant 67.3 ms 3.3 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 94.2 ms 3.6 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 94.2 ms 3.6 ms
SUBB V:Data Reg. 69.3 ms 3.3 ms
V:Bit Reg. 69.3 ms 3.3 ms
K:Constant 67.8 ms 3.5 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 94.3 ms 3.2 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 94.3 ms 3.2 ms
MULB V:Data Reg. 23.4 ms 3.2 ms
V:Bit Reg. 23.4 ms 3.2 ms
K:Constant 19.8 ms 3.3 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 48.5 ms 3.2 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 48.5 ms 3.2 ms
DIVB V:Data Reg. 76.1 ms 3.3 ms
V:Bit Reg. 76.1 ms 3.3 ms
K:Constant 76.9 ms 3.3 ms
P:Indir. (Data) 105.5 ms 3.2 ms
P:Indir. (Bit) 105.5 ms 3.2 ms
C14
Instruction Execution Times
Appendix C
MLR K (07)
In This Appendix. . . .
DL05 PLC Special Relays
D2
Special Relays
Special Relays are just contacts that are set by the CPU operating system to
indicate a particular system event has occurred. These contacts are available for
use in your ladder program. Knowing just the right special relay contact to use for a
particular situation can save lot of programming time. Since the CPU operating
system sets and clears special relay contacts, the ladder program only has to use
them as inputs in ladder logic.
Startup and SP0 First scan on for the first scan after a power cycle or program to run transition
Real-Time Relays only. The relay is reset to off on the second scan. It is useful where a
function needs to be performed only on program startup.
SP1 Always ON provides a contact to insure an instruction is executed every scan.
SP3 1 minute clock on for 30 seconds and off for 30 seconds.
SP4 1 second clock on for 0.5 second and off for 0.5 second.
SP5 100 ms clock on for 50 ms. and off for 50 ms.
SP6 50 ms clock on for 25 ms. and off for 25 ms.
SP7 Alternate scan on every other scan.
CPU Status Relays SP11 Forced run on when the mode switch is in the run position and the CPU is
mode running.
SP12 Terminal on when the CPU is in the run mode.
run mode
SP13 Test on when the CPU is in the test run mode.
run mode
SP15 Test on when the CPU is in the test stop mode.
stop mode
SP16 Terminal on when the mode switch is the the TERM position and the CPU is in
PGM mode program mode.
Special Relays
Appendix D
SP17 Forced stop on when the mode switch is in the STOP position.
SP20 Forced on when the STOP instruction is executed.
stop mode
SP22 Interrupt enabled on when interrupts have been enabled using the ENI instruction.
D3
Special Relays
System Monitoring SP36 Override setup on when the override function is used.
relay
SP37 Scan control on when the actual scan time runs over the prescribed scan time.
error
SP40 Critical error on when a critical error such as I/O communication loss has
occurred.
SP41 Warning on when a non critical error has occurred.
SP42 Diagnostics error on when a diagnostics error or a system error occurs.
SP44 Program on when a memory error such as a memory parity error has
memory error occurred.
SP45 I/O error on when an I/O error such as a blown fuse occurs.
SP46 Communications on when a communication error occurs on any of the CPU ports.
error
SP50 Fault instruction on when a Fault Instruction is executed.
SP51 Watch Dog on if the CPU Watch Dog timer times out.
timeout
SP52 Grammatical on if a grammatical error has occurred either while the CPU is
error running or if the syntax check is run. V7755 will hold the exact error
code.
SP53 Solve logic error on if CPU cannot solve the logic.
SP54 Communication on whent RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong
error parameters.
SP56 Table instuction on if a table instruction with a pointer is executed and the pointer
overrun value is outside the table boundary.
Accumulator SP60 Value less than on when the accumulator value is less than the instruction value.
Status SP61 Value equal to on when the accumulator value is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 Greater than on when the accumulator value is greater than the instruction value.
SP63 Zero on when the result of the instruction is zero (in the accumulator.)
SP64 Half borrow on when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.
Special Relays
Appendix D
SP65 Borrow on when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.
SP66 Half carry on when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP67 Carry when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP70 Sign on anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP71 Pointer on when the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.
reference error
SP73 Overflow on if overflow occurs in the accumulator when a signed addition or
subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.
SP75 Data error on if a BCD number is expected and a nonBCD number is
encountered.
SP76 Load zero on when any instruction loads a value of zero into the accumulator.
D4
Special Relays
HSIO Pulse SP104 Profile Complete on when the pulse output profile is completed. (Mode 30)
Output Relay
Appendix A
Communication SP116 CPU port busy on when port 2 is the master and sending data.
Monitoring Relays Port 2
SP117 Communications on when port 2 is the master and has a communication error.
error Port 2
Equal Relays for SP540 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
HSIO Mode 10 V2320 / V2321.
Counter Presets SP541 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2322 / V2323.
SP542 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2324 / V2325.
SP543 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2326 / V2327.
SP544 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2330 / V2331.
SP545 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2332 / V2333.
SP546 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2334 / V2335.
SP547 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2336 / V2337.
SP550 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2340 / V2341.
SP551 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2342 / V2343.
SP552 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2344 / V2345.
SP553 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2346 / V2347
Special Relays
Appendix D
SP554 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2350 / V2351.
SP555 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2352 / V2353.
SP556 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2354 / V2355.
SP557 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2356 / V2357.
D5
Special Relays
SP560 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2360 / V2361.
SP561 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2362 / V2363.
SP562 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2364 / V2365.
SP563 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2366 / V2367.
SP564 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2370 / V2371.
SP565 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2372 / V2373.
SP566 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2374 / V2375.
SP567 Current = target value on when the counter current value equals the value in
V2376 / V2377.
Special Relays
Appendix D
1E
DL05
Product Weights
In This Appendix. . . .
Product Weight Table
E2
Product Weights
PLC Weight
D005AR 0.60 lb. (272g)
D005DR 0.60 lb. (272g)
D005AD 0.58 lb. (263g)
D005DD 0.56 lb. (254g)
D005AA 0.60 lb. (272g)
D005DA 0.60 lb. (272g)
D005DRD 0.56 lb. (254g)
D005DDD 0.58 lb. (263g)
Product Weights
Appendix E
1F
European Union
Directives (CE)
In This Appendix. . . .
European Union (EU) Directives
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines
F2
European Union Directives
This area of certification and approval is absolutely vital to anyone who wants to do
business in Europe. One of the key tasks that faced the EU member countries and
the European Economic Area (EEA) was the requirement to bring several similar yet
distinct standards together into one common standard for all members. The primary
purpose of a single standard was to make it easier to sell and transport goods
between the various countries and to maintain a safe working and living
environment. The Directives that resulted from this merging of standards are now
legal requirements for doing business in Europe. Products that meet these
Directives are required to have a CE mark to signify compliance.
Member Countries As of January 1, 1997, the members of the EU are Austria, Belgium, Denmark,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, The Netherlands,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden, and the United Kingdom. Iceland, Liechtenstein, and
Norway together with the EU members make up the European Economic Area
(EEA) and all are covered by the Directives.
Applicable There are several Directives that apply to our products. Directives may be amended,
Directives or added, as required.
S Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) this Directive
attempts to ensure that devices, equipment, and systems have the
ability to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment
without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbance to anything
in that environment.
S Machinery Safety Directive this Directive covers the safety aspects
of the equipment, installation, etc. There are several areas involved,
including testing standards covering both electrical noise immunity and
noise generation.
S Low Voltage Directive this Directive is also safety related and
covers electrical equipment that has voltage ranges of 501000VAC
and/or 751500VDC.
S Battery Directive this Directive covers the production, recycling, and
disposal of batteries.
Compliance Certain standards within each Directive already require mandatory compliance. The
EMC Directive, which has gained the most attention, became mandatory as of
January 1, 1996. The Low Voltage Directive became mandatory as of January 1,
EU Directives
1997.
Appendix F
Ultimately, we are all responsible for our various pieces of the puzzle. As
manufacturers, we must test our products and document any test results and/or
installation procedures that are necessary to comply with the Directives. As a
machine builder, you are responsible for installing the products in a manner which
will ensure compliance is maintained. You are also responsible for testing any
combinations of products that may (or may not) comply with the Directives when
used together.
F3
European Union Directives
The end user of the products must comply with any Directives that may cover
maintenance, disposal, etc. of equipment or various components. Although we
strive to provide the best assistance available, it is impossible for us to test all
possible configurations of our products with respect to any specific Directive.
Because of this, it is ultimately your responsibility to ensure that your machinery (as
a whole) complies with these Directives and to keep up with applicable Directives
and/or practices that are required for compliance.
As of January 1, 1999, the DL05, DL205, DL305, and DL405 PLC systems
manufactured by Koyo Electronics Industries or FACTS Engineering, when properly
installed and used, conform to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Low
Voltage Directive, and Machinery Directive requirements of the following standards.
S EMC Directive Standards Revelant to PLCs
EN500811 Generic emission standard for residential, commercial,
and light industry
EN500812 Generic emission standard for industrial environment.
EN500821 Generic immunity standard for residential, commercial,
and light industry
EN500822 Generic immunity standard for industrial environment.
S Low Voltage Directive Standards Applicable to PLCs
EN610101 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.
S Product Specific Standard for PLCs
EN611312 Programmable controllers, equipment requirements and
tests. This standard replaces the above generic standards for immunity
and safety. However, the generic emissions standards must still be used
in conjunction with the following standards:
EN 61000-3-2 Harmonics
EN 61000-3-2 Fluctuations
PLCDirect is currently in the process of changing their testing
procedures from the generic standards to the product specific
standards.
Special Installation The installation requirements to comply with the requirements of the Machinery
Manual Directive, EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive are slightly more complex than
the normal installation requirements found in the United States. To help with this, we
have published a special manual which you can order:
S DAEUM EU Installation Manual that covers special installation
requirements to meet the EU Directive requirements. Order this manual
to obtain the most up-to-date information.
EU Directives
Appendix F
F4
European Union Directives
Other Sources of Although the EMC Directive gets the most attention, other basic Directives, such as
Information the Machinery Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, also place restrictions on the
control panel builder. Because of these additional requirements it is recommended
Appendix A
NOTE: Very few mains filters can reduce problem emissions to negligible levels. In
some cases, filters may increase conducted emissions if not properly matched to the
problem emissions.
Suppression and In order to comply with the fire risk requirements of the Low Voltage and Machinery
Fusing Directive electrical standards EN 610101, and EN 602041, by limiting the power
into unlimited mains circuits with power leads reversed, it is necessary to fuse both
AC and DC supply inputs. You should also install a transient voltage suppressor
across the power input connections of the PLC. Choose a suppressor such as a metal
oxide varistor, with a rating of 275VAC working voltage for 230V nominal supplies
(150VAC working voltage for 115V supplies) and high energy capacity (eg. 140
joules).
Transient suppressors must be protected by fuses and the capacity of the transient
suppressor must be greater than the blow characteristics of the fuses or circuit
breakers to avoid a fire risk. A recommended AC supply input arrangement for Koyo
PLCs is to use twin 3 amp TT fused terminals with fuse blown indication, such as
DINnectors DNF10L terminals, or twin circuit breakers, wired to a Schaffner FN2010
filter or equivalent, with high energy transient suppressor soldered directly across the
output terminals of the filter. PLC system inputs should also be protected from voltage
impulses by deriving their power from the same fused, filtered, and surge-suppressed
supply.
EU Directives
Appendix F
Internal Enclosure A heavy-duty star earth terminal block should be provided in every cubicle for the
Grounding connection of all earth ground straps, protective earth ground connections, mains
filter earth ground wires, and mechanical assembly earth ground connections. This
should be installed to comply with safety and EMC requirements, local standards, and
the requirements found in IEC 100052.The Machinery Directive also requires that
the common terminals of PLC input modules, and common supply side of loads driven
from PLC output modules should be connected to the protective earth ground
terminal.
F6
European Union Directives
Equipotential
Grounding
Appendix A
Adequate site earth grounding must be provided for equipment containing modern
electronic circuitry. The use of isolated earth electrodes for electronic systems is
forbidden in some countries. Make sure you check any requirements for your
particular destination. IEC 100052 covers equi-potential bonding of earth grids
adequately, but special attention should be given to apparatus and control cubicles
that contain I/O devices, remote I/O racks, or have inter-system communications with
the primary PLC system enclosure. An equi-potential bond wire must be provided
alongside all serial communications cables, and to any separate items of the plant
which contain I/O devices connected to the PLC. The diagram shows an example
of four physical locations connected by a communications cable.
Communications Conductive
Screened
Adapter
and Shielded Cable
Cables Serial
I/O
To Earth
Block
Equi-potential
Bond
Control Cubicle
Good quality 24 AWG minimum twisted-pair shielded cables, with overall foil and
braid shields are recommended for analog cabling and communications cabling
outside of the PLC enclosure. To date it has been a common practice to only provide
an earth ground for one end of the cable shield in order to minimize the risk of noise
caused by earth ground loop currents between apparatus. The procedure of only
EU Directives
grounding one end, which primarily originated as a result of trying to reduce hum in
Appendix F
100W 100W
100W
Termination Termination
Shielded Cables When you run cables between PLC items within an enclosure which also contains
within Enclosures susceptible electronic equipment from other manufacturers, remember that these cables
may be a source of RF emissions. There are ways to minimize this risk. Standard data
cables connecting PLCs and/or operator interfaces should be routed well away from other
equipment and their associated cabling. You can make special serial cables where the
cable shield is connected to the enclosures earth ground at both ends, the same way as
external cables are connected.
Network Isolation For safety reasons, it is a specific requirement of the Machinery Directive that a keyswitch
must be provided that isolates any network input signal during maintenance, so that
remote commands cannot be received that could result in the operation of the machinery.
EU Directives
The FAISONET does not have a keyswitch! Use a keylock and switch on your enclosure
Appendix F
which when open removes power from the FAISONET. To avoid the introduction of
noise into the system, any keyswitch assembly should be housed in its own earth
grounded steel box and the integrity of the shielded cable must be maintained.
Again, for further information on EU directives we recommend that you get a copy of
our EU Installation Manual (DAEUM). Also, if you are connected to the World
Wide Web, you can check the EU Commisions official site at:
http://europ.eu.int/
F8
European Union Directives
DC Powered Due to slightly higher emissions radiated by the DC powered versions of the DL05, and
Versions the differing emissions performance for different DC supply voltages, the following
stipulations must be met.
Appendix A
Items Specific to
the DL05 S The rating between all circuits in this product are rated as basic
insulation only, as appropriate for single fault conditions.
S There is no isolation offered between the PLC and the analog inputs of
this product.
S It is the responsibility of the system designer to earth one side of all
control and power circuits, and to earth the braid of screened cables.
S This equipment must be properly installed while adhering to the
guidelines of the in house PLC installation manual DAEUM, and the
installation standards IEC 100051, IEC 100052 and IEC 11314.
S It is a requirement that all PLC equipment must be housed in a
protective steel enclosure, which limits access to operators by a lock
and power breaker. If access is required by operators or untrained
personnel, the equipment must be installed inside an internal cover or
secondary enclosure.
S It should be noted that the safety requirements of the machinery
directive standard EN602041 state that all equipment power circuits
must be wired through isolation transformers or isolating power
supplies, and that one side of all AC or DC control circuits must be
earthed.
S Both power input connections to the PLC must be separately fused
using 3 amp T type antisurge fuses, and a transient suppressor fitted
to limit supply overvoltages.
S If the user is made aware by notice in the documentation that if the
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
EU Directives
Appendix F
1
Index
N P
Network Configuration and Connections, 432 Panel layout, 27
Network Diagrams, 432, 433 Part Numbers, 15, 16
Network Instructions, 5114 Password, 410, A8
Network master operation, 441 Pause instruction, 519
Network slave operation, 436 PID Loops
Next instruction, 597 Alarms, process, 853
algorithms, 831
NonFatal Errors, 92 basic operation, 819
Normally Closed Contact, 54 bibliography, 863
cascade control, 851
Not instruction, 514 data configuration, 826
Not Jump instruction, 722 features, 82
Number Conversion Instructions, 583 feed forward control, 847
On/Off control, 849
Numbering Systems, 420 Ramp/Soak generator, 857
Numerical Constant instruction, 5106, 5108 sample rate, 813
scheduling, 813
setup parameters, 86
terminology, 84, 864
O troubleshooting tips, 862
On/Off control, 849 tuning procedure, 838
One shot, 514 PID loops, auto tuning, 838
Or Double instruction, 558 PLC Numbering Systems, 420
Or If Equal instruction, 521 Pop instruction, 553
Or If Not Equal instruction, 521 Position algorithm, 831
Or Immediate instruction, 526 Positive Differential instruction, 514
Or instruction, 510, 557 Power indicator, 96
comparative, 524 Power wiring, 19
Or Negative Differential instruction, 516 Presets, 38
Or Not Immediate instruction, 526 calculating values, 310
starting location, 39
Or Not instruction, 510
comparative, 524 Print Message instruction, 5110
Or Out Immediate instruction, 528 Process control, 817
Or Out instruction, 513 Product Weight Table, E2
Or Positive Diffential instruction, 516 Profiles
home search, 338
Or Store instruction, 512 motion control, 325
Out Double instruction, 552 registration, 330, 335
trapezoidal, 330, 332
Out Formatted instruction, 553
Index5
velocity, 330, 340 corresponding to error codes, 93
Program Control Instructions, 597 Specifications
Program Execution Time, 419 CPU, 43
D005AA, 234
Program Mode, 412 D005AD, 230
Programming, concepts, 112 D005AR, 226
D005DA, 236
Programming Methods, 15 D005DD, 232
examples, 110 D005DDD, 240
Proportional term, 834 D005DR, 228
D005DRD, 238
Discrete option modules, 242
Q environmental, 28
input power, 211
Quick Start, 17 motion profiles, 328
Stage Control / Status Bit Map, 429
Stage Counter instruction, 538, 716
R
Stage instructions, 721
Ramp/soak generator, 857 Stage programming, 112, 72
Read from Network instruction, 5114 convergence, 719
Registration profile, 330, 335 emergency stop, 714
four steps to writing a stage program, 79
Relay wiring, 219 garage door opener example, 710
prolonging contact life, 221 initial stages, 75
Reset Immediate instruction, 529 introduction, 72
jump instruction, 77
Reset instruction, 518 mutually exclusive transitions, 714
Retentive Memory Ranges, 49 parallel processes, 712
Reverse-acting loop, 833 parallel processing concepts, 719
power flow transition, 718
Run Indicator, 97 program organization, 715
Run Mode, 412 questions and answers, 725
stage instruction characteristics, 76
Run time edits, 914 stage view, 718
state transition diagrams, 73
supervisor process, 717
S timer inside stage, 713
Safety guidelines, 22 Standard RLL Programming, 112
Scratchpad memory, 110 Status Indicators, 46, 96
Set Immediate instruction, 529 Store If Equal instruction, 520
Set instruction, 518 Store If Not Equal instruction, 520
Setpoint, 827 Store immediate instruction, 526
Shift Register instruction, 542 Store instruction, 59
comparative, 523
Shift Register Instructions, 530
Store Negative Differential instruction, 515
Shift Right instruction, 580
Store Not Immediate instruction, 526
Shuffle Digits instruction, 590
Store Not instruction, 59
Sinking / sourcing I/O, 215 comparative, 523
Special relays, 38, D2
Index6
Store Positive Differential instruction, 515 Troubleshooting guide
Subroutine Return Conditional instruction, 599 HSIO Mode 20, 324
HSIO Mode 30, 343
Subroutine Return instruction, 599
Subtract Binary instruction, 573, 575
Subtract double instruction, 566 U
Subtract instruction, 565 Up Down Counter instruction, 540
Sum instruction, 578
System design, 111
V
System Vmemory, 426
Vmemory, 426
Velocity algorithm, 831
T Velocity profile, 330, 340
Table Instructions, 592
Technical support, 12
W
Time-proportioning control, 849
Timer Fast instruction, 531 Web site, 12